Hager TC2015 16

Energy Building
distribution automation
catalogue catalogue
15
16
Dear Partner,
We are pleased to present to you our new Technical Catalogue

2015-16
Hager group focus on a single core Business for 60 years, which

help us to strengthen our leading position in electrical infrastructures.
India is a strategic market for our development, with dedicated
resources and ranges. This will be reinforced in Project 2020
currently mapped out.
In this context, we have organized ourselves accordingly in all the

segments of Hager India subsidiary. Our manufacturing unit in Pune,
sales and marketing organization, are at your service to deliver on
time quality, user-friendly and competitive products. When you
choose Hager, leader in electrical solutions, you get access to our
innovative solutions, and our teams are delighted to provide you
help to get your project done.
Our Technical Catalogue, heralds several smart new ranges and

solutions, these new ranges aim to offer you the right solution at the
right price. All our products and solutions offer reliable performance
propose modularity, quality and sophisticated design.
Our next journey will continue to take us through innovation,

identifying the next market trends, our clients needs hence
proposing you the adequate answers to the market, whilst
minimizing our ecological footprint.
Best regards,
Benoit Lecuyer
Managing Director
Hager India
Dear Customer,
Hager is 60 years young! Good 60 years of innovative electrical

solutions designed & delivered by passionate people!
Though Hagers foray into the Indian market does not span this long,
our growth and market presence is enviable. Innovative solutions,
adapted for Indian market, efficient channel & service network, and
passionate people differentiates us. Well, all in place, thanks to the
valued patronage extended by each one of you!
Happy to share insights on Hagers strategic initiative, the Project 2015.

We have stayed on course across all defined axis and Hager India will
more than double its sales revenues by 2015. We now welcome the
new strategic initiative, that will be a game changer for Hager in India.
We have stayed true to our commitment on delighting with innovative

solutions! The 2015 edition of technical catalogue too features a slew of
new offers. The on load Manual Changeovers (MCOS), Auto Transfer
Switches (ATS) and our latest, the three phase overvoltage protection in
1 module, to list a few.
We look forward to your valued patronage and assured of our best

services, always!
Best regards,
Praveen Kumar Nair P

Head - Sales & Marketing
Hager India
2
The specialist for
electrical installations
Since 1955 Hager is the specialist for electrical installations in residential and commercial sectors,
as a standard you can receive everything from one source: systems and solutions with high quality,
reliability and ease of installation.
New ideas for the customers benefit

Together with customers from industry and the electrical of energy-efficient housing, which will provide greater
trade, Hager Group is working on future topics such as comfort while requiring less energy consumption. The link
electro-mobility, Ambient Assisted Living, where building between many of these technologies will be the distribution
automation facilitates the everyday life of the elderly board, the product with which the company achieved
and individuals who require care, and on the networking its growth.
A leading group
The Hager brand represents the core business of Highly innovative achievements provide a market edge with
Hager Group. more than 762 employees working in R&D. With more than
5% of turnover reinvested in R&D, Hager Group filed a total
The company was founded in 1955 by Hermann Hager and of 1564 patents to date.
Dr. Oswald Hager together with their father Peter and today
remains an independent business, owned and run by mem- Components and solutions are produced in 23 production
bers of the Hager family, with its head office in Blieskastel, sites around the globe and customers in more than
Germany. The organisation of the company as a European 95 countries all over the world trust in them.
Company (Societas Europaea, SE) underlines both its
cultural diversity and its European roots. Hager Group is,
though, a worldwide business venture: 11,400 employees
and generates a turnover of around 1.7 billion euros (2014).
3
Safe distribution of energy
Energy
distribution
A clear structure -
Hagers range of products
Hager has divided its extensive range of products into two areas of application, Energy distribution and
Building automation, to help you find the right product and solution for your individual needs.
As the leading specialist in the field of electrical installations for residential and commercial buildings,
the Hager brand provides you with everything from one source: systems and solutions highest quality,
reliable and easy to install.
4
Switching with style
Building
automation
www.hager.co.in
5
Distribution boards
Distribution boards
Protection and switching devices
Protection devices
Photovoltaic range
Signaling and power interface
Energy and lighting control
Catalogue references index

Distribution
novello+ range | Metal plug & socket outlet
boards
accessory | Panelboards system
10 - 53
Distribution
boards
golf I vector I Busbars and terminals 56 - 67
switching devices
MCCBs-Moulded Case Circuit Breakers |
Protection &
Manual chanegover switches | Automatic
transfer switches | ACCL | Switch disconnectors |
70 - 169
Changeover switches
MCBs I RCCBs I RCBOs I Accessories I
Protection
devices
Earth Leakage Relays I SPDs I 170 - 220
HRC Fuses and Fuse carriers
IP 65 UV protected Vector Enclosure |
Photovoltaic
Photo Voltaic Fuses and Fuse carriers |
1000V DC Switch Disconnector |
224 - 227
Surge Protection Device for Photovoltaic
Indicator lights I Pushbuttons I Analogue
power interface
Signaling and
voltmeters and ammeters I Current transformers I
Selector switches I Bells & Buzzers I Contactors I
230 - 245
Latching Relays
Energy and lighting
Time switches I Twilight switches I

Presence & movement detectors I
control
LED Floodlight I Dimmers I Energy meters I

248 - 294
Time lag switch I Energy meters
reference index
Catalogue
295 - 298
Distribution boards
+
welcome to novello
distribution boards section
novello+ range of distribution boards are much more than enclosures. They incorporate new
dimensions of protection for safety and convenience.
New product
SPN distribution boards 14
TPN distribution boards 15
TPN horizontal PPI distribution

boards 16
TPN tier type PPI distribution boards 17
TPN vertical distribution boards 18
TPN phase segregated distribution

boards 21
TPN phase selector distribution

boards 22
Flexi distribution boards 23
Metal plug & socket outlet 25
Enclosures 24
Plug & socket outlets 25
Cable end boxes for novello DBs 26
VTPN Panel boards 50

+
novello
distribution boards
Absolute benchmark
Advantages for you : Technical data :

Quick & easy to install Single Door: IP30 / Double Door: IP43 & IP54
Additional safety for human protection As per IS 8623 - III

Exceptional aesthetics Protection against mechanical impact IK09
Wide range to suit all applications
Plain & Acrylic doors
RAL 9010
Standard Accessories:
- Wires sets
- Insulated bus bars
- Insulated neutral bars & earth bar
- blanking plates, Cable management system
- Circuit identification labels
10
Expert
tips
Patented gland plate Business card holder
1 locking system with minimal

screws
5 to retain electrician/ maintenance
contact information for future use
Patented IP2X neutral Site upgradable door
2 terminals
with flexibility to position it
on the chassis 6 handle with key lock facility
Spirit level to ensure Double packaging
3 accurate & rofessional

alignment of wall box
7 for door protection until
installation is complete
Lab certified IP43 Star washers
4 protection
in double door versions.
Archived by dual neoprene
gasket between door, frame &
wall box
8 for earthing
11
Expert
tips
Removable indication Cement spill
9 labels
13 protection
Reversible door Removable chassis
10 14 for ease of installation
Captive spring Convenient 180 degree
11 operated hinge
15 door opening
Anti wall insertion Reusable cable
12 marking
16 management kit
12
+
novello
distribution boards
Absolute benchmark

Professional alignment with spirit level Single Door: IP30 / Double Door: IP43 & IP54
Reusable & flexible cable management As per IS 8623 - III

Better protection with unique door packaging Protection against mechanical impact IK09
Upgrade to lockable enclosures possible
Plain & Acrylic doors
RAL 9010
Standard Accessories:
- Wires sets
- Insulated bus bars
- Insulated neutral bars & earth bar
- blanking plates, Cable management system
- Circuit identification labels
13
novello+
SPN distribution boards
Description Features & benefits Choice of plain and acrylic door
Metal DBs for single phase & Removable Chassis for easy Separate packing for door,
neutral (SPN) supply distribu- Interconnection frame and shield
tion Reversible door with earthing Blanking plates and circuit
and removable front plate identification labels
Technical data Patented IP2X Neutral terminal Cable management system
Conforms to IS 8623 Cement spill protection
No. of modules 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, Handle with lock provision Incoming & outgoing devices
18 way Pozidrive screws for easy Incoming : Two pole MCBs /
Mounting Surface / flush removal RCBOs / RCCB / Isolator
mounting Anti wall insertion marking Outgoing : SP MCBs
IP category 100A tin plated insulated
- IP30 for single door copper bus-bar
- IP43/54 for double door 180 door opening
Material CRCA sheet steel
Color RAL 9010, matt finish
Description Total No. of Modules Catalogue No.
IP30 - Single Door

6 way 6 VYS06C
8 way 8 VYS08C
12 way 12 VYS12C
16 way 16 VYS16C
18 way 18 VYS18C
VYS16C
IP43 - Double Door : Plain
4 way 4 VYS04D
6 way 6 VYS06D
8 way 8 VYS08D
12 way 12 VYS12D
16 way 16 VYS16D
18 way 18 VYS18D
VYS06D
IP43 Double Door-Acrylic / Glazed
4 way 4 VYS04G
6 way 6 VYS06G
8 way 8 VYS08G
12 way 12 VYS12G
16 way 16 VYS16G
18 way 18 VYS18G
IP54 Double Door-Plain

4 way 4 VYS04P
6 way 6 VYS06P
8 way 8 VYS08P
12 way 12 VYS12P
Pre-wired and TV telephone DBs available on request.

For price and technical information, please contact your nearest Hager sales office.
14
novello+
TPN distribution boards
Metal DBs for three phase & Removable Chassis for easy Separate packing for door,
neutral (TPN) supply distribu- Interconnection frame and shield
tion Reversible door with earthing Blanking plates and circuit
and removable front plate identification labels
Technical data Patented IP2X Neutral terminal Cable management system
Conforms to IS 8623 Cement spill protection Spirit level
No. of modules 4 way to 16 Handle with lock provision
way Pozidrive screws for easy Incoming & outgoing devices
Mounting Surface / flush removal Incoming : Four pole MCBs /
mounting Anti wall insertion marking RCCBs / RCBOs / Isolator
IP category 100A tin plated insulated cop- Outgoing : SP MCBs
- IP30 for single door per bus-bar
- IP43/54 for double door 180 door opening

(Incoming + Outgoing)
IP30 Single Door

4 way* 4 + 12 VYT04CD
6 way* 4 + 18 VYT06CD
4 way 8 + 12 VYT04CH
12 way 8 + 36 VYT12CH
VYT06CH
4 way* 4 + 12 VYT04DD
6 way* 4 + 18 VYT06DD
4 way 8 + 12 VYT04DH
12 way 8 + 36 VYT12DH
16 way 8 + 48 VYT16DH

VYT04DH 4 way 8 + 12 VYT04GH
6 way 8 + 18 VYT06GH
8 way 8 + 24 VYT08GH
12 way 8 + 36 VYT12GH
16 way 8 + 48 VYT16GH

4 way 8 + 12 VYT04PH
12 way 8 + 36 VYT12PH
* DBs with provision for 4 module incomer, other DBs have provision for 8 module incomer.
Pre-wired and TV telephone DBs available on request.

For price and technical information, please contact your nearest Hager sales office.
15
novello+
TPN horizontal PPI distribution boards
Metal DBs for three phase & Provision to mount 2P RCCBs Separate packing for door,
neutral (TPN) supply distribu- / RCBOs / MCBs in each phase frame and shield
tion with (PPI) per phase as sub-incomer Cable ties, cable tie holder,
isolation Removable Chassis for easy blanking plates and circuit
Interconnection identification labels
Technical data Reversible door with earthing Spirit level
Conforms to IS 8623 and removable front plate
No. of modules 4+2 way to Neutral link with protection Incoming & outgoing devices
12+2 way cover Incoming : Four pole MCBs /
Mounting Surface / flush Cement spill protection RCCBs / RCBOs / Isolator
mounting Handle with lock provision Sub incomer : 2 Pole MCBs
IP category IP43 / 54 for Pozidrive screws for easy RCCBs / RCBOs
double door removal Outgoing : SP MCBs
Material CRCA sheet steel Anti wall insertion marking
Color RAL 9010, matt finish 100A tin plated insulated cop
per bus-bar

(Incoming+Subincomer+Outgoing)
IP43 Double Door

4 way 8 + 6 + 12 VYH04DH
6 way 8 + 6 + 18 VYH06DH
8 way 8 + 6 + 24 VYH08DH
12 way 8 + 6 + 36 VYH12DH

VYH06DH 4 way 8 + 6 + 12 VYH04GH
6 way 8 + 6 + 18 VYH06GH
8 way 8 + 6 + 24 VYH08GH
12 way 8 + 6 + 36 VYH12GH

4 way 8 + 6 + 12 VYH04PH
6 way 8 + 6 + 18 VYH06PH
8 way 8 + 6 + 24 VYH08PH
VYH06GH 12 way 8 + 6 + 36 VYH12PH
16
novello+
TPN tier PPI distribution boards
Metal DBs for three phase & Provision to mount 2P MCB / Separate packing for door,
neutral (TPN) supply distribu- RCCB / RCBOs in each phase frame and shield
tion with (PPI) per phase as sub-incomer Cable ties, cable tie holder,
isolation Removable Chassis for easy In- blanking plates and circuit
terconnection identification labels
Technical data Reversible door with earthing Spirit level
Conforms to IS 8623 and removable front plate
No. of modules 6+2 way to Neutral link with protection Incoming & outgoing devices
16+2 way cover Incoming : Four pole MCBs /
Mounting Surface / flush Cement spill protection RCCBs / RCBOs / Isolator and
mounting Handle with lock provision option of h3 type MCCBs upto
IP category IP43/54 for Pozidrive screws for easy 160A as incomer in 12+2 way*
double door removal Tier PPI DB
Material CRCA sheet steel Anti wall insertion marking Sub incomer : 2 Pole MCB /
Color RAL 9010, matt finish 100A tin plated insulated RCCB / RCBO
copper bus-bar Outgoing : SP MCBs


6 way 8 + 6 + 18 VYP06DH
8 way 8 + 6 + 24 VYP08DH
10 way 8 + 6 + 30 VYP10DH
12 way 8 + 6 + 36 VYP12DH
12 way* MCCB + 6 + 36 VYP12DM
16 way 8 + 6 + 48 VYP16DH

6 way 8 + 6 + 18 VYP06GH
8 way 8 + 6 + 24 VYP08GH
VYP10DH
10 way 8 + 6 + 30 VYP10GH
12 way 8 + 6 + 36 VYP12GH
12 way* MCCB + 6 + 36 VYP12GM
16 way 8 + 6 + 48 VYP16GH

6 way 8 + 6 + 18 VYP06PH
8 way 8 + 6 + 24 VYP08PH
12 way 8 + 6 + 36 VYP12PH
17
novello+
TPN vertical distribution boards (modular incomer)
Description Busbar rating 200A Choice of plain and acrylic door
Metal DBs with 200A vertical Short-circuit withstand 20kA Separate packing for door,
bus-bar for three phase & neu- frame and shield
tral (TPN) supply distribution Features & benefits Cable ties, blank plates &
200A vertical bus-bar with circuit identification labels
Technical data 20kA fault withstand capacity Spirit level
Conforms to IS 8623 Removable PAN assembly for
No. of modules 4 way to 16 easy Interconnection Incoming & outgoing devices
way Reversible door with earthing Incoming : Four pole MCBs /
Mounting Surface / flush and removable front plate HLF MCBs / RCCBs / RCBOs /
mounting Neutral link with protection Isolator
IP category cover Outgoing : SP / TP MCBs
- IP30 for single door Cement spill protection Provision for 3 module for ELR,
- IP43/54 for double door Handle with lock provision SVN Indicators or other
Material CRCA sheet steel Pozidrive screws for easy additional devices.
Color RAL 9010, matt finish removal
Anti wall insertion marking

IP30 Single Door

4 way 12 + 12 VYV04CL
6 way 12 + 18 VYV06CL
8 way 12 + 24 VYV08CL
12 way 12 + 36 VYV12CL

4 way 12 + 12 VYV04DL
6 way 12 + 18 VYV06DL
VYV04DL 8 way 12 + 24 VYV08DL
12 way 12 + 36 VYV12DL
16 way 12 + 48 VYV16DL

4 way 12 + 12 VYV04GL
6 way 12 + 18 VYV06GL
8 way 12 + 24 VYV08GL
12 way 12 + 36 VYV12GL
16 way 12 + 48 VYV16GL

4 way 12 + 12 VYV04PL
6 way 12 + 18 VYV06PL
8 way 12 + 24 VYV08PL
12 way 12 + 36 VYV12PL
Metering Box For VTPN

Modular incomer Suitable for all VTPN DBs VYV00M
18
novello+
TPN vertical distribution boards (MCCB incomer x160 frame)
Metal DBs with 200A vertical MCCBs upto 160A as incomer Separate packing for door,
bus-bar for three phase & neu- 200A vertical bus-bar with frame and shield
tral (TPN) supply distribution 20kA fault withstand capacity Cable ties, blank plates &
with MCCB as incomer Removable PAN assembly for circuit identification labels
easy Interconnection Spirit level
Technical data Reversible door with earthing
Conforms to IS 8623 and removable front plate Incoming & outgoing devices
No. of modules 4 way to 16 Neutral link with protection Incoming : MCCBs Type h3,
way cover 3P & 4P upto 160A
Mounting Surface / flush Cement spill protection Outgoing : SP / TP MCBs
mounting Handle with lock provision Provision for 3 module for ELR,
IP category IP43/54 for Pozidrive screws for easy SVN Indicators or other
double door removal additional devices.
Bus-bar rating 200A
Short-circuit withstand 20kA


4 way x160 frame MCCB + 12 VYV04DM

4 way x160 frame MCCB + 12 VYV04GM
VYV08DM

4 way x160 frame MCCB + 12 VYV04PM

x160 frame Suitable for all VTPN DBs VYV00M
19
novello+
TPN vertical distribution boards (MCCB incomer x250 frame)
Metal DBs with 250A vertical MCCBs upto 250A as incomer Separate packing for door,
bus-bar for three phase & neu- 250A vertical bus-bar with frame and shield
tral (TPN) supply distribution 20kA fault withstand capacity Cable ties, blank plates & cir-
with MCCB as incomer Removable Chassis for easy cuit identification labels
Interconnection Spirit level
Technical data Reversible door with earthing
Conforms to IS 8623 and removable front plate Incoming & outgoing devices
No. of modules 4 way to 16 Neutral link with protection Incoming : MCCBs Type h3,
way cover 3P & 4P upto 250A
Mounting Surface / flush Cement spill protection Outgoing : SP / TP MCBs
mounting Handle with lock provision Provision for 3 module for ELR,
IP category IP43/54 for Pozidrive screws for easy SVN Indicators or other
double door removal additional devices
Bus-bar rating 250A
Short-circuit withstand 20kA


4 way x250 frame MCCB +12 VYV04DM2
6way x250 frame MCCB + 18 VYV06DM2

4 way x250 frame MCCB +12 VYV04GM2
6way x250 frame MCCB + 18 VYV06GM2
VYV08DM2

4 way x250 frame MCCB +12 VYV04PM2
6way x250 frame MCCB + 18 VYV06PM2

x250 frame Suitable for all VTPN DBs VYV00M
20
novello+
TPN phase segregated distribution boards
Description Features & benefits Incoming & outgoing devices
Metal DBs for three phase & Total phase segregation Incoming :
neutral (TPN) supply distribu- between I/C, sub I/C & O/G Modular : Provision for 4P MCBs /
tion with total phase segrega- Neutral link with protection RCCBs / RCBOs as incomer
tion cover MCCB : Provision for h3 type
Handle with lock provision 160A 3P and 4P MCCBs
Technical data Pozidrive screws for easy Sub incomer : DP MCBs /
Conforms to IS 8623 removal RCCBs / RCBOs
No. of modules 4 way to 12 100A tin plated insulated cop- Outgoing : SP MCBs
way per bus-bar
Mounting Surface / flush Cable ties, blank plates & cir-
mounting cuit identification labels
IP category Spirit level
- IP30 for single door
- IP42 for double door

IP30 Single Door

4 way 12 + 12 + 12 VYG04CL
6 way 12 + 12 + 18 VYG06CL
8 way 12 + 12 + 24 VYG08CL
12 way 12 + 12 + 36 VYG12CL

4 way 12 + 12 + 12 VYG04DL
6 way 12 + 12 + 18 VYG06DL
VYG04DM 8 way 12 + 12 + 24 VYG08DL
12 way 12 + 12 + 36 VYG12DL

4 way MCCB x160 + 12 + 12 VYG04DM
6 way MCCB x160 + 12 + 18 VYG06DM
8 way MCCB x160 + 12 + 24 VYG08DM
12 way MCCB x160 + 12 + 36 VYG12DM
21
novello+
TPN phase selector distribution boards
Description Features & benefits Incoming & outgoing devices
Metal DB for three phase & Equipped with 3 nos 63A rotary Incoming : 4P MCB / RCCB /
neutral (TPN) supply distribu- switches RCBO / Isolator
tion with selector switches for With busbar interconnection Outgoing : SP MCBs
phase selection between rotary switches
Equipped with color coded
Technical data wires set
Conforms to IS 8623 Neutral link with protection
No. of modules 4 way to 12 cover
way Handle with lock provision
Mounting Surface / flush Pozidrive screws for easy
mounting removal
IP category 100A tin plated insulated
- IP30 for single door copper bus-bar
- IP42 for double door Cable ties, blank plates &
Material CRCA sheet steel circuit identification labels
Color RAL 9010, matt finish Spirit level

IP30 Single Door

4 way 8 + 12 VYC04CH
12 way 8 + 36 VYC12CH

VYC04DH 4 way 8 + 12 VYC04DH
4 way (Single Front Plate) 6 + 12 VYC04DF
6 way 8 + 18 VYC06DH
8 way 8 + 24 VYC08DH
12 way 8 + 36 VYC12DH
22
novello+
flexi distribution boards
Description Features & benefits Separate packing for door,
Metal DBs with flexibility to Removable Chassis for easy frame and shield
mount incoming & outgoings as Interconnection Cable ties, blank plates & cir-
per requirement Reversible door with earthing cuit identification labels
and removable front plate Spirit level
Technical data Neutral link with protection
Conforms to IS 8623 cover Incoming & outgoing devices
No of rows - 2, 3 & 4 rows Cement spill protection Any modular device as per
No. of modules 28, 42, 56 & Plastic corners for protection requirement / application
64 modules against damage
Mounting Surface / flush Handle with lock provision
mounting Pozidrive screws for easy
IP category IP43 for double removal
door Anti wall insertion marking
Material CRCA sheet steel Choice of plain and acrylic door

2 row 28 mod 28 VYF214D

2 row 28 mod 28 VYF214G
VYF416G 4 row 64 mod 64 VYF416G

2 row 28 mod 28 VYF214P
23
novello+
one way enclosures
Description Features & benefits
Metal enclosures for flush and Compact in size
surface mounting
Technical data
Conforms to IS 8623
No. of modules 2, 4, 6 & 8
modules
Mounting Surface / flush
mounting
IP category IP30 for single
door
IP30 Single Door

2 way 2 VYM02C
4 way 4 VYM04C
6 way 6 VYM06C
8 way 8 VYM08C
VYM04C
novello+
MCCB enclosures
Metal enclosures for flush and Compact in size
surface mounting
Technical data
Conforms to IS 8623
For x160, x250 H3 MCCB
Mounting Surface / flush
mounting
IP category IP30 for single
door
Description Rating Catalogue No.
IP30 Single Door

MCCB X160 frame H3 - 3P 160A VYM160HM
VYM160HM
24
novello+
plug & socket outlets
Description Mounting Surface / flush Features & benefits
Insulated / Metal-clad plug & mounting Compact in size
socket outlets for supplying IP category Provision to mount MCBs /
specific loads IP30 for metal clad unit RCCBs / RCBOs
IP54 for insulated P&S (IP30
Technical data for enclosure)
Conforms to IS 8623 Material CRCA sheet steel
Rating Color RAL 9010, matt finish
SPN 10A, 20A & 32A
TPN 32A & 63A

IP30 Metal Plug & Socket

10A, 1 P 10A Metal P & S with 1M VYA110C
VYA220C
IP30 Plastic Plug & Socket
16A, 2 P 16A Plastic P & S with 4M VYB416C
VYB432C
Metal plug & socket outlet accessory

Description Range - Plugs, Sockets Features & benefits
Metal-clad plug & socket out- Material Cast aluminium alloy Plastic caps for socket
lets for supplying specific loads Color Blue for 250VAC Ensures human safety
Red for 440VAC Non-corrosive die cast
Technical data aluminium alloy with robust
Conforms to IS8804 design
Rating 10A - 63A
Description Catalogue No.
Metal Plug
10A 2P+E VZ130I
20A 2P+E VZ131I
20A 3P+E VZ132I
32A 3P+E VZ133I
VZ130I & VZ140I 63A 3P+E VZ134I
Metal Socket
10A 2P+E VZ140I
20A 2P+E VZ141I
20A 3P+E VZ142I
32A 3P+E VZ143I
63A 3P+E VZ144I
VZ132I & VZ142I
25
cable end boxes for novello+ DBs
Description Technical data
To manage loose wires Material CRCA sheet steel
Mounted on top of distribution Color RAL 9010, matt finish
boards
Description Catalogue No.
for SPN DBs

4 way VYS04E
6 way VYS06E
8 way VYS08E
12 way VYS12E
16 way VYS16E
VYT08E
for TPN DBs

4 way VYT04E
6 way VYT06E
8 way VYT08E
12 way VYT12E
16 way VYT16E
for Horizontal PPI DBs

4+2 way VYH04E
VYT04E 6+2 way VYH06E
8+2 way VYH08E
12+2 way VYH12E
for Tier PPI DBs

6+2 way VYP06E
8+2 way VYP08E
10+2 way VYP10E
12+2 way VYP12E
12+2 way (MCCB I/c) VYP12EM
for VTPN DBs

x160 Frame MCCB Incomer and Modular Incomer VYV00E
for Flexi DBs

14 mod VYF14E
16 mod VYF16E
26
novello+
SPN DBs
IP30 - Single Door IP43 - Double Door - Glazed Door

:hager
:hager
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT
Top Bottom Both Side Top Bottom Both Side

25 25/32 25/32 25 25/32 25/32
Way Cat No. A B C Way Cat No. A B C
Kout Kout Kout Kout Kout Kout
6 VYS06C 260 210 280 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No. 4 VYS04D 225 175 245 1 No. 2 Nos. 1 No.
8 VYS08C 295 245 315 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No. 6 VYS06D 260 210 280 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.
18 VYS18D 495 445 515 6 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.
IP43 - Double Door - Metal Door IP54 - Double Door - Metal Door
:hager
:hager
225
205
69
A
C 87
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT
LEGENDS-
Top Bottom Both Side

25 25/32 25/32 Way Cat No. A B C
Way Cat No. A B C
Kout Kout Kout
4 VYS04D 225 175 245 1 No. 2 Nos. 1 No. 4 VYS04P 225 275 245
6 VYS06D 260 210 280 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No. 6 VYS06P 260 310 280
16 VYS16D 460 410 480 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.
18 VYS18D 495 445 515 6 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.
All dimensions are in mm
27
novello+
TPN DBs
IP30 - Single Door (4M Incomer) IP43 - Double Door (4M Incomer)
420
280
290
:hager
79.6 B
C
C 97.6 A
6
WAY A B TOP BOTTOM K'OUT LEfT RIGHT K'OUT
CODE C
n 25/n 32 n 25/n 32
4 VYT04DD 360 285 380 5 2
6 VYT06DD 400 325 420 6 2
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT LEfT RIGHT K'OUT

WAY CODE A B C
25/ 32
4 VYT04CD 360 285 380 3 2 4 NOTE-
6 VYT06CD 400 325 420 4 2 4 1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX, FRAME, DOOR,SHIELD IN 1mm. CRCA SHEET
2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-30;
3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
LEGENDS- 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG;
5.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE;
1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE 6.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT.
2) DOOR WITH PRINTING
3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD
4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6
5) DIN RAIL WITH CHASSIS
6) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER 25 25/32 25/32REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY 25 25/32 25/32
TITLE
DRAWN Albert DATE

Kout
13-May-13
Kout
IP43 METAL DOOR TPN DB
QTY
Kout DWG NO
PART NO
VYT*CD
VYT*CD
REV A
Kout Kout Kout
CHECKED Albert DATE 13-May-13 G WEIGHT Kg MATERIAL UNIT: MM
4 VYT04CD 360
Hager Metal Works
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd
285
APPROVED Jason Zhu 380 DATE 3 Nos. 2 Nos.
13-May-13 4 Nos.
N WEIGHT Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE 4 VYT04DD 360 285 380 3 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
6 VYT06CD 400 325 420 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 6 VYT06DD 400 325 420 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
IP30 - Single Door IP43 - Acrylic Door
VYT**GH
420
290
400
:hager
79.6 B
C C
97.6 A
TOP BOTTOM LEfT RIGHT

WAY CODE A B C
K'OUT K'OUT
4 VYT04GH 400 325 420 n 25/6 n 32 n 25/2 n 32
6 VYT06GH 440 365 460 7 2
8 VYT0GDH 505 430 525 8 2
NOTE-
1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX IN 1.2mm. CRCA SHEET
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT LEfT RIGHT K'OUT FRAME, DOOR,SHIELD IN 1MM CRCA
WAY CODE A B C 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-30;
LEGENDS- 25/ 32
1) BACK BOX WITH GLAND PLATE
4
6
VYT04CH
VYT06CH
400
440
325
365
420
460
4
5
2
2
4
4
4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG;
3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD 8 VYT08CH 505 430 525 2 4 6.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT.
6
5) DIN RAIL WITH CHASSIS 12 VYT12CH 690 615 710 9 2 4 25 25/32 25/32 25 25/32 25/32
Way Cat No.
6) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER
A B C REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
Way Cat No. A B C
TITLE Kout Kout
IP43 METAL DOOR TPN DB Kout DWG NO VYT*CH REV A Kout Kout Kout
DRAWN Albert DATE 13-May-13 QTY PART NO VYT*CH
4 VYT04CH 400
Hager Metal Works
325
CHECKED
APPROVED Jason Zhu
420
Albert DATE
DATE
4 Nos. 2 Nos.
13-May-13
13-May-13
4 Nos.
G WEIGHT
N WEIGHT
Kg
Kg
MATERIAL
SCALE NTS TOLERANCE
UNIT: MM 4 VYT04GH 400 325 420 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd
6 VYT06CH 440 365 460 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 6 VYT06GH 440 365 460 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
8 VYT08CH 505 430 525 6 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 8 VYT08GH 505 430 525 6 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
12 VYT12CH 690 615 710 9 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
28
novello+
TPN DBs
IP43 - Double Door IP54 - Double Door - Metal Door

VYT**PH
:hager
:hager

WAY CODE A B C 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
4 VYT04PH 400 460 420
5."U"GASKET BELOW THE DOOR AND FIX BY GLUE;
LEGENDS- 6 VYT06PH 440 500 460
1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE 8 VYT08PH 505 565 525 7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE;
LEGENDS- WAY CODE A B C TOP BOTTOM K'OUT LEfT RIGHT K'OUT 2) REMOVEABLE COVER
25/ 32 3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD
1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE
2) REMOVABLE COVER 4 VYT04DH 400 325 420 4 2 4 4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6
3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD 6 VYT06DH 440 365 460 5 2 4 5) DIN RAIL WITH CHASSIS
4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6 6) DOOR KNOB REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
8 VYT08DH 505 430 525 6 2 4 7) FRAME
8) DOOR WITH PRINTING TITLE IP54 METAL DOOR TPN DB DWG NO VYT**PH REV A
6) DOOR KNOB REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY 9) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER
7) FRAME 10) BOX SUPPORT DRAWN Albert DATE 12-May-13 QTY PART NO VYT**PH
8) DOOR WITH PRINTING TITLE IP43 METAL DOOR TPN DB DWG NO VYT*DH REV A
9) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER CHECKED Albert DATE 12-May-13 G WEIGHT Kg MATERIAL UNIT: MM
DRAWN Albert DATE 13-May-13 QTY PART NO VYT*DH Hager Metal Works
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd APPROVED Jason Zhu DATE 12-May-13 N WEIGHT Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE
Hager Metal Works
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd APPROVED Jason Zhu DATE
Top Bottom
13-May-13
Both Side
N WEIGHT Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE
25 25/32 25/32
Kout Kout Kout
4 VYT04DH 400 325 420 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 4 VYT04PH 400 460 420
IP43 - Acrylic Door - 12 & 16 way VYT**GH IP43 - Double Door - 12 & 16 way VYT*DH
:hager
:hager
NOTE-
1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX, FRAME, DOOR, SHIELD IN 1.2mm CRCA SHEET
3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010; NOTE-
6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME; 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-43;
7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE; TOP BOTTOM K'OUT LEfT RIGHT K'OUT 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
WAY CODE A B C
LEGENDS- 8.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT. 25/ 32 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG;
12 VYT12DH 690 615 710 9 2 4 5."U"GASKET BELOW THE DOOR AND FIX BY GLUE;
1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE 6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME;
2) REMOVEABLE COVER 16 VYT16DH 835 755 855 11 2 4 7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE;
3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD LEGENDS- 8.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT.
4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6 1) BACK BOX WITH GLAND PLATE
5) DIN RAIL WITH CHASSIS REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY 2) REMOVEABLE COVER
6) DOOR KNOB
7) FRAME
TITLE IP43 METAL DOOR TPN ACRYLIC DB DWG NO VYT**GH REV A
8) DOOR WITH PRINTING 4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6
9) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER DRAWN Albert DATE 10-May-13 QTY PART NO VYT**GH
6) DOOR KNOB REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
CHECKED Albert DATE 10-May-13 G WEIGHT Kg MATERIAL UNIT: MM 7) FRAME
Hager Metal Works 8) DOOR WITH PRINTING TITLE IP43 METAL DOOR TPN DB DWG NO VYT*DH REV A
Top Bottom Both Side DRAWN Top Bottom
Albert Both Side
DATE 13-May-13 QTY PART NO VYT*DH

Hager Metal Works
25 25/32 25/32 (Dongguan) Co.,Ltd
25
APPROVED Jason Zhu
25/32
DATE
25/32 13-May-13 N WEIGHT Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE

12 VYT12GH 690 615 710 9 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 12 VYT12DH 690 615 710 9 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
16 VYT16GH 835 755 855 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 16 VYT16DH 835 755 855 11 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
29
novello+
TPN DBs
IP54 TPN 12&16 way DB VYT12PH
:hager
WAY CODE A B C NOTE-

12 VYT12PH 690 750 710 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
LEGENDS-
1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE 7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE;
2) REMOVEABLE COVER 8.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT.
7) FRAME
8) DOOR WITH PRINTING TITLE IP54 METAL DOOR TPN DB DWG NO VYT12PH REV A
10) BOX SUPPORT DRAWN Albert DATE 12-May-13 QTY PART NO VYT12PH

Hager Metal Works
Way Cat No. A B C

12 VYT12PH 690 750 710
30
novello+
TPN Horizontal PPI DBs
IP43 - Double Door IP43 - Acrylic Door
VYH**DH VYH**GH
:hager
:hager
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT LEfT RIGHT K'OUT
WAY CODE A B C NOTE-
25/ 32 TOP BOTTOM K'OUT LEfT RIGHT K'OUT
WAY CODE A B C
4 VYH04DH 465 390 485 5 2 4 1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET- 4 & 6WAY BOX, FRAME, DOOR, SHIELD IN 1mm CRCA SHEET 25/ 32
8 & 12WAY BOX, FRAME, DOOR, IN 1.2mm CRCA SHEET & SHIELD IN 1mm CRCA SHEET NOTE-
6 VYH06DH 500 425 520 6 2 4 4 VYH04GH 465 390 485 5 2 4
2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-43; 1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-4 & 6 WAY BOX, FRAME, DOOR, SHIELD IN 1mm CRCA SHEET
8 VYH08DH 570 495 590 7 2 4 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010; 6 VYH06GH 500 425 520 6 2 4 8 & 12WAY BOX, FRAME, DOOR, IN 1.2mm CRCA SHEET & SHIELD IN 1mm CRCA SHEET
12 VYH12DH 760 685 780 10 2 4 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG; 8 VYH08GH 570 495 590 7 2 4 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-43;
5."U"GASKET BELOW THE DOOR AND FIX BY GLUE; 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
12 VYH12GH 760 685 780 10 2 4
6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME; 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG;
7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE; 5."U"GASKET BELOW THE DOOR AND FIX BY GLUE;
8.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT. 6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME;
LEGENDS- LEGENDS- 7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE;

2) REMOVEABLE COVER
Top Bottom Both Side 1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE
2) REMOVEABLE COVER
8.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT.
3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY

5) DIN RAIL TITLE 25 25 / 32 25 / 32
TPN Horizontal PPI DB IP43 ASSY DRAWING DWG NO VYH**DH REV
5) DIN RAIL
A 25 25/32 25/32
Way
6) DOOR KNOB
Cat No. A B C Way
6) DOOR KNOB
7) FRAME Cat No. A B C REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
7) FRAME
DRAWN
CHECKED
Albert
Albert
DATE
DATE
Kout
23-May-13
23-May-13
Kout Kout
QTY
G WEIGHT Kg
PART NO
MATERIAL
VYH**DH
UNIT: MM
TITLE
Kout Kout
VYH**GH ASSY DRAWING
Kout DWG NO VYH**GH REV A
Hager Metal Works DRAWN Albert DATE 23-May-13 QTY PART NO VYH**GH
4 VYH04DH 465 390 485 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 4 VYH04GH 465

Hager Metal Works
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd
390 CHECKED
485
Albert
APPROVED Jason Zhu
DATE
DATE
5 Nos. 2 Nos.
23-May-13
23-May-13
4 Nos.
G WEIGHT
N WEIGHT
Kg
Kg
MATERIAL
SCALE NTS TOLERANCE
UNIT: MM
6 VYH06DH 500 425 520 6 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 6 VYH06GH 500 425 520 6 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
IP54 - Double Door - Metal Door
VYH**PH
:hager
NOTE-
WAY CODE A B C 1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET- 4 & 6WAY BOX, FRAME, DOOR, SHIELD IN 1mm CRCA SHEET
8 & 12WAY BOX, FRAME, DOOR, IN 1.2mm CRCA SHEET & SHIELD IN 1mm CRCA SHEET
4 VYH04PH 465 525 485 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-54;
6 VYH06PH 500 560 520 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
8 VYH08PH 570 630 590 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG;
12 VYH12PH 760 820 780 6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME AND GLAND PLATE;
LEGENDS- 7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE;
2) REMOVEABLE COVER
5) DIN RAIL
7) FRAME
8) DOOR WITH PRINTING TITLE TPN Horizontal PPI DB IP54 DWG NO VYH**PH REV B
Way Cat No.

A B DRAWN C Albert DATE 24-May-13 QTY PART NO VYH**PH

Hager Metal Works
4 VYH04PH 465 525 485

6 VYH06PH 500 560 520
8 VYH08PH 570 630 590
12 VYH12PH 760 820 780
31
novello+
TPN Tier PPI DBs
IP43 - Double Door IP54 - Double Door

VYP**DH VYP12DM
:hager
:hager
LEFT RIGHT K'OUT

WAY CODE A B C
25/ 32 NOTE- TOP BOTTOM K'OUT LEFT RIGHT K'OUT
WAY CODE A B C
6 VYP06DH 310 250 330 2 2 4 1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX, FRAME, DOOR,SHIELD IN 1.2mm. CRCA SHEET 25/ 32
8 VYP08DH 365 305 385 3 2 4 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-43; 12 VYP12DM 450 375 470 5 2 4 NOTE-
10 VYP10DH 430 370 450 4 2 4 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG; 1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX, FRAME, DOOR, SHIELD IN 1.2mm. CRCA SHEET
12 VYP12DH 450 390 470 5 2 4 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-43;
16 VYP16DH 550 490 570 6 2 4 6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME; 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE; 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG;
LEGENDS- 5."U"GASKET BELOW THE DOOR AND FIX BY GLUE;
2) REMOVEABLE COVER LEGENDS- 7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE;
3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD 8.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT.
4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6 1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE
5) DIN RAIL 2) REMOVEABLE COVER
6) DOOR KNOB DESCRIPTION DATE 3) NEUTRAL
BY BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD
7) FRAME
TITLE Top Bottom Both Side
IP43 TPN TIRE PPI DB METAL DOOR ASSY DRAWING DWG NO VYP**DH
5) DIN RAIL
REV A
6) DOOR KNOB
Top Bottom Both Side REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
DRAWN Albert DATE 28-May-13 QTY PART NO VYP**DH 7) FRAME
CHECKED Albert DATE 25
28-May-13 25/32 25/32
G WEIGHT Kg MATERIAL
UNIT: MM
TITLE
25 25/32
VYP12DM ASSY DRAWING
25/32 DWG NO VYP12DM REV A
Way Cat No. A

Hager Metal Works
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd B
APPROVED Jason Zhu C
DATE 28-May-13 N WEIGHT Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE Way Cat No. A BDRAWN C
Albert DATE 29-May-13 QTY PART NO VYP12DM
Kout Kout Kout Hager Metal Works

CHECKED Albert DATE Kout Kout
29-May-13 Kout
G WEIGHT Kg MATERIAL UNIT: MM
6+2 VYP06DH 310 250 330 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 12+2 VYP12DM 450 375 470 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
8+2 VYP08DH 365 305 385 3 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
10+2 VYP10DH 430 370 450 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
12+2 VYP12DH 450 390 470 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
16+2 VYP16DH 550 490 570 6 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
IP43 - Double Door - Glazed Door IP43 - Double Door - 160 MCCB
VYP**GH VYP12GM
:hager
:hager
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT LEFT RIGHT K'OUT

WAY CODE A B C
25/ 32
12 VYP12GM 450 375 470 5 2 4
2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-43; NOTE-
1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX, FRAME, DOOR, SHIELD IN 1.2mm. CRCA SHEET
5."U"GASKET BELOW THE DOOR AND FIX BY GLUE; 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-43;
6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME; 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE; 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG;
2) REMOVEABLE COVER
3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD 1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE 8.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT.
4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6 2) REMOVEABLE COVER
5) DIN RAIL 3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD
6) DOOR KNOB DESCRIPTION DATE4) EARTH
BY BAR BRASS 9X6
7) FRAME
TITLE Top Bottom Both Side
IP43 TPN TIRE PPI DB ACRYLIC DOOR ASSY DRAWING DWG NO VYP**GH
5) DIN RAIL
REV
6) DOORAKNOB
7) FRAME
Top Bottom Both SideREVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
DRAWN Albert DATE 28-May-13 QTY PART NO VYP**GH 8) DOOR WITH PRINTING TITLE VYP12GM ASSY DRAWING DWG NO VYP12GM REV A
CHECKED Albert DATE 25
28-May-13 25/32 25/32
G WEIGHT Kg MATERIAL
UNIT: MM 25 25/32 25/32
Way Cat No. Hager Metal Works
A B
APPROVED Jason Zhu C
DATE 28-May-13 N WEIGHT Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE Way Cat No. A B
DRAWN
C
Albert DATE 29-May-13 QTY PART NO VYP12GM
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd
Kout Kout Kout Hager Metal Works
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd
CHECKED Albert
APPROVED Jason Zhu
DATE
DATE
Kout
29-May-13
29-May-13
Kout Kout
G WEIGHT
N WEIGHT
Kg
Kg
MATERIAL
SCALE NTS TOLERANCE
UNIT: MM
6 VYP06GH 310 250 330 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 12+2 VYP12GM 450 375 470 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
8 VYP08GH 365 305 385 3 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
10 VYP10GH 430 370 450 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
12 VYP12GH 450 390 470 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
16 VYP16GH 550 490 570 6 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
32
novello+
TPN Tier PPI DBs
IP54 Tier PPI DB IP54 Tier PPI DB 160 MCCB

:hager
:hager
WAY CODE A B C WAY CODE A B C
6 VYP06PH 310 370 330 NOTE- 6 VYP06PH 310 370 330 NOTE-
8 VYP08PH 365 425 385 1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX, FRAME, DOOR, SHIELD IN 1.2mm. CRCA SHEET 1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX, FRAME, DOOR, SHIELD IN 1.2mm. CRCA SHEET
2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-54; 8 VYP08PH 365 425 385
12 VYP12PH 450 510 470 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-54;
3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010; 12 VYP12PH 450 510 470 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG; 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG;
5."U"GASKET BELOW THE DOOR AND FIX BY GLUE; 5."U"GASKET BELOW THE DOOR AND FIX BY GLUE;
6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME & GLAND PLATE; 6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME & GLAND PLATE;
LEGENDS- 7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE; LEGENDS- 7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE;
1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE 8.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT. 8.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT.
2) REMOVEABLE COVER 2) REMOVEABLE COVER
3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD 3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD
4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6 4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6
5) DIN RAIL 5) DIN RAIL
6) DOOR KNOB
7) FRAME
8) DOOR WITH PRINTING TITLE
REVISION
IP54 TPN TIRE PPI DB METAL DOOR ASSY DRAWING DWG NO

DESCRIPTION
VYP**PH
DATE6) DOOR
REV
BYKNOB
7) FRAME
8) DOORAWITH PRINTING TITLE
REVISION
IP54 TPN TIRE PPI DB METAL DOOR ASSY DRAWING DWG NO

DESCRIPTION
VYP**PH
DATE
REV
BY
A
9) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER 9) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER
Way Cat No. A

DRAWN
B
Albert
C
DATE 28-May-13 QTY PART NO VYP**PH DRAWN Albert DATE
25
28-May-13
25/32
QTY
25/32 PART NO VYP**PH
Hager Metal Works

Way Cat No. A
Hager Metal Works B
CHECKED Albert
C
DATE 28-May-13 G WEIGHT Kg MATERIAL UNIT: MM
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd APPROVED Jason Zhu DATE
Kout
28-May-13
Kout Kout
6+2 VYP06PH 310 370 330 12+2 VYP12PM 450 510 470 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
8+2 VYP08PH 365 425 385
12+2 VYP12PH 450 510 470
33
novello+
VTPN DBs (Modular Incomer)
IP30 - Single Door IP43 VTPN DB Acrylic Door

VYVXXGL
350
B
:hager
490 99
117 470
99 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-43;

104 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
WAY CODE A B C TOP BOTTOM K'OUT 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG;
4 VYV04GL 625 605 505 5 2 8 2 6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME;
6 VYV06GL 679 659 559 5 2 8 2
LEGENDS- 8 VYV08GL 733 713 613 5 2 8 2
12 VYV12GL 841 821 721 5 2 8 2
3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD 16 VYV16GL 949 929 829 5 2 8 2
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT
4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6 REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
5) PAN ASSEMBLY
6) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER TITLE IP43 ACRYLIC DOOR VTPN DB I/C 12 POLE MCB DWG NO VYVXXGL REV A
7)DOOR KNOB
8)REMOVEABLE COVER DRAWN Peter Han DATE 21-May-13 QTY 1 PART NO VYVXXGL
LEGENDS- 9)FRAME ASSEMBLY
CHECKED Peter Han DATE 21-May-13 G WEIGHT Kg MATERIAL UNIT: MM
6) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER Top Bottom Both Side Top Bottom Both Side
25 32 25 32 25 32 25 32
Kout Kout Kout Kout Kout Kout Kout Kout
4 VYV04CL 625 605 505 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 VYV04GL 625 605 505 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos.
16 VYV16GL 949 929 829 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos.
IP43 - Double Door IP54 - Metal Door
530
350
:hager
C
B
A
B
:hager
99
99 490 470
490 117
117 470
530
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT
LEGENDS-
LEGENDS-

25 25/32 25/32
Kout Kout Kout
4 VYV04DL 625 605 505 5 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 VYV04PL 625 605 505
16 VYV16DL 949 929 829 5 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos.
34
novello+
VTPN DBs (MCCB)
IP43 - 160A MCCB Double Door IP43 - 160A MCCB Acrylic Door
350
B
C
B
A
:hager
:hager
99
99
490 470 117
117
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT

TOP BOTTOM K'OUT
LEGENDS- LEGENDS-

25 32 25 32 25 32 25 32
Kout Kout Kout Kout Kout Kout Kout Kout
4 VYV04DM 750 730 630 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 VYV04GM 750 730 630 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos.
IP54 - 160A MCCB Double Door IP43 - 250A MCCB Double Door
350
:hager
C
B
A
:hager
99
490 99 470 490
117
470
117
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT

530
LEGENDS-
LEGENDS-

25 32 25 32
Kout Kout Kout Kout
4 VYV04PM 750 730 630 4 VYV04DM2 850 830 730 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos.
16 VYV16DM2 1174 1154 1054 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos.
35
novello+
VTPN DBs (MCCB)
IP43 - 250A MCCB Acrylic Door IP54 - 250A MCCB Metal Door
350
:hager
730
A
C
B
C
B
A
:hager
99
490 470
117
99
490 470
117
530
LEGENDS-
LEGENDS-
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT

25 32 25 32
Kout Kout Kout Kout
4 VYV04GM2 850 830 730 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 VYV04PM2 850 830 730
16 VYV16GM2 1174 1154 1054 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 8 Nos. 2 Nos.
36
novello+
Phase Segregated DBs
IP30 - Single Door IP42 - Double Door - MCCB Incomer

B
645
535
645
A
A
66 B
73
LEGENDS-

25 25/32 25/32 25 25/32 25/32
Way Cat No. A B Way Cat No. A B C Door
4 VYG04CL 470 390 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 No. 4 VYG04DM 470 395 490 One Door 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.
6 VYG06CL 578 498 7 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 No. 6 VYG06DM 578 503 598 One Door 6 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.
8 VYG08CL 686 606 9 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 No. 8 VYG08DM 686 611 706 Two Door 8 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.
12 VYG12CL 902 822 13 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 No. 12 VYG12DM 902 827 922 Two Door 11 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.
IP42 - Double Door

C
645.0
665.0 535.0
:hager
A 85
B
103
LEGENDS-

25 25/32 25/32
Way Cat No. A B C
Kout Kout Kout
4 VYG04DL 490 470 390 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 No.
6 VYG06DL 598 578 498 7 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 No.
8 VYG08DL 706 686 606 9 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 No.
12 VYG12DL 922 902 822 13 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 No.
37
novello+
TPN Phase Selector DBs
IP30 - Single Door IP42 - Double Door VYC04DF
VYCXXCH
:hager
:hager
WAY CODE A B C
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT NOTE-
1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX, FRAME, DOOR IN 1.2mm. CRCA SHEET
4 VYC04DF 520 340 540 6 2 SHIELD IN 1mm CRCA SHEET
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT 6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME;
WAY CODE A B C 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-30; LEGENDS- 7.DOOR EARTH USE 2.5 SQMM CABLE;
3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010; 8.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT.
4 VYC04CH 450 375 217 5 2 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG; 1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE
5."U"GASKET BELOW THE DOOR AND FIX BY GLUE; 2) REMOVEABLE COVER
6 VYC06CH 485 410 252 5 2 3) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD
6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME;
LEGENDS- 8 VYC08CH 560 485 327 5 2 4) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6
12 VYC12CH 700 625 467 6 2 5) DIN RAIL
1) BOX WITH GLAND PLATE 6) DIN RAIL BRACKET REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
2) REMOVEABLE COVER - LEFT 7) DOOR KNOB
3) REMOVEABLE COVER - RIGHT 8) FRAME TITLE IP43 Phase Selector DBS METAL DOOR ASSY DRAWING DWG NO VYC04DF REV A
4) NEUTRAL BAR BRASS 10X8 WITH SHROUD 9) DOOR WITH PRINTING
5) EARTH BAR BRASS 9X6 10) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER DRAWN Albert DATE 06-Jun-13 QTY PART NO VYC04DF
6) DIN RAIL REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY 11) ROCKER SWITCH - 3NOS
7) DIN RAIL BRACKET CHECKED Albert DATE 06-Jun-13 G WEIGHT Kg MATERIAL UNIT: MM
8) 40/63A SELECTOR SWITCH - 3NOS TITLE IP30 Phase Selector DBS ASSY DRAWING DWG NO VYCXXCH REV A Hager Metal Works
9) ROCKER SWITCH - 3NOS (Dongguan) Co.,Ltd APPROVED Jason Zhu DATE 06-Jun-13 N WEIGHT Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE
10) EARTHING SCREW & EARTHING STICKER DRAWN
CHECKED
Albert
Albert
DATE
DATE
07-Jun-13
07-Jun-13
QTY
G WEIGHT
Top Bottom
Kg
PART NO
MATERIAL
VYCXXCH
UNIT: MM
Top Bottom
Hager Metal Works
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd APPROVED Jason Zhu DATE 07-Jun-13 N WEIGHT
25 25/32
Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE
25 32
Kout Kout Kout Kout
4 VYC04CH 450 375 217 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 VYC04DF 520 340 540 6 Nos. 2 Nos.
6 VYC06CH 485 410 252 5 Nos. 2 Nos.
8 VYC08CH 560 485 327 5 Nos. 2 Nos.
12 VYC12CH 700 625 467 6 Nos. 2 Nos.
IP42 - Double Door - Phase Selector DB

VYC**DH
:hager
WAY A B
TOP BOTTOM K'OUT LEfT RIGHT K'OUT NOTE-
CODE C
25/ 32 1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX, FRAME, DOOR IN 1.2mm. CRCA SHEET
4 VYC04DH 420 340 440 4 2 4 SHIELD IN 1mm CRCA SHEET
6 VYC06DH 455 375 475 5 2 4 2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-43;
8 VYC08DH 490 410 510 5 2 4 4.DOOR PRINT COLOR RAL-7037,SEE THE DETAILS ON ART DWG;
12 VYC12DH 560 480 580 6 2 4 5."U"GASKET BELOW THE DOOR AND FIX BY GLUE;
6.FLAT GASKET BELOW THE FRAME;
2) REMOVEABLE COVER
5) DIN RAIL
6) DIN RAIL BRACKET REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
7) DOOR KNOB
8) FRAME
TITLE
IP43 Phase Selector DBS METAL DOOR ASSY DRAWING DWG NO VYC**DH REV A
DRAWN Albert DATE 06-Jun-13 QTY PART NO VYC**DH

11) 40/63A SELECTOR SWITCH - 3NOS
12) ROCKER SWITCH - 3NOS
Hager Metal Works
CHECKED Albert DATE
25 25/32
06-Jun-13
25/32
G WEIGHT Kg MATERIAL UNIT: MM
Way Cat No. A

(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd
B APPROVED Jason Zhu
C DATE 06-Jun-13 N WEIGHT Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE
Kout Kout Kout

4 VYC04DH 420 340 440 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
6 VYC06DH 455 375 475 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
8 VYC08DH 490 410 510 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
12 VYC12DH 560 480 580 6 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos.
38
novello+
Flexi DBs
IP43 - Double Door - 2 Tier DB IP43 - Double Door - Acrylic Door - 2 Tier DB
:hager
:hager

25 25/32 25/32 25 25/32 25/32
14 VYF214D 450 375 465 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 14 VYF214G 450 375 465 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
IP54 - Double Door - 2 Tier DB IP43 - Double Door - 3 Tier DB

:hager
:hager

25 25/32 25/32 25 25/32 25/32
14 VYF214P 450 510 465 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 14 VYF314D 450 375 465 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
39
novello+
Flexi DBs
IP43 - Double Door - Acrylic Door - 3 Tier DB IP54 - Double Door - 3 Tier DB
:hager
:hager

25 25/32 25/32 25 25/32 25/32
14 VYF314G 450 375 470 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 14 VYF314P 450 510 465 5 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
IP43 - Double Door - 4 Tier DB IP43 - Double Door - Acrylic Door - 4 Tier DB
:hager
:hager

25 25/32 25/32 25 25/32 25/32
40
novello+
Flexi DBs
IP54 - Double Door - 4 Tier DB

:hager
Way Cat No. A B C
10 VYF410P 385 365 425

14 VYF414P 470 450 510
16 VYF416P 520 500 560
41
novello+
Cable End Box
For Double Door DB

VYF**E
IP30 - Cable End Box IP30 - Cable End Box
:hager
:hager
116
B C A
WAY CODE A B C
Cat No. A B C Cat No. 14

16
VYF414E
VYF416E
A
450 370 470
500 420 520
B C
NOTE-
VYS04E 225 245 68 NOTE- VYF414E 450 370 470
1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-BOX , SHIELD IN 1.2mm. CRCA SHEET
VYS06E 260 280 68 VYF416E 500 420 520
4.DETACHABLE GLAND PLATE AT TOP SIDE.
LEGENDS-
VYS08E 295 315 68 1) BOX
2) SHIELD COVER
3) COVER BRACKET
LEGENDS-
VYS12E 370 390 68 REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
TITLE IP30 cablebox assy drawing DWG NO VYF**E REV A
VYS16E 460 480 68 DRAWN Albert DATE 28-May-13 QTY PART NO VYF**E

Hager Metal Works
VYS18E 495 515 68 (Dongguan) Co.,Ltd APPROVED Jason Zhu DATE 28-May-13 N WEIGHT Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE
IP30 - Cable End Box VYT**E

IP30 - Cable End Box VYH**E
:hager :hager
NOTE-
1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET- BOX , SHIELD IN 1mm. CRCA SHEET
2.DEGREE OF PROTECTION =IP-30; NOTE-
LEGENDS- 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
1) BOX
Cat No.
2) SHIELD COVER
3) COVER BRACKET
A B C4.DETACHABLE GLAND PLATE AT TOP SIDE;
5.DIMENSION ARE RESTRICTED TO METAL COMPONENT. Cat No. A B C 1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-4 & 6 WAY BOX , SHIELD IN 1mm. CRCA SHEET
8 & 12 WAY BOX , SHIELD IN 1mm. CRCA SHEET
LEGENDS- 3.FINISH-POWDER COATING SHADE IN RAL-9010;
VYT04E 400 320 420 REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY

1) BOX
2) SHIELD COVER
3) COVER BRACKET
VYH04E 465 385 485 4.DETACHABLE GLAND PLATE AT TOP SIDE;
TITLE CABLE END BOX FOR TPN DB DWG NO VYT**E REV A
VYT06E 440 DRAWN
CHECKED
360Albert
Albert
DATE
DATE
24-May-13
24-May-13
460QTY
G WEIGHT Kg
PART NO
MATERIAL
VYT**E
UNIT: MM
VYH06E 500 420 520 REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
Hager Metal Works
TITLE CABLE END BOX FOR TPN Horizontal PPI DB DWG NO VYH**E REV A
VYT08E 505
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd
425
APPROVED Jason Zhu DATE 24-May-13
525
VYH08E 570 DRAWN
490 Albert DATE
590
24-May-13 QTY PART NO VYH**E

VYT12E 690 610 710 VYH12E 760
Hager Metal Works
(Dongguan) Co.,Ltd 680
APPROVED Jason Zhu DATE 780
24-May-13 N WEIGHT Kg SCALE NTS TOLERANCE
VYT16E 835 755 710
VYP**E
IP30 - Cable End Box IP30 - Cable End Box
410
:hager
13.8
:hager
240
250
115
86
99
490
117
WAY CODE A B C
Cat No. 4
6 A
VYP04E
VYP06E
310
365
230
285
330
385 B C
NOTE-
LEGENDS- Cat No. A B C
8 VYP08E 430 350 450
VYP04E 12
310
VYP12E 450 370 470
230 330
1.MATERIAL CRCA SHEET-4 & 6 WAY BOX , SHIELD IN 1mm. CRCA SHEET
8 & 12 WAY BOX , SHIELD IN 1mm. CRCA SHEET
VYV00E 310 230 330
VYP08E 365 285 385
4.DETACHABLE GLAND PLATE AT TOP SIDE.
LEGENDS-
1) BOX
2) SHIELD COVER
3) COVER BRACKET
VYP10E 430 350 450
VYP12E 450 370 470 REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE BY
TITLE IP30 cablebox assy drawing DWG NO VYP**E REV A
DRAWN Albert DATE 28-May-13 QTY PART NO VYP**E

Hager Metal Works
42
novello+
One Way Enclosures
IP30 2P Enclosure DB IP30 4P, 6P, 8P Enclosure DB
:hager
:hager
Top Bottom Top Bottom

Hager Electro Pvt Ltd
Way Cat No. A B C Hager Electro
25 KoutPvt Ltd Way Cat No. A B C 25 Kout
2 VYM02C 85 40 100 1 Nos. 4 VYM04C 120 75 135 1 Nos.
6 VYM06C 155 110 170 2 Nos.
8 VYM08C 190 155 205 3 Nos.
novello+
MCCB Enclosures
IP30 - 160A MCCB Enclosure IP30 - 250A MCCB Enclosure
:hager :hager


Way Cat No. A B C 25 / 32 Kout Way Cat No. A B C 25 / 32 Kout
2 VYM160HM 165 100 180 2 Nos. 2 VYM250HM 225 160 240 3 Nos.
43
novello+
Plug and Socket
10&20A Plug & Socket DB 20&30A TP P&S with FP MCB DB
:hager :hager

Way Cat No. A B C 25 Kout Way Cat No. A B C 25 Kout
2 VYA110C / VYA120C / 124 78 137 2 Nos. 2 VYA420C / VYA432C 120 85 135 1 Nos.
VYA220C
63A 5 PIN P&S with 8P MCB DB 16 3P P&S with FP MCB DB
:hager :hager

Way Cat No. A B C 25/32 Kout Way Cat No. A B C 25 / 32 Kout
2 VYA863C 200 77 210 2 Nos. 2 VYB416C 125 80 140 1 Nos.
44
novello+
Plug and Socket
32A 3P P&S with FP MCB DB 32A 5P P&S with 8P MCB DB
:hager
:hager
Top Bottom Hager Electro

TopPvt Ltd
Bottom
Way Cat No. A B Hager
C Electro Pvt
25 Ltd
Kout Way Cat No. A B C 25 / 32 Kout
2 VYB432C 125 80 140 1 Nos. 2 VYB832C 185 110 200 2 Nos.
63A 5P P&S with 8P MCB DB
:hager
Top Bottom
Way Cat No. A B C 25 / 32 Kout
2 VYB863C 220 160 223 1 Nos.
45
VTPN distribution boards
new design busbar
Enhanced safety for a completely secure installation
Certied for fault withstand
Easy to install
Exceptional aesthetics
46
Advantages :
1
ASTA certified copper busbar
rated short circuit withstand for
busbars: 20kA at 415V for 0.2 secs
Phase identification
2 L1, L2, L3 in mouldings visible

through front covers
3
Flexibility to have Incomer
neutral
connection either left or right
+
The plus :
Shrouded
Transparent IP2X
neutral terminal
with interconnection
between N-links
Snap fit designed

Incomer terminal
shroud avoids touch
with live parts
47
+
novello 250A / 400A / 630A / 800A
panel board system
125A / 250A MCCB outgoing
ASTA certified
copper busbar

Professionally designed BS / IEC type tested factory assembled Conforms to BS EN60439-1 / IEC 60439-1
system
Sheet steel with Epoxy powder coating in RAL 9002
Insulated bus bar system
Ingress protection IP41
Powder coating rust proof finish
Accessories like Key lock, Metering box, Cable box etc.
More cabling space
48
Expert
tips
ASTA certified insulated Earth and neutral bars
1 tinned copper busbar assembly
3 positioned for easier cabling
Optimal cabling Ease of phase identification
2 space
4 L1, L2, L3 mouldings show through

when the front cover is fitted.
Textured surface on busbar assembly
allows contractor to write circuit
identification.
49
novello+ - 250A / 400A / 630A / 800A panel board system
upto 800A incoming, 125A / 250A outgoing
Standards: ASTA certified insulated tinned Sheet steel with epoxy powder
copper busbar assembly: coating RAL 9002
BS EN 60439 -1
IEC 60439-1 250A - Rated short circuit IP41
withstand capacity for busbar
Suitable for MCCBs & isolating 25kA at 415V for 0.3 sec. Accessories like key lock,
switches incomers. Metering box, Cable End Box.
400A - Rated short circuit
Suitable for 3P MCCB incomer withstand capacity for busbar
& 3P MCCB outgoing 35kA at 415V for 1 sec.
630A / 800A - Rated short

circuit withstand capacity for
busbar 40kA at 415V for 0.3
sec.
Description No. of ways Catalogue

125A No.
250A panel board system 4 way JN2B00004S16

3P, 250A (x250/ h250) MCCB 6 way JN2B00006S16
incoming * and 8 way JN2B00008S16
3P, 125A (x160 frame size) 10 way JN2B00010S16
MCCB outgoings 12 way JN2B00012S16
16 way JN2B00016S16
400A panel board system 4 way JN4B00004S16

JN2B0008S16 up to 3P, 400A (h400 frame) 6 way JN4B00006S16
MCCB incoming # 8 way JN4B00008S16
up to 3P, 125A (x160 frame size) 10 way JN4B00010S16
MCCB outgoings 12 way JN4B00012S16
16 way JN4B00016S16
Description No. of ways No. of ways Catalogue

250A 125A No.
630A/ 800A panel board system / 4 way JN8B00004S16

up to 3P, 630A(h630 frame)/ / 6 way JN8B00006S16
800A MCCB (h1000 frame) / 8 way JN8B00008S16
incoming ^ / 10 way JN8B00010S16
JN4B0008S16 up to 3P, 125A (x160) MCCB / 12 way JN8B00012S16
outgoings / 16 way JN8B00016S16
630A/ 800A panel board system 2 way 2 way JN8B00202S16

up to 3P, 630A (h630 frame)/ 2 way 4 way JN8B00204S16
800A MCCB (h1000 frame) 2 way 6 way JN8B00206S16
incoming ^ 2 way 8 way JN8B00208S16
up to 3P, 250A (x250 frame size) 2 way 10 way JN8B00210S16
MCCB outgoings and 2 way 14 way JN8B00214S16
up to 3P, 125A (x160 frame size)
MCCB outgoings
JN8B0008S16 Note: Link kits are not supplied with standard enclosures, the same to be ordered separately
*Incomer suitable for 3P h250 frame thermal magnetic MCCB
#Incomer suitable for 3P h400 frame thermal magnetic MCCB
^Incomer suitable for 3P h630 / h1000 frame thermal magnetic MCCB
50
accessories
Accessories Catalogue No.
Incomer kits (Includes mounting plates for MCCB)

250A 3P MCCB incomer kit JN2L2503MH
Key lock for distribution boards JK1XKLS
250A Incoming, 125A Outgoing

Cable End Box VYD00E2
400A Incoming, 125A Outgoing

630A / 800A Incoming, 125A / 250A Outgoing

250A Metering box

Hinged door Metering Box* VYD00M2
400A Metering box

630A / 800A Metering box

*Metering box are excluding accessories
51
!( & # ! " $ % %*%&
novello!+ -"250A
! / 400A"'& " ! / 800A panel board system
/ 630A
Reference
250A Surface mounted H W D

W D
Reference
JN2B00002S1 700 615 160
Surface mounted H W D
JN2B00004S1
JN2B00002S16 775
700 615615 160160
JN2B00004S16
JN2B00006S1
775
855 615
615 160
160
JN2B00006S16 855 615 160
JN2B00008S1
JN2B00008S16 925
925 615615 160160
JN2B00010S16 1000 615 160
JN2B00010S1 1000 615 160
JN2B00012S16 1115 615 160
H JN2B00016S16
JN2B00022S1 1375
1115 615615 160160
400A JN2B00016S1 1375 615 160
Reference
JN4B00004S16 930 690 200
JN4B00006S16 1005 690 200
JN4B00008S16 1080 690 200
JN4B00010S16 1230 690 200
JN4B00012S16 1380 690 200
630A / 800A
Reference
JN8B00004S16 1035 846 200
!( & # ! " $ %*%& JN8B00006S16 1110 846 200
! " ! JN8B00008S16
JN8B00010S16
1215
1320
846
846
200
200
JN8B00012S16 1410 846 200
JN8B00016S16 1620 846 200
630A Reference
/ 800A
Reference
JN8B00400S16
JN4B00004S1 9301095 690846 200200
W D JN8B00600S16 1200 846 200
JN4B00006S1 1005 690 200
JN8B00800S16 1305 846 200
JN8B01000S16
JN4B00008S1 1410
1080 690846 200200
JN8B01200S16 1515 846 200
JN4B00010S1 1155 690 200
JN8B01600S16 1725 846 200
JN4B00012S1 1230 690 200
JN4B00016S1 1380 690 200
H
JN4B00202S1 960 846 200
JN4B00204S1 1035 846 200
JN4B00206S1 1110 846 200
JN4B00208S1 1185 846 200
JN4B00210S1 1260 846 200
JN4B00214S1 1410 846 200

A B C
CEB 250A 615 609 160
CEB 400A 690 684 200
CEB 630A / 800A 846 840 200
Technical information 47
52
A B C D
Metering box* 250A 615 510 609 160
Metering box* 400A 690 580 684 200
Metering box* 630A / 800A 846 736 840 200
*Metering box are excluding accessories
53
Enclosures
easier, safer and faster
installations
golf range offers compact, sleek and light weight plastic enclosures for mounting of modular devices in
residential & commercial applications. Golf enclosures are made up of insulated engineering plastic
material in RAL 9010 color to match contemporary interiors of modern buildings. Vector range of
weather proof enclosures (IP65) answers the need of electrical distribution in humid and dusty
environments. These enclosures are equipped with special gasket to maintain high ingress
protection (IP) to protect modular devices from harmful dust and moisture.
golf enclosures 58
vector enclosures 64
Busbars and terminals 67

golf
enclosures
designed by you

Easy mounting - wall box can be turned 180 and has Ingress Protection (IP) IP40 with door
a removable cable entry slide
Insulation class - Class II (double insulation)
More wiring space - between the modular devices and
terminals as well as behind the DIN rails Impact resistance IK07
Clean and convenient wiring - thanks to patented integrated Material Flame retardant plastic
cable management system
Colour RAL 9010, white
Unbreakable door hinges
Same door for VS surface mounted version and VF flush

mounted version
Optimised conduit and trunking entries
56
Expert
tips
Easy and convenient Unbreakable door
1 cable management
clean and easy wiring using
patented integrated cable
management with standard
cable-ties and clips
4 hinges
same door for flush and surfa-
ce mounted enclosures
left or right opening reversible
door installation
More cabling space Self explanatory box
2 makes the job quicker

and easier
ease of installation thanks to a
greater space for working and
5 all product features are clearly
indicated by illustrations in the
box itself
cabling between modular

devices and terminals
Snapper mounted termi- Fast installation
3 nals
fast and hassle free installa-
tion of snapper mounted earth
and neutral terminals. Can be
mounted on top or bottom of
6 90 turn screws for securing
front cover
built-in captive screws, cannot
be lost
the enclosures
57
golf enclosures
Description Features & benefits IP40 IK 07
Plastic enclosures for distribu- Integrated cable management class II
tion of SPN & TPN supply in for easy wiring management
residential & commercial appli- Snapper mounted PE-N termi-
cations nals
Reversible door, can be IEC 60 695-2-1/0
Technical data changed at site and 60 695-2-1/1
No of rows 1, 2, 3 & 4 rows Choice of plain or transparent
No. of modules 4, 8, 12, 18, door
24, 36 & 48 modules More space between & behind
Mounting Surface / flush DIN rails for easy wiring
mounting Removable front plate & gland
IP category IP40 for double plates
door 90 turn captive screws for fast
Impact resistance IK07 installation
Material Flame retardant Pre-punched knockouts for
engineering plastic conduit & cable trunking entry
Color RAL 9010 (white)
Description Term. Catalogue No. Catalogue No.

Qty. Plain Transparent
Door Door
Flush Mounting
1 row 4 module N: 2x16 + 2x10 1 VF104PJ VF104TJ

E: 2x16 + 2x10 1
E: 2x16 + 4x10 1
E: 4x16 + 6x10 1
VF312TJ
E: 6x16 + 8x10 1
E: 9x16 + 13x10 1
E: 9x16 + 13x10 1
3 row 36 module N: 1x25 + 7x16 + 8x10 2 VF312PJ VF312TJ
E: 1x25 + 14x16 + 17x10 1
4 row 48 module N: 1x25 + 6x16 + 7x10 2 VF412PJ VF412TJ
E: 1x25 + 10x16 + 13x10 2
Surface Mounting
VS412PJ 1 row 4 module N: 2x16 + 2x10 1 VS104PJ VS104TJ

E: 2x16 + 2x10 1
1 row 8 module N: 2x16 + 4x10 1 VS108PJ VS108TJ
E: 2x16 + 4x10 1
E: 4x16 + 6x10 1
E: 6x16 + 8x10 1
E: 9x16 + 13x10 1
E: 9x16 + 13x10 1
3 row 36 module N: 1x25 + 7x16 + 8x10 2 VS312PJ VS312TJ
E: 1x25 + 14x16 + 17x10 1
4 row 48 module N: 1x25 + 6x16 + 7x10 2 VS412PJ VS412TJ
E: 1x25 + 10x16 + 13x10 2
Key Lock VZ794N

(Optional)
58
golf flush mounted enclosures
VF series
Cable entries
- top/bottom - side
One side cable entry slide, knockout-type, (VF104... and VF108...). Each side has one knockout of 25 mm on the left and right in the
upper and lower connection space.
The other side pre cuts with diameters 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm and 40
mm the wall box is 180 turnable (slider can be placed at top or bot- As of 2 rows, knockouts 25 mm on the left and right between the
tom). device rows. (no knockouts at 4 and 8 module enclosures).
E Catalogue No. Dimension (in mm)

Frame Wall niche
A H E F
VF104... 1 row 4 204 225 170 189
VF108... 1 row 8 275 225 242 189
VF112... 1 row 12 352 293 318 257
VF212... 2 row 12 352 418 318 382
VF312... 3 row 12 352 543 318 507
125
VF412... 4 row 12 352 688 318 652

VF118... 1 row 18 460 293 426 257
VF218... 2 row 18 460 418 426 382
72
72
46
H
68
16.5
25.5
59
golf surface mounted enclosures
VS series
Cable entries
- top/bottom
One side cable entry optimised for use of trunking, knockout-type.
The other side has pre-cuts with diameters 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm
and 40 mm. The wall box is 180 turnable.
E
Catalogue No. Dimension (in mm) Wall fixation
A H E F G
VS104... 1 row 4 137.5 183.5 101 68 58
G
VS108... 1 row 8 209.5 183.5 173.5 68 58

VS112... 1 row 12 281.5 251.5 221.5 135.5 58
VS212... 2 row 12 281.5 376.5 221.5 260.5 58
VS312...
125
F
3 row 12 281.5 500 221.5 385.5 58

VS412... 4 row 12 281.5 646.5 221.5 491 78
VS118... 1 row 18 389.5 251.5 329.5 135.5 58
VS218... 2 row 18 389.5 376.5 329.5 260.5 58
A
98.5
83
46
H
48
73
60
golf enclosures
designed for you
golf enclosures
golf range offers compact, sleek and light weight plastic enclosures for mounting
of modular devices in residential & commercial applications. golf enclosures are
made up of insulated engineering plastic material in RAL 9010 color to match
contemporary interiors of modern buildings.
www.hager.co.in
vector IP65
enclosures
vector range of weather proof enclosures answer the needs
of electrical distribution in dust and moisture prone
environment. Equipped with special door gasket, they
maintain high ingress protection (IP65) level of enclosure to
protect modular devices mounted inside.

Neoprene rubber gasket to maintain high IP level Conforms to IEC 60695-2-1
Supplied with cable glands, N & E terminals (Optional key lock) Mounting - Surface mounting
No. of rows - 1, 2, 3 & 4 rows

Transparent door to see status of modular devices without
opening door No. of ways - 3 module to 54 modules
Enclosure Ingress protection level - IP65
Insulation class - Class II (double insulation)
Impact resistant level - IK07 for < 12 mod

IK08 for > 12 mod
62
Expert
tips
High ingress protection Versatile range
1 level
IP65 Enclosure
suitable for applications expo-
sed to dust and moisture
4 3 to 54 modules capacity
choice of 1,2,3 & 4 rows
Class II, double insula- Quick and convenient
2 tion
made up of insulated material
electric shock proof enclo-
sures, added safety to user
no worry about paint peel off,
5 installation
supplied with IP54 cable
glands
includes neutral and earth
terminals
rusting or enclosure earthing pre-cut knockouts of various
diameter for conduit entry
Transparent door Optional key lock
3 allows to monitor status of

devices installed inside
6 key lock available as
accessory
63
vector enclosures - IP65
Surface mounted enclosures Neoprene rubber gasket
for distribution of electrical maintains high IP levels
energy in dusty & humid Supplied with cable glands,
environment earth & neutral terminals
Transparent door to see status
Technical data of modular devices
Conforms to IEC 60695-2-1
Mounting - Surface mounting IEC 60 695-2-1/0 and
No. of rows - 1, 2, 3 & 4 rows 60 695-2-1/1
No. of ways - 3 module to 54
modules
Enclosure IP category - IP65
Insulation class - Class II
VE212L IP65 IK07 < 12
Impact resistant level - IK07 for
IK08 > 12
< 12 mod & IK08 for > 12 mod
enclosures
class II
Description Pack Cat. ref.

Qty. 1 terminal
1 row 3 module E : 2x16 + 2x10 1 VE103L

w. 111 x h. 175 x d. 93 mm N : 2x16 + 2x10
supplied with IP54 cable glands
3xM20
1 row, 6 module E : 3x16 + 4x10 1 VE106L

VE106L w. 165 x h. 190 x d. 113 mm N : 3x16 + 4x10
2xM20+2xM25+1xM32
1 row, 10 module E : 5x16 + 6x10 1 VE110L

w. 237 x h. 210 x d. 114 mm N : 5x16 + 6x10
4xM20+2xM25+1xM32
1 row, 12 module E : 1x25 + 5x16 + 7x10 1 VE112L

w. 310 x h. 302 x d. 151 mm N : 1x25 + 5x16 + 7x10
10xM20+2xM25+1xM32
2 rows, 24 module E : 1x25 + 7x16 + 9x10 1 VE212L

w. 310 x h. 427 x d. 151 mm N : 1x25 + 7x16 + 9x10
14xM20+4xM25+1xM32

w. 310 x h. 552 x d. 151 mm N : 1x25 + 10x16 + 11x10
14xM20+10xM25+2xM32
VE312L
w. 310 x h. 677 x d. 151 mm N : 1x25 + 11x16 + 13x10
14xM20+10xM25+2xM32
1 row, 18 module E : 1x25 + 7x16 + 9x10 1 VE118L

w. 418 x h. 302 x d. 151 mm N : 1x25 + 7x16 + 9x10
8xM20+10xM25+1xM32

w. 418 x h. 452 x d. 151 mm N : 1x25 + 10x16 + 11x10
8xM20+14xM25+1xM32

w. 418 x h. 602 x d. 151 mm N : 1x25 + 11x16 + 13x10
VE218L
8xM20+18xM25+2xM32
Key lock 1 VZ311
(Optional)
64
vector enclosures / weather-proof enclosures
Dimensions
Rows A H E F
VE103L / VE103PN 1 111 175 147
VE106L / VE106PN 1 165 190 108 158
VE110L / VE110PN 1 237 210 180 173
VE112L / VE112PN 1 310 302 230 155
VE212L / VE212PN 2 310 427 230 280
VE312L / VE312PN 3 310 552 230 405
VE412L / VE412PN 4 310 677 230 550
VE118L / VE118PN 1 418 302 338 155
VE218L / VE218PN 2 418 452 338 305
VE318L / VE318PN 3 418 602 338 455
65
The Ingress Protection (IP) for all low voltage enclosures up to 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC is defined in the standard IEC 60529. It comprises the
letters IP followed by two digit (e.g. IPXX)
First digit : Second digit :

protection against solid substances protection against liquid substances
66
Insulated busbars
Prong type bus bars Technical data Material of insulation:
For connecting modular MCBs Conforms to KB 163P - KB163N : epoxy
of type ML IEC 60947-7 KDXXX : PVC
Brown - Phase IEC 60439-1
Blue - Neutral Material of bus bars:
E-Cu 58 F25
Fork type bus bars Operational voltage: 415V AC
For connecting modular MCBs
of type NB, NC and ND
Description Prong Type Catalogue No.

In(Amp.) mm mod
Prong Type 1P Brown (phase) 63 10 13 KB163P

Blue (neutral) 63 10 13 KB163N
KB163P 1P end caps KZ021

(for KB163P &
KB163N)
KB163N
Description Fork Type Catalogue No.

In(Amp.) mm mod
KZ021
1P bus bar, 12 mod 63 10 12 KDN163A
Fork Type 1P bus bar, 56 mod 63 10 56 KD163B
1P end caps KZN021

KDN263A (for KDN163A)

KDN363A 2P bus bar, 56 mod 63 10 56 KD263B
KDN463A
3P bus bar, 57 mod 63 10 57 KD363B
3P end caps KZN023

(for KDN263A &
KM14N
KDN363A)

4P bus bar, 56 mod 63 10 56 KD463B
4P end caps KZN024

(for KDN463A)
KF83D
63A DIN rail mounting neutral link KM14N
5x16 + 9x10
Terminal connector - 35 sq. mm KF83D
Modular terminal block KR50U
100A SP 1Module
Blanking plates
Half module P031F

PO31
One module P032F
67
Protection devices
reliable solutions for protecting
people, installation and equipment
Hager protection devices set the industry standard for reliability, quality and performance. It is the
mission of company to provide the highest quality products that clearly set themselves apart from
the market. Hager range of modular protection devices comprises of over-current protection, residual
current protection, surge protection, over-voltage and under-voltage protection solution.
MCCBs 72
Manual changeover switches 154
Automatic transfer switches 164
ACCLs 167
Switch disconnectors 169
2 way centre-off changeover switches 169
MCBs 172
RCCBs 182
RCBOs 184
RCD add-on blocks 193
Accessories 196
Earth leakage relays 198
Surge protection devices 201
HRC fuse carriers 217
HRC cartridge fuses gG type 219

MCCBs and trip-free switches
16 to 1600 A
feature loaded
The new H3 range of MCCBs provides safe and easy solutions for low voltage electrical
circuits protection. The state of the art circuit breakers offer both designers and installers wide
range of features and benefits. Special attention has been given to ergonomics, especially with
the integration of these devices in novello+ distribution boards.

Easy to install Comply with IEC 60947-2
Quick, easy and safety mounting of accessories 6 frame sizes: x160, x250, h250, h630, h1000, h1600
Wide range of rated current ratings and breaking capacities Breaking capacity: 18, 25, 40, 50, 65, 70 kA
Calibrated at 50 Deg centigrade Thermal magnetic and electronic trip units
Trip-free switches 3 pole and 4 poles
Current limiting type
Complete range of accessories
International certification and approvals
70
Expert
tips
Design by Hager Single quarter turn
1 In harmony with Hager

enclosures and modular
products
Breaking capacity: 18 to 70kA,
Icu 415V AC, covers all
5 screw to open
secondary cover / visibility
of auxiliaries connected
applications
Electronic trip unit (LSI) Integrated padlocking
2 Is permitting total selectivity and

generator protection
6 facility
easy solution for maintenance
Protected O/L setting Complete range of
3 with thermal adjustable upto

63%, Calibration at 50C
7 accessories
rotary handles, padlocks, motor
operator, terminal covers
Easy mounting of Flexible connection
4 auxiliaries
Easy opening of secondary
cover, clip-on type auxiliaries 8 Collar terminals, front and rear
connections, straight
connections, spreaders...
71
MCCBs and trip-free switches x160
Moulded case circuit breakers DIN rail adaptor available for DIN Trip-free switches
x160 rail mounting Allows tripping at distance using
a voltmetrical trip unit (optional)
Available in 3P and 4P Connection capacity AC22/23A
Mechanical test button, lockable 95 mm2 rigid cables
settings, 70 mm2 flexible cables collar Comply with IEC60947-3
integrated padlocking handle terminals
4mm,
Thermal magnetic trip unit, 2 Comply with IEC 60947-2
versions:
Z version: fixed thermal and
fixed magnetic
U version: adjustable thermal
and fixed magnetic
Description Rating In Catalogue No.
3P 4P
MCCBs x160 18kA 16A HDA016Z HDA017Z

breaking capacity 20A HDA020Z HDA021Z
Ics : 18 kA 25A HDA025Z HDA026Z
(400/415 V AC) 32A HDA032Z HDA033Z
40A HDA040Z HDA041Z
fixed thermal 50A HDA050Z HDA051Z
1x In 63A HDA063Z HDA064Z
fixed magnetic 80A HDA080Z HDA081Z
> 10 x In 100A HDA100Z HDA101Z
125A HDA125Z HDA126Z
160A HDA160Z HDA161Z
HDA125Z
adjustable thermal 25A HDA025U HDA026U

0.63 - 0.8 - 1 x In 40A HDA040U HDA041U
fixed magnetic 63A HDA063U HDA064U
> 10 x In 80A HDA080U HDA081U
100A HDA100U HDA101U
MCCBs x160 25kA 16A HHA016Z HHA017Z

breaking capacity 20A HHA020Z HHA021Z
Ics : 20 kA 25A HHA025Z HHA026Z
(400/415 V AC) 32A HHA032Z HHA033Z
40A HHA040Z HHA041Z
fixed thermal 50A HHA050Z HHA051Z
1x In 63A HHA063Z HHA064Z
fixed magnetic 80A HHA080Z HHA081Z
> 10 x In 100A HHA100Z HHA101Z
125A HHA125Z HHA126Z
160A HHA160Z HHA161Z
HDA161U
adjustable thermal 25A HHA025U HHA026U

0.63 - 0.8 - 1 x In 40A HHA040U HHA041U
fixed magnetic 63A HHA063U HHA064U
> 10 x In 80A HHA080U HHA081U
100A HHA100U HHA101U
72
Add-on blocks for x160 devices Fixed version: 300 mA sensitivity assembly system. The terminal
These devices are intended to be and instantaneous tripping cover is dependent of the add-
fixed on the right side of the on block.
devices. Adjustable version: adjustable
sensitivity and tripping. Connection capacity
Type A and HI 95 mm2 rigid cables
For fault component pulsating Test button for differential 70 mm2 flexible cables
current. functioning check.
HI (High Immunity): Mechanical test button Comply with IEC 60947-2
the products with reinforced LED or at distance signal for annexe B.
immunity reduce the tripping or advance warning
unexpected tripping when they (25-50% In).
protect equipment generating
disturbances (micro-processing, Assembly and disassembly
electronic ballast...) facilitated by the drawer
Description In Catalogue No.
3P 4P
MCCBs x160 40kA 25A HNA025U HNA026U

40A HNA040U HNA041U
adjustable thermal 63A HNA063U HNA064U
0.63 - 0.8 - 1 x In 80A HNA080U HNA081U
fixed magnetic 100A HNA100U HNA101U
> 10 x In 125A HNA125U HNA126U
160A HNA160U HNA161U
HNA125Z
Trip-free switches x160 125A HCA125Z HCA126Z

suitable for 160A HCA160Z HCA161Z
AC22A / AC 23A
Ue: 415 V AC
Icw (1s): 2 kA
Add-on blocks 125 A HBA127H HBA128H

ln 300 mA
fixed sensitivity
instantaneous tripping
125A HBA125H HBA126H
sensitivity ln 160A HBA160H HBA161H
adjustable: 0.03 - 0.1 - 0.3 - 1 -
3 - 6A
adjustable tripping:
- instantaneous
- time delay: 0.06 - 0.15 - 0.3 -
0.5 - 1s
HBA161H
73
Accessories for
Indication contacts Shunt trip Direct rotary handle
1 changeover switch (ON/OFF): Remotes tripping of MCCBs or padlockable
indicates the position of the trip-free switches. Operating equipped with front cover and
MCCB is open or close. voltage: 0.7 to 1.1 x Un handle
1 changeover alarm contact: fixing without any additional
indicates MCCB tripping. Under voltage release screw
Allows the tripping of MCCBs or
Coil connection trip-free switches when voltage Extended rotary handle
Connection capacity: level drop between 35 and 70% of IP 55
0,75 mm2 flexible or rigid cables Un. Pick up voltage 0.85 x Un supplied complete with shaft
Optional connection cables. and handle
The cable capacity of the
terminals is 0.5 to 1.25 mm2.
Description Characteristics Catalogue

No.
Auxiliary contacts 1 changeover contact (ON/OFF) HXA021H

AX 250 V AC / 3A
AL 125 V DC / 0,4A
1 NO + 1 NC
1 changeover alarm contact HXA024H

250 V AC / 3A
125 V DC / 0,4A
1 NO + 1 NC
HXA021H HXA024H
Shunt trips 24 V DC HXA001H

SH
200 - 240 V AC HXA004H
Undervoltage releases 24 V DC HXA011H

UV
200 - 240 V AC HXA014H
HXA014H
380 - 450 V AC HXA015H
Locking kit HXA035H
74
Accessories for
Description Characteristics Catalogue No.
3P 4P
Direct rotary handle padlockable handle HXA030H HXA030H

max 6 mm
Extended rotary handle padlockable handle HXA031H HXA031H

max 8 mm
Extended connections set of 3 or 4 spreader HYA014H HYA015H

connections
HXA030H
Interphase barriers set of 3, HYA019H HYA019H

height: 50 mm
set of 3, HYB019H HYB019H

height: 97 mm
Din rail adaptor HYA033H HYA033H
HXA031H
HYA015H
75
Moulded case circuit breakers Connection: Add-on blocks for x250 devices
x250, Directly on copper cable terminal, These devices are intended to be
Type of trip unit: with end lug max. width: 25 mm fixed at the bottom of the devices.
U version: adjustable thermal Connection capacity: 185 mm2
and magnetic rigid cables Type A and HI
for fault component dc pulsating
3P and 4P Comply with IEC 60947-2. current and the products with
Mechanical test button, lockable Collar terminals reinforced immunity.
settings, integrated padlocking Adjustable sensitivity and tripping.
handle 4mm. Trip-free switches Test button for differential
Comply with IEC 60 947-2. Allows tripping at distance using functioning check.
a voltmetrical trip unit (optional) Mechanical test button
Complies with IEC 60 947-3 LED or at distance signal for
AC 22/23A tripping or advance warning
(25 - 50% In)
Comply with IEC 60947-2

annexe B
Description Characteristics In Catalogue No.
3P 4P
MCCBs x250 25kA fixed thermal 200A HHB200Z HHB201Z

1 x In
250A HHB250Z HHB251Z
fixed magnetic
710 x In
MCCBs x250 40kA adjustable thermal 100A HNB100U HNB101U

0.63 - 0.8 - 1x In
adjustable magnetic 125A HNB125U HNB126U
6 - 8 - 10 - 13 x In (100 - 200A)
5 - 7 - 9 - 11 x In (250A) 160A HNB160U HNB161U
3P, 3 trip units 200A HNB200U HNB201U

4P,
neutral setting: 0 or 100% 250A HNB250U HNB251U
HNB100U
Trip-free switches x250 capacity suitable for 250A HCB250Z HCB251Z

AC 22/23A
Icw (1s): 3 kA
Add-on blocks adjustable sensitivity In: 160A HBB161H

0.03 - 0.1 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 6A
250A HBB251H
HBB251H adjustable tripping:
- instantaneous
- time delay: 0.06 - 0.15 -
0.3 - 0.5 - 1 sec
76
Accessories for
indicates the position of the trip-free switches. equipped with front cover and
MCCB is open or closed. Operating voltage: 0.7 to 1.1 x Un handle
1 changeover alarm contact: fixing without any additional
indicates MCCB tripping. Under voltage release screw
Allows the tripping of MCCBs or
Coil connection trip-free switches when voltage Extended rotary handle
Connection capacity: level drop between 35 and 70% of IP 55
0.75 mm2 flexible or rigid cables Un. Pick up voltage 0.85 x Un supplied complete with shaft
Optional connection cables. and handle

No.
Auxiliary contacts 1 changeover contact HXA021H

AX 250 V AC / 3A
AL 125 V DC / 0,4A
1 NO + 1 NC
1 changeover alarm contact HXA024H

250 V AC / 3A
125 V DC / 0,4A
1 NO + 1 NC
HXA021H HXA024H
Shunt trips 24 V DC HXA001H

SH 200 - 240 V AC HXA004H
Undervoltage releases UV 24 V DC HXA011H

200 - 240 V AC HXA014H
380 - 450 V AC HXA015H
HXA014H Direct rotary handles padlockable handle HXB030H

max 6 mm
Extended rotary handles padlockable handle HXB031H

max 8 mm
Motor operators 230 - 240V AC HXB042H
HXB042H Extended spreaders HYB011H HYB012H

connections
(3P) (4P)
Interphase set of 3 HYB019H

barriers height: 97 mm
Mechanical HXB065H
Inter lock kit
77
MCCBs h250
Moulded case circuit breakers Connection:
h250 Directly on copper cable terminal,
Thermal magnetic trip unit: with end lug max. width: 25 mm
thermal adjustment: 0.63 to 1 In
magnetic adjustment: Comply with IEC 60947-2
6-8-10-13 x In
3P & 4P / 3P (for 25kA)
Mechanical test button, lockable
settings,
3P 4P
MCCBs h250 25kA breaking capacity 63A HHG063H -

TM Icu : 25 kA (400/415 V AC) 100A HHG100H -
Ics: 19 kA 125A HHG125H -
160A HHG160H -
adjustable thermal 200A HHG200H -
0.63 to 1 x In 250A HHG250H -
adjustable magnetic
6 - 8 - 10 - 13 x In
MCCBs h250 50kA breaking capacity 63A HNG063H -

TM Icu : 30 kA (20-32A) 100A HNG100H -
HHG250H Icu : 50 kA 125A HNG125H -
(400/415 V AC) 160A HNG160H -
Ics: 25 kA 200A HNG200H -
250A HNG250H -
adjustable thermal
0.63 to 1 x In
adjustable magnetic
6 - 8 - 10 - 13 x In
MCCBs h250 65kA breaking capacity 200A HEG200H -

TM Icu : 65 kA (400/415 V AC) 250A HEG250H -
Ics: 36 kA
adjustable thermal
0.63 to 1 x In
adjustable magnetic
HNG125H 6 - 8 - 10 - 13 x In
78
MCCBs h250
Moulded case circuit breakers 2 values setting: Connection:
h250 Ir setting Directly on copper cable
Electronic trip unit LSI: predefined curve selection terminal, with end lug max.
L - Long time delay - protection (9 possibilities) width: 25 mm
against overloads: 3P3d and 4P3d/4dN/2
adjustable: Ir from 0.4 to 1 x In (adjustable neutral Comply with IEC 60947-2.
S - Short time delay - protection 0 - 50 - 100%)
against short-circuits: adjustable Mechanical button,
Isd from 2.5 to 10 x Ir Sealable settings.
time delay 0.1 or 0.2 s I
Instantaneous - definitive time Not for use in TPN and panel
delay tripping maximum boards.
threshold in case of short-circuit
(Ii max = 13 x In)
3P 4P
MCCBs h250 50kA breaking capacity 40A HNC040H HNC041H

LSI Icu : 50 kA (400/415 V AC) 125A HNC125H HNC126H
Ics: 25 kA 250A HNC250H HNC251H
adjustable overload
Ir = 0.4 to 1 x In
adjustable short circuit
2.5 to 10 x Ir
3P, 3 trip units & 4P, 3 trip units
HNC125H MCCBs h250 70kA breaking capacity 40A HEC040H HEC041H

LSI Icu : 70 kA (400/415 V AC) 125A HEC125H HEC126H
Ics: 70 kA 250A HEC250H HEC251H
adjustable overload
Ir = 0.4 to 1 x In
2.5 to 10 x Ir
3P, 3 trip units & 4P, 3 trip units
HEC250H
79
Accessories for MCCBs h250
MCCB is open or close. Operating voltage: 0.7 to 1.1 x handle
1 changeover alarm contact: Un fixing without any additional
indicates MCCB tripping. screw
Under voltage release
Coil connection Allows the tripping of MCCBs or Extended rotary handle
Connection capacity: trip-free switches when voltage IP 55
0.75 mm2 flexible or rigid cables level drop between 35 and 70% supplied complete with shaft
Optional connection cables. of Un. and handle
The cable capacity of the Pick up voltage 0.85 x Un

No.
Auxiliary contacts 1 changeover contact HXC021H

AX 250 V AC / 3A
AL 125 V DC / 0,4A
1 NO + 1 NC
1 changeover alarm contact HXC024H

250 V AC / 3A
125 V DC / 0,4A
1 NO + 1 NC
HXC021H HXC024H
Shunt trips 24 V DC HXC001H

SH 200 - 240 V AC HXC004H
Undervoltage releases UV 24 V DC HXC011H

200 - 240 V AC HXC014H
380 - 450 V AC HXC015H
HXC004H HXC014H
Direct rotary handles padlockable handle HXC030H

5 - 8 mm2 max
Extended rotary handles padlockable handle HXC031H

5 - 8 mm2 max
HXC030H
Motor operators 230-240 V AC HXC042H
Extended spreader connections HYC011H HYB012H

connections
(3P) (4P)
HYC011H
Interphase barriers set of 3 pieces HYC019H
Locking kit HXC035H
Mechanical HXC065H
Inter lock kit
80
MCCBs and trip-free switches h400-h630
Moulded case circuit breakers Connection:
h400, h630 Directly on copper cable
Thermal magnetic trip unit TM: terminal, with end lug max.
thermal adjustment: width: 30 mm
from 0.63 to 1 x In
magnetic adjustment: Comply with IEC 60947-2
from 6 to 12 x In
3P 4P
MCCBs h400 25kA breaking capacity 400A HHD400U -

TM Icu : 25 kA (400/415 V AC)
Ics: 25 kA
adjustable thermal: 0.63 to 1 x In

adjustable magnetic: 6 to 12 x In
3P
MCCBs h400 50kA breaking capacity 250A - HND251U

HHD400H TM Icu : 50 kA (400/415 V AC) 400A HND400U HND401U
Ics: 50 kA
adjustable thermal: 0.63 to 1 x In

adjustable magnetic: 6 to 12 x In
HND400H
81
Moulded case circuit breakers 3P3d and 4P3d/4dN/2 Add-on blocks Type A (for fault component DC
h400, h630 (adjustable neutral 0 - 50 - For h630 (LSI) devices pulsating current) and HI
- Electronic trip unit LSI: 100%) These devices are intended to be (reinforced immunity against
L - Long time delay - protection Mechanical button, fixed at the bottom of the unexpected tripping).
against overloads: adjustable: Ir Sealable settings devices.
from 0,4 to 1 x In Comply with IEC 60947-2
S - Short time delay - protection Connection: Fixed version: 300mA
against short-circuits: adjustable Directly on copper cable sensitivity and instantaneous
Isd from 2.5 to 10 x Ir (400A), 2.5 terminal, with end lug max. tripping
to 8 x Ir (630A) time delay 0.1 or width: 30 mm
0.2 s Adjustable version: sensitivity
I - Instantaneous - definitive time Comply with IEC 60947-2 from 30mA to 6A, tripping from
delay tripping maximum instantaneous to 1s delay.
threshold in case of short-circuit Trip-free switches Test button for differential
(Ii max = 13 x In) Allows tripping at distance using functioning check.
2 values setting: a voltmetrical trip unit (optional) Mechanical test button.
Ir setting LED or remote signal for tripping
predefined curve selection (7 Comply with IEC 60947-3 or advance warning (25-50%
possibilities) AC 23A / DC 22A ln).
3P 4P
MCCBs h630 50kA breaking capacity 400A HND400H HND401H

LSI Icu : 50 kA (400/415 V AC)
* delivered with spreader bars Ics: 50 kA 630A HND630H* HND631H*
adjustable overload: Ir = 0.4 to 1 x In

adjustable short circuit:
2.5 to 10 x Ir (250-400A)
2.5 to 8 x Ir (630A)
time delay: 0.1 - 0.2 s
MCCBs h630 70kA breaking capacity 400A HED400H HED401H

HND630H LSI Icu : 70 kA (400/415 V AC)
* delivered with spreader bars Ics: 50 kA 630A HED630H* HED631H*
adjustable overload: Ir = 0.4 to 1 x In

adjustable short circuit:
2.5 to 10 x Ir (250-400A)
2.5 to 8 x Ir (630A)
time delay: 0.1 - 0.2 s
Trip-free switches suitable for AC 22A / AC 23A 400A HCD400H HCD401H

* delivered with spreader bars Ue: 415 V AC
HBD401H
Icw (0.3s) = 5kA 630A HCD630H* HCD631H*
Add-on blocks adjustable sensitivity ln: 400A - HBD401H

(only for h630) 0.03 - 0.1 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 6A
adjustable tripping 500A - HBD631H
instantaneous
time delay: 0.06s - 0.15s - 0.3s -
0.5 - 1s
82
Accessories for
MCCB is open or close Operating voltage: handle
1 changeover alarm contact: 0.7 to 1.1 x Un fixing without any additional
indicates MCCB tripping screw
Coil connection Allows the tripping of MCCBs or Extended rotary handle
Connection capacity: trip-free switches when voltage IP 55
0.75 mm2 flexible or rigid cables level drop between 35 and 70% supplied complete with shaft
Optional connection cables. of Un. Pick up voltage 0.85 x Un and handle

No.

AX 250 V AC / 3A
AL 125 V DC / 0,4A
1 NO + 1 NC

250 V AC / 3A
125 V DC / 0,4A
HXC021H HXC024H 1 NO + 1 NC

SH 200 - 240 V AC HXC004H
Undervoltage releases 24 V DC HXC011H

HXC004H UV 200 - 240 V AC HXC014H
380 - 450 V AC HXC015H
Direct rotary handle padlockable handle HXD030H

max 6 mm
Extended rotary handle padlockable handle HXD031H

max 8 mm
HXC014H
3P 4P
Motor operators 100-240 V AC HXD042H HXD042H
Extended connections spreader connections 250 - 400A HYD011H HYD012H

630A HYD014H HYD015H
Locking kit HXD039H

HXD042H
Mechanical Inter lock kit HXD065H
83
MCCBs and trip-free switches h1000
Moulded case circuit breakers threshold in case of short-circuit Connection
h1000 (Ii max = 12 x In) Directly on copper cable
Electronic trip unit LSI: 2 values setting: terminal, with end lug max.
L - Long time delay - protection Ir setting width: 50 mm
against overloads: adjustable: Ir predefined curve selection
from 0,4 to 1 x In (7 possibilities) Comply with IEC 60947-2
S - Short time delay - protection 3P3d and 4P3d/4dN/2
against short-circuits: adjustable (adjustable neutral Trip-free switches
Isd from 2.5 to 10 x Ir (630- 0 - 50 - 100%) Allows tripping at distance using
800A), 2.5 to 8 x Ir (1000A) Mechanical button, a voltmetrical trip unit (optional)
time delay 0.1 or 0.2 s Sealable settings
I - Instantaneous - definitive time Comply with IEC 60 947-3
delay tripping maximum AC 23A / DC 22A
3P 4P
MCCBs h1000 50kA breaking capacity 630A HNE630H*

LSI Icu : 50 kA (400/415 V AC)
Ics: 50 kA 800A HNE800H HNE801H
adjustable overload 1000A HNE970H HNE971H

Ir = 0.4 to 1 x In
2.5 to 10 x Ir (630 - 800A)
2.5 to 8 x Ir (1000A)
time delay: 0.1-0.2 s
neutral setting from 0-50 to

100%
* without straight extended

HNE970H connection
MCCBs h1000 70kA breaking capacity 800A HEE800H HEE801H

LSI Icu : 70 kA (400/415 V AC)
Ics: 50 kA 1000A HEE970H HEE971H
adjustable overload
Ir = 0.4 to 1 x In
2.5 to 10 x Ir (800A)
2.5 to 8 x Ir (1000A)
neutral setting from

0-50 to 100%
HEE970H
Trip-free switches suitable for 800A HCE800H HCE801H

AC 22A / AC 23A
Ue : 415 V AC 1000A HCE970H HCE971H
Icw (0.3 s) = 10 kA
84
Accessories for
Indication contacts Shunt trip
1 changeover switch (ON/OFF): Remotes tripping of MCCBs or
indicates the position of the trip-free switches.
MCCB is open or close Operating voltage:
1 changeover alarm contact: 0.7 to 1.1 x Un
indicates MCCB tripping.
Coil connection Allows the tripping of MCCBs or
Connection capacity: trip-free switches when voltage
0.75 mm2 flexible or rigid cables level drop between 35 and 70%
Optional connection cables. of Un. Pick up voltage 0.85 x Un
terminals is 0.5 to 1.25 mm2

No.

AX 250 V AC / 3A
AL 125 V DC / 0,4A
1 NO + 1 NC

250 V AC / 3A
125 V DC / 0,4A
1 NO + 1 NC
HXC021H HXC024H

SH
200 - 240 V AC HXC004H
Undervoltage releases UV 24 V DC HXE011H

HXC004H
220 - 240 V AC HXE014H
380 - 415 V AC HXE015H
HXE014H Mechanical Inter lock kit HXE065H
85
Accessories for
Direct rotary handle Extended rotary handle
padlockable IP 55
equipped with front cover and supplied complete with shaft
handle and handle
fixing without any additional
screw
3P 4P
Interphase barriers set of 3 HYE019H HYE019H
Direct rotary handles padlockable handle HXE030H
Extended rotary handles padlockable handle HXE031H

HXE030H
Motor operators 100 - 240V AC HXE042H
86
Moulded case circuit breakers 2 values setting: Connection:
h1600, selection and Ir setting Directly on copper cable
protection predefined curve selection terminal, with end lug max.
Electronic trip unit LSI: (7 possibilities) width: 60 mm
L - Long time delay - protection 3P3d and 4P3d/4dN/2
against overloads: adjustable: Ir (adjustable neutral Comply with IEC 60947-2
from 0.4 to 1 x In 0 - 50 - 100%)
S - Short time delay - protection Mechanical button, Trip-free switches
against short-circuits: adjustable Sealable settings Allows tripping at distance using
Isd from 2.5 to 10 x Ir time delay a voltmetrical trip unit (optional)
0.1 or 0.2 s
I - Instantaneous - definitive time Comply with IEC 60947-3
delay tripping maximum AC 23A / DC 22A
threshold in case of short-circuit
(Ii max = 12 x In)
3P 4P
MCCBs h1600 50kA breaking capacity 1250A HNF980H HNF981H

LSI Icu : 50 kA (400/415 V AC)
Ics: 50 kA 1600A HNF990H HNF991H
adjustable overload
Ir = 0.4 to 1 x In
2.5 to 10 x Ir
neutral setting 0, 50, 100%
HNF990H MCCBs h1600 70kA breaking capacity 1250A HEF980H HEF981H

LSI Icu : 70 kA (400/415 V AC)
Ics: 50 kA 1600A HEF990H HEF991H
adjustable overload
Ir = 0.4 to 1 x In
2.5 to 10 x Ir
neutral setting from

0, 50, 100%
Trip-free switches suitable for 1250A HCF980H HCF981H

AC 22A / AC 23A
HNF990H Ue : 415 V AC 1600A HCF990H HCF991H
Icw (0.3 s) = 20 kA
87
Accessories for
MCCB is open or close. Operating voltage: handle
1 changeover alarm contact: 0.7 to 1.1 x Un fixing without any additional
indicates MCCB tripping screw
Under voltage release Extended rotary handle
Coil connection Allows the tripping of MCCBs or IP 55
Connection capacity: trip-free switches when voltage supplied complete with shaft
0.75 mm2 flexible or rigid cables level drop between 35 and 70% and handle
Optional connection cables. of Un. Rear connection: included
The cable capacity of the Pick up voltage 0.85 x Un
terminals is 0.5 to 1.25 mm2

No.

AX 250 V AC / 3A
AL 125 V DC / 0.4A
1 NO + 1 NC

250 V AC / 3A
125 V DC / 0.4A
1 NO + 1 NC
HXC021H HXC024H
Shunt trips 24 V DC HXF001H
SH 200 - 240 V AC HXF004H
Undervoltage releases UV 24 V DC HXE011H

220 - 240 V AC HXE014H
380 - 415 V AC HXE015H
HXC004H
Direct rotary handle padlockable handle, max 8 mm HXF030H
Extended rotary handle padlockable handle, max 8 mm HXF031H
Motor operators 200 - 230 V AC HXF042H
Interphase barriers 3/4 P, set of 3 HYF019H
HXC014H Locking kit HXF039H
88
MCCBs
feature loaded
MCCBs
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

Provides safe and easy solution for low voltage electrical circuit protection. The
state of the art circuit breakers offer both designers and installers wide range of
features and benefits. Special attention has been given to ergonomics, especially
with the integration of these devices in novello+ distribution boards.
www.hager.co.in
MCCBs technical characteristics
Frame x160 x250 h250 TM
Product Switch MCCB Switch MCCB MCCB
Reference HCA HDA HHA HNA HCB HHB HNB HHG HNG HEG
Number of poles [No.] 3-4 1-2-3-4 1-2-3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
Electrical characteristics
Rated current In [A] 160 250 250
Current rated range [A] 125-160 16-125 (1P), 16-160 (2,3,4P) 250 100-250 12,5-250
Rated service voltage, (AC) Ue [V] 220-440 220-440 220-690
Frequency f [Hz] 50/60 50/60 50/60
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V] 690 800 800
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp [kV] 8 8 8
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, (Icu)
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V Icu [kA] - 25 35 85 - 35 85 35 85 85
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V Icu [kA] - 18 25 40 - 25 40 25 50 65

(AC) 50-60 Hz 480/500/525 V Icu [kA] - 6 17.5 12.5 - - 10 10 25 25
(AC) 50-60 Hz 660/690 V Icu [kA] - - - 6 - - 4 - 7.5 7.5
(DC) 250 V - 2 poles in series Icu [kA] - 12.5 20 25 - 25 25 25 40 40
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, (Ics)
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V Ics [kA] - 25 25 40 - 25 40 27 65 85
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V Ics [kA] - 18 20 20 - 20 20 19 25 36

(AC) 50-60 Hz 480/500/525 V Ics [kA] - 3 4 7.5 - - 7.5 7.5 25 25
(AC) 50-60 Hz 660/690 V Ics [kA] - - - 3 - - 2 - 7.5 7.5
(DC) 250 V - 2 poles in series Ics [kA] - 7 10 13 - 13 13 19 40 40
Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm [kA] 2,8 - - - 9 - - -
Rated short-time withstand current for 1s Icw [kA] 2 - - - 3 - - -
Category of use (EN 60947-2) - A - A A
Calibration temperature - 50C - 50C 50C
Derating 40C - 100% - 100% 100%
50C - 100% - 100% 100%
55C - 95% - 94% 94%
60C - 93% - 91% 91%
65C - 90% - 88% 88%
Suitability for isolation ok ok ok
Electric endurance in number of cycles 10000 10000 10000
Mechanical endurance in number of operations 20000 20000 30000
Operating temperature -25 to +70C -25 to +70C -25 to +70C
Storage temperature -35 to +70C -35 to +70C -35 to +70C
Power loss (at In for 3P) [W] 39 60 65
Reference standard IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Releases: switch ok - ok - -
Releases: TM (thermomagnetic) - ok - ok ok
T fixed, M fixed - ok - ok -
T adjustable, M fixed - ok - - -
T adjustable, M adjustable - - - ok ok
Thermal adjustment value - 0,63 to 1 x In - 0,63 to 1 x In 0,63 to 1 x In
Magnetic adjustment value - - - 6-8-10-13 x In (200A) 6-8-10-13 x In
5-7-9-11 In (250A)
Releases: LSI (electronic) - - - - -
Long delay - - - - -
Short delay - - - - -
Time delay - - - - -
Terminations
Standard terminal type cage lugs lugs
Maximum terminal capacity 95 mm2 185 mm2 (cage) 120 mm2 (cage)
Terminal width mm - 25 25
Terminal shields ok ok ok
Cage terminal integrated ok ok
Extended connections ok ok ok
Rear connections no ok ok
Dimensions
Height mm 130 165 165
Width 1P mm - 25 - - -
2P mm - 50 - - -
3P mm 75 105 105
4P mm 100 140 140
Depth mm 68 68 68
Weight 1P kg - 0,29 - - -
2P kg - 0,48 - - -
3P kg 0,715 1,3 1,5
4P kg 0,95 1,6 1,9
90
h250 LSI h400 TM h630 LSI h1000 LSI h1600 LSI
MCCB MCCB Switch MCCB Switch MCCB Switch MCCB
HNC HEC HHD HND HKD HCD HND HED HCE HNE HEE HCF HNF HEF
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
250 400 630 1000 1600

40-125-250 250-400 400-630 250-400-630 630-800-1000 1250-1600
220-690 220-690 220-690 220-690 220-690
50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
800 800 800 800 800
8 8 8 8 8
85 100 35 85 85 - 85 100 - 85 (800A) 100 - 100 100

75 (1000A)
50 70 25 50 70 - 50 70 - 50 70 - 50 70
25 45 10 30 - 30 30 - 30 30 - 45 65
7,5 20 7,5 20 - 20 20 - 20 20 - 25 45
- - 25 40 - - - - - - -
85 100 35 85 - 85 85 - 85 (800A) 100 (800A) - 75 75

75 (1000A) 75 (1000A)
25 70 25 50 50 - 50 50 - 50 50 - 50 50
10 45 10 30 - 30 30 - 30 30 - 45 50
7,5 15 7,5 15 - 15 15 - 20 20 - 25 34
- - 25 40 - - - - - - -
- - - 9 - - 20 - - 45 - -
- - - 5 (0,3s) - - 10 (0,3s) - - 20 (0,3s) - -
A A - B(250-400A) - A(630A) - B(800A) - A(1000A) - B
40C 50C - 40C - 40C - 40C
100% 100% - 100% - 100% - 100%
95% 100% - 100% - 100% - 100%
90% 95% - 95% - 95% - 95%
80% 92% - 90% - 90% - 90%
80% 89% - 80% - 80% - 80%
ok ok ok ok ok
10000 4500 4500 4500 4500
30000 15000 15000 15000 15000
-25 to +70C -25 to +70C -25 to +70C -25 to +70C -25 to +70C
-35 to +70C -35 to +70C -35 to +70C -35 to +70C -35 to +70C
75 75 150 150 170
IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-2
- - ok - ok - ok -
- ok - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- ok - - -
- 0,63 to 1 x In - - -
- 6-8-10-12 x In - - -
- - - ok - ok - ok
0,4 to 1 x Ir - - 0,4 to 1 x Ir - 0,4 to 1 x Ir - 0,4 to 1 x In
2,5 to 10 x Ir - - 2,5 to 10 x Ir (250-400A) - 2,5 to 10 x Ir (800A) - 2,5 to 10 x Ir
2,5 to 8 x Ir (630A) 2,5 to 8 x Ir (1000A)
0,1 - 0,2s - - 0,1 - 0,2s - 0,1 - 0,2s - 0,1 - 0,2s
lugs lugs lugs lugs lugs

120 mm2 (cage) 240 mm2 (cage) - - -
25 30 30 45 45
ok ok ok ok ok
ok ok - - -
ok ok integrated integrated integrated
ok ok ok ok ok
165 260 260 273/433 370/570

- - - - -
- - - - -
105 140 140 210 210
140 185 185 280 280
97 97 97 99,5 140
- - - - -
- - - - -
2,5 4,2 4,3 11 27
3,3 5,6 5,7 14,8 31
91
Add-on blocks technical characteristics
Product Add-on blocks

Frame x160 x160 x250 h630
Number of poles 3, 4 3, 4 4 4
Tripping access mechanical mechanical mechanical mechanical
Standards CEI/EN 60947-2 appendix B ok ok ok ok
Max rated current (40) In A In 125A 125 - 160A 160 - 250A 400A - 500A
Rated service voltage Ue V AC (50/60Hz) Ue 240-415V 240-415V 240-415V 240-415V
Mechanical characteristics
Top and bottom supply ok ok ok ok
For tripping, no additional external electrical sources ok ok ok ok
Possible operating with 2 active phases ok ok ok ok
Settings
Sensitivity In In (A) 300mA 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1,
3, 6A 3, 6A 3, 6A
Time delay t t (s) inst. inst., 0.06, 0.15, inst., 0.06, 0.15, inst., 0.06, 0.15,
0.3, 0.5, 1 0.3, 0.5, 1 0.3, 0.5, 1
Max. opening time ms 10 10 10 10
Delay add-on block is not possible if In = 30mA / ok ok ok
Selective product no ok ok ok
Mechanical test button ok ok ok ok
Isolating test without cable removal ok ok ok ok
Electrical test button ok ok ok ok
Reset button ok ok ok ok
Sealable setting button no ok ok ok
Isolation level signaling by led 25 and 50% no ok ok ok
In running signalisation by led no ok ok ok
Residual default signaling contact ok ok ok ok
Signaling contact 50% Idn no ok ok ok
Anti-transient type AC ok ok ok ok
Pulsating current type A ok ok ok ok
High immunity type HI yes yes yes yes
-25C ok ok ok ok
Accessories and connection
Steel terminal cage (x3/x4) ok (included) ok (included) accessories accessories
Connection by lugs no no ok ok
Extended connections (x4) ok ok ok ok
Spreaders (x4) ok ok ok ok
Terminal covers (3P/4P) no no ok ok
Interphase barriers (x3) ok ok ok ok
Rigid cables connection capacity mm 4 - 95 4 - 95 35-185 35-240
Flexible cables connection capacity mm (with terminal) 4 - 70 4 - 70 35-150 35-185
Tightening torque Nm 6 6 12 22
Copper bar (width) in mm no no 25 30
Mounting
Clips on DIN rail ok ok no no
Fixed on mounting plate no no ok ok
Fixation type side side bottom bottom
Mounting by customer ok ok ok ok
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (LxHxD) in mm L 100 100 140 184
Side mounted 4P H 165 165 107,5 133
D 95 95 85 110
Weight 3P 1,4 1,4 / /
4P 1,55 1,55 1,2 2,4
92
MCCBs references guide
Serie HDx HHx HNx
Pole Trip unit In A 18kA 25kA 40kA
16 HDA016Z HHA016Z HNA016Z
TM fix/fix 50 HDA050Z HHA050Z HNA050Z
3P
16-20-25 HDA025U HHA025U HNA025U
25-32-40 HDA040U HHA040U HNA040U
40-50-63 HDA063U HHA063U HNA063U
TM adj/fix 50-63-80 HDA080U HHA080U HNA080U
63-80-100 HDA100U HHA100U HNA100U
80-100-125 HDA125U HHA125U HNA125U
100-125-160 HDA160U HHA160U HNA160U
x160
TM fix/fix 50 HDA051Z HHA051Z HNA051Z
4P 100 HDA101Z HHA101Z HNA101Z
100% 125 HDA126Z HHA126Z HNA126Z
16-20-25 HDA026U HHA026U HNA026U
25-32-40 HDA041U HHA041U HNA041U
40-50-63 HDA064U HHA064U HNA064U
TM adj/fix 50-63-80 HDA081U HHA081U HNA081U
63-80-100 HDA101U HHA101U HNA101U
80-100-125 HDA126U HHA126U HNA126U
100-125-160 HDA161U HHA161U HNA161U
100 HHB100Z HNB100Z
125 HHB125Z HNB125Z
TM fix/fix 160 HHB160Z HNB160Z
200 HHB200Z HNB200Z
250 HHB250Z HNB250Z
3P
63-80-100 HNB100U
80-100-125 HNB125U
TM adj/adj 100-125-160 HNB160U
125-160-200 HNB200U
160-200-250 HNB250U
x250
100 HHB101Z HNB101Z
125 HHB126Z HNB126Z
TM fix/fix 160 HHB161Z HNB161Z
200 HHB201Z HNB201Z
4P 0% - 4P 250 HHB251Z HNB251Z
100% 63-80-100 HNB101U
80-100-125 HNB126U
TM adj/adj 100-125-160 HNB161U
125-160-200 HNB201U
160-200-250 HNB251U
93
MCCBs references guide
Serie HHx HNx HEx
Pole Trip unit In A 25kA 30kA - 50kA 65kA* - 70kA
12,5-16-20 HHG020H HNG020H
20-25-32 HHG032H HNG032H
32-40-50 HHG050H HEG050H*
40-50-63 HHG063H HNG063H HEG063H*
TM adj/adj 63-80-100 HHG100H HNG100H HEG100H*
80-100-125 HHG125H HNG125H HEG125H*
3P
100-125-160 HHG160H HNG160H HEG160H*
125-160-200 HHG200H HNG200H HEG200H*
160-200-250 HHG250H HNG250H HEG250H*
16-40 HNC040H HEC040H
LSI 50-125 HNC125H HEC125H
100-250 HNC250H HEC250H
h250
12,5-16-20 HNG021H
20-25-32 HNG033H
32-40-50 HNG051H HEG051H
40-50-63 HNG064H HEG064H
TM adj/adj 63-80-100 HNG101H HEG101H
80-100-125 HNG126H HEG126H
4P 0%
100-125-160 HNG161H HEG161H
125-160-200 HNG201H HEG201H
160-200-250 HNG251H HEG251H
16-40 HNC041H HEC041H
LSI 50-125 HNC126H HEC126H
100-250 HNC251H HEC251H
160-200-250 HHD250H HND250H
250-320-400 HHD400H HND400H
TM adj/adj
3P 160-400 HED400H
250-630 HND630H HED630H
h400 -
LSI 160-400 HND400H
h630
160-200-250 HND251H
4P 0% TM adj/adj
250-320-400 HND401H
4P 0% - 50% - 160-400 HND401H HED401H
LSI
100% 250-630 HND631H HED631H
630 HNE630H
3P LSI 800 HNE800H HEE800H
1000 HNE970H HEE970H
h1000
630 HNE631H
4P 0% - 50% -
LSI 800 HNE801H HEE801H
100%
1000 HNE971H HEE971H
1250 HNF980H HEF980H
3P LSI
1600 HNF990H HEF990H
h1600
4P 0% - 50% - 1250 HNF981H HEF981H
LSI
100% 1600 HNF991H HEF991H
94
Trip-free switches and add-on blocks for
references guide
Serie x160 x250 h630 h1000 h1600
Product Version Poles In A
125 HCA125Z
3 poles
160 HCA160Z
125 HCA126Z
4 poles
160 HCA161Z
3 poles 250 HCB250Z
4 poles 250 HCB251Z
400 HCD400H
3 poles
630 HCD630H
400 HCD401H
Trip-free switches 4 poles
630 HCD631H
800 HCE800H
3 poles
1000 HCE970H
800 HCE801H
4 poles
1000 HCE971H
1250 HCF980H
3 poles
1600 HCF990H
1250 HCF981H
4 poles
1600 HCF991H
125 fixed HBA127H
3 poles 125 adjustable HBA125H
160 adjustable HBA160H
Side mounted
125 fixed HBA128H
4 poles 125 adjustable HBA126H
Add-on blocks
160 adjustable HBA161H
160 adjustable HBB161H
250 adjustable HBB251H
Bottom mounted 4 poles
400 adjustable HBD401H
500 adjustable HBD631H
Switches and accessories for

references guide
Switches and accessories
Products Version pole In A / Ue V x160 x250 h250 h400-h630 h1000 h1600
24V DC HXA001H HXC001H HXF001H
Shunt trip release 3/4P
200-240V AC HXA004H HXC004H HXF004H
24V DC HXA011H HXC011H HXE011H
Undervoltage release 3/4P 200-240V AC HXA014H HXC014H HXE014H
380-450V AC HXA015H HXC015H HXE015H
Auxiliary contact 3/4P 1NO+1NC HXA021H HXC021H
Alarm contact 3/4P 1NO+1NC HXA024H HXC024H
Auxiliaries
Auxiliary contact - low level 3/4P 1NO+1NC HXA025H HXC025H
Alarm contact - low level 3/4P 1NO+1NC HXA026H HXC026H
Direct rotary handle HXA030H HXB030H HXC030H HXD030H HXE030H HXF030H
Extended rotary handle HXA031H HXB031H HXC031H HXD031H HXE031H HXF031H
Padlock HXA039H HXC039H HXD039H HXF039H
24-48V DC - HXB040H HXC040H HXD040H HXE040H HXF040H
Motor operator 3/4P
200-240V AC - HXB042H HXC042H HXD042H HXE042H HXF042H
HYD011H
(250-400A)
3P HYA014H HYB011H HYC011H - -
HYD014H
Extended spreader connection (630A)
HYD012H
Connections (250-400A)
4P HYA015H HYB012H - - -
HYD015H
(630A)
short HYA019H - - - -
Interphase barrier 3/4P
long HYB019H included included included included
DIN rail adaptor 3/4P HYA033H - - - - -
95
MCCBs, trip-free switches
x160
MCCBs
220/240V AC 380/415V AC
IEC 60 947-2 IEC 60 947-2
HDA Icu 25 kA 18 kA
Ics 25 kA 18 kA
HHA Icu 35 kA 25 kA
Ics 25 kA 20 kA
HNA Icu 85 kA 40 kA
Ics 30 kA 20 kA
HCA Icm - 2.8 kA
Icw - 2 kA - 1s
Magnetic and thermal settings
For DIN rail mounting, use HYA033H.
Magnetic adjustment fixed > 10 x In
In 15 - 50 A 63 - 80 A 100 - 125 A 160 A
Imag 600 A 1000 A 1500 A 1600 A
Thermal adjustment from 0,63 to 1 x In
96
x160
Tripping curve
MCCB x160
Cold start
Tripping time (s)
Hot start
(rated current)
Thermal constraint curve at 400V (Let-through energy) Current limiting curve at 400V(Let-through pick current)
MCCB x160 MCCB x160
97
x160
Dimensions
MCCB x160
A B C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
1P 24.8 25 111
2P 49.5 25 111
3P 74.5 25 111
4P 99.5 25 111
Terminal covers for extended straight connections
A B C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
1P 24.4 57.5 60.5
2P 49.5 57.5 60.5
3P 74.5 57.5 60.5

4P 99.5 57.5 60.5
Terminal cover for extended spreader connections
A
A B C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
3P 106.5 50 60.5
4P 141.5 50 60.5
98
x160
Connection
Connection with end lugs
Terminals fo copper conductors (standard)
min. 6 mm2 max. 70 mm2
4 6 Nm
Terminals fo aluminium / copper conductors (accessory)

HYA005H, HYA006H
5 10 Nm
Interphase barriers
L
(mm)
HYA019H 50
HYB019H 97
99
x160
Extended straight connections
62 30 37
128
80
140
287mm
122
210
6 Nm
66
45 45 45
Extended spreader connections
10
12.8
80
6 Nm 287 mm
122
80
58 65 58
181
100
x160
Auxiliaries
Auxiliaries for MCCBs and trip-free switches
Mounting combination for auxiliaries and releases
AX
Auxiliary contact
SH
Shunt trip
AL UV
Alarm contact Undervoltage release
DUVR
Delayed
undervoltage
release
101
Add-on block
x160
Characteristics
Reset button :
Signals add-on block tripping and must be acknowledged before
switching on the installation.
Test button for differential functioning :

Allows to check the electrical operating of the MCCB / Add-on block
association.
Mechanical test button :

Allows to check the mechanical operating of the MCCB / Add-on block
association.
LED signaling default current level in the installation:

25% (orange) and 50% (red) In; green light to signal correct operating.
When associated with MCCB, the add-on block provides an earth fault Remote tripping and advanced warning (50% In) signaling thanks to
protection and protects against electrical shocks by direct or indirect these contacts:
contacts.
The add-on blocks are protected against nuisance tripping caused by

transient voltages. Its able to detect sinusoidal alternating currents and
residual pulsating direct currents ( A type ). It also avoids miss
tripping (HI type - High Immunity).
Earth leakage current (In) and delay (t) setting Add-on block operating
0,
I n (A)
0,
I
)
A (In)
0,03 0,1 0,3 1 3 6
Inst. OK OK OK OK OK OK
0.06 no OK OK OK OK OK
S (t)
1 no OK OK OK OK OK
102
Add-on block
x160
Add-on block mounting
Exclusive drawer assembly system allows quick mounting and makes

MCCB and add-on block association a complete monoblock unit.
Reinforced insulation connexion (class II)
System avoids the omission of terminal tightening
Dimensions
3P 4P
A (mm) 100 100
B (mm) 174.5 199.5
103
x250
MCCBs
220/240V AC 380/415V AC
IEC 60 947-2 IEC 60 947-2
HHB Icu 35 kA 25 kA
Ics 25 kA 40 kA
HNB Icu 85 kA 40 kA
Ics 40 kA 20 kA
HCB Icm - 9 kA
Icw - 3 kA - 1s
Thermal adjustment from 0.63 to 1 x In
Magnetic adjustment from 6 to 13 x In (100 - 200A)

from 5 to 11 x In (250A)
100 - 200A 250A

Ir (x In) 0.63 - 0.8 - 1 x In
Ii (x In) 6 - 8 - 10 - 13 x In 5 - 7 - 9 - 11 x In
0 - 100%
x In/Ii
0 - 60%
104
x250
Tripping curve
MCCB x250
Cold start
Tripping time (s)
Hot start
(rated current)
Thermal constraint curve at 400V (Let-through energy) Current limiting curve at 400V (Let-through pick current)
MCCB x250 MCCB x250
105
x250
Dimensions
MCCB x250
A B C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
3P 105 54.5 64
4P 140 54.5 64
106
x250
Accessories
Terminal cover for extended spreader connections
A
A B C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
3P 147.5 54.5 64
4P 196 54.5 64
Terminal cover for rear connections
A B C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
3P 105 5 64
4P 140 5 64
Terminal covers for collar terminals
A B C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
3P 105 28.5 64
4P 140 28.5 64
107
x250
Connection
Extended straight and spreader connections
6 12 Nm 6 12 Nm
Rear connections
108
x250
Connection by collar
Terminals for aluminium / copper conductors (accessory)

HYB001H, HYB002H

8 35 mm2 to 50 mm2 = 25 Nm
60 mm2 to 185 mm2 = 25 Nm
6 12 Nm
Interphase barriers
109
x250
Accessories
Rotary handle
(3P/4P) 105
PUSH TO TRIP
Extended rotary handle
(3P/4P) 105
PUSH TO TRIP
Motor operator
90 90
HXB040H HXB042H
Operating voltage 24V DC 230-240V AC
Operating 24V DC 18/26 -

current / starting
155
165
current
peak value (A) 230-240V AC - 3.5/7
(ON) 0.1s
Operating time
(OFF) 0.1s
(s)
(RESET) 0.1s
Power supply required 300VA min.
Dielectric properties (1 min) 1000V AC 1500V AC
110
x250
Auxiliaries
AX
Auxiliary contact
SH
Shunt trip
AL UV
Alarm contact Undervoltage release
DUVR
Delayed
undervoltage
release
111
Add-on blocks
x250
Characteristics
Reset button :
Test button for differential operating :

association.

association.

contacts.

0,
I n (A)
0,
I
)
A (In)
0.03 0.1 0.3 1 3 6
S (t)
1 no OK OK OK OK OK
112
Add-on blocks
x250
ON ON
12 Nm
Dimensions
70
113
MCCBs h250
MCCBs
220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V Magnetic and thermal settings

AC AC AC
(kA) (kA) (kA)
Icu 35 25 -
HHG
Ics 27 19 -
Icu 35 50 -
HNG
Ics 65 25 -
Icu 85 65 -
HEG Thermal adjustment from 0.63 to 1 x In
Ics 85 36 -
Icu 85 50 7.5 Magnetic adjustment from 6 to 10 x In (250A)
HNC from 6 to 13 x In (160 and 200A)
Icu 85 25 7.5
from 6 to 12 x In (32, 63, 100 and 125A)
Icu 100 70 20
HEC
Icu 100 70 15
Electronic trip unit setting (LSI)
L - Long delay - protection against overloads: Ir and tr settings
S - Short delay - protection against short circuits: Isd and tsd

settings
I - Instantaneous - max. instantaneous threshold (< 10 ms) in case of

short circuit: 2,5 to 10 x Ir.
Use Characteristics (*)

3P 4P
Generator protection pos. 1 pos. 1, 4 and 7
Standard protection pos. 2 and 3 pos. 2, 5 and 8
Motor protection pos. 4 and 5 pos. 3, 6 and 9
In A
3P 4P
LSI
Long Time Delay Short Time Delay Inst Long Time Delay Short Time Delay Inst Protection
Ir (x In) tr (s) isd (xlr) tsd (s) li (xlr) Ir (x In) tr (s) isd (xlr) tsd (s) li (xlr) Neutral
0.4 OK OK
0.5 OK OK
0.63 OK OK
Ir (x In)
0.8 OK OK
0.9 OK OK
0.95 OK OK
1 OK OK
1 11s at 2 xlr 2.5 0.1 14 11 s at 2 xlr 2.5 0.1 14 no
2 21s at 2 xlr (max 21 s at 2 xlr 5 (max
12 x In) 10 x In)
3 5 7.5 s at 6 xlr 10 0.2
Characteristics
4 5 s at 6 xlr 10 11 s at 2 xlr 2.5 0.1 50%
5 7.5 s at 6 xlr 0,2 21 s at 2 xlr 10
6 7.5 s at 6 xlr 2.5 0.2
7 11 s at 6 xIr 2.5 0.1 100%
8 21 s at 2 xIr 5
9 21 s at 2 xIr 10 0.2
114
MCCBs h250
Tripping curve
MCCB h250 TM
115
MCCBs h250
MCCB h250 3P LSI

Tripping time (s)
LTD pick-up current Ir x In 0.4 0.5 0.63 0.8 0.9 0.95 1
Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5
Standard LTD Tr (s) 11 21 21 5 7.5
200 % x Ir 600 % x Ir
STD Isd x Ir 2.5 2.5 5 10 10
tsd (s) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2
INST li x Ir 14 (max 13 x In)
116
MCCBs h250
MCCB h250 4P LSI

Tripping time (s)
LTD pick-up current Ir x In 0.4 0.5 0.63 0.8 0.9 0.95 1
Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LTD Tr (s) 11 s 21 s 7.5 s 11 s 21 s 7.5 s 11 s 21 s 7.5 s
200 % x Ir 600% x Ir 200 % x Ir 600% x Ir 200 % x Ir 600% x Ir
STD Isd x Ir 2.5 5 10 2.5 5 10 2.5 5 10
(s) 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2
INST x Ir 14 (max 13 x In)
Neutral protection
no 0.5 1
117
MCCBs h250
Thermal constraint curve at 400V (Let-through energy)
MCCB h250
HNC... upto 50kA

HEC... upto 70kA
Current limiting curve at 400V (Let-through peak current)
MCCB h250
HNC... upto 50kA

HEC... upto 70kA
118
MCCBs h250
Dimensions
MCCBs
A
(mm)
3P 105
4P 140
Accessories

89 (LSI)
52 (TM)
A
(mm)
3P 105
4P 140
Terminal cover for rear connections (LSI only)
A
A
(mm)
3P 105
4P 140
119
MCCBs h250
Connection
6 12.7 Nm
22
6 12.7 Nm
Connection by collar
1 2
Terminals for copper conductors

HYC003H, HYC004H
6 19 Nm
120
MCCBs h250
Rear connections (LSI only)
15 56
10
10 91
11.8 Nm
Accessories
Direct rotary handle

193 (LSI)
158 (TM)
72
121
MCCBs h250
Extended rotary handle
90
Motor operator
205 (LSI)
90
170 (TM)
HXC040H HXC042H
Operating 24V DC 18/26 -

current / starting
current
peak value (A) 230-240V AC - 3.5/7
(ON) 0.1s
Operating time
(OFF) 0.1s
(s)
(RESET) 0.1s
122
MCCBs h250
Auxiliaries
AX
Auxiliary contact
SH
Shunt trip
UV
Undervol-
tage release
AL
DUVR
Alarm contact
Delayed
undervoltage
release
123
h400 - h630
MCCBs
220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V

AC AC AC
(kA) (kA) (kA)
h400/h630 Icu 85 50 20
HND Ics 85 50 15
h630 Icu 100 70 20

HED Ics 85 50 15
h630 Icm _ 9 _
HCD Icw _ 5 kA-0.3 s _
Settings
Thermal adjustment from 0.63 to 1 x In
Magnetic adjustment from 6 to 12 x In
124
h400 - h630
L - Long delay - protection against overloads: Ir and tr

settings
S - Short delay - protection against short circuits: Isd

and tsd settings
I - Instantaneous - max. instantaneous threshold (< 10

ms) in case of short circuit: 2.5 to 10 x Ir (250 - 400A)
and 2.5 to 8 x Ir (630A).
Neutral settings:
B
teristics Long delay current Ir setting
Other curve characteristics setting (tr, Isd, tsd)
Neutral protection against overloads setting
In A
250 A / 400 A 630 A
LSI Long Time Short Time Inst Long Time Short Time Inst
Delay Delay Delay Delay
Ir (x In) tr (s) isd (xlr) tsd (s) li (xlr) Ir (x In) tr (s) isd (xlr) tsd (s) li (xlr)
0.4
OK OK
0.5 OK OK
0.63 OK OK
Ir (x In)
0.8 OK OK
0.85 _ OK
0.9 OK OK
0.95 OK OK
1 OK OK
1
11s at 2 xlr 2.5 0.1 14
(max
11s at 2 xlr 2.5 0.1 14
(max
2 21s at 2 xlr 21s at 2 xlr
13 x 10 x
3 5 In) 5 In)
Characteristics
4 5 s at 6 xlr 10 5 s at 6 xlr 8
5 10 s at 6 xlr 0.2 10 s at 6 xlr 0.2
6 19 s at 6 xlr 16 s at 6 xlr
7 29 s at 6 xlr _ _ _
0%
50%
Neutral
100%
protection
(*) Characteristic 1 : use for generators protection.

Characteristic 2 to 4 - standard protection : options allow coordination optimisation with other products.
Characteristic 5 to 7 - motor protection: use positions according to motor starting characteristics.
125
h400 - h630
Tripping curve
MCCB h400 TM (250 and 400A)
126
h400 - h630
Tripping curve
MCCB h630 LSI (250A and 400A)

Tripping time (s)
MCCB h630 LSI (250A and 400A)
IR (A)
LTD Pick-up current IR xIn 0.4 0.5 0.63 0.8 0.9 0.95 1
Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Standard LTD tR (s) 11 21 21 5 10 19 29
200% x I R 600% x I R
STD Isd xIR 2.5 5 10
tsd (s) 0.1 0.2
INST Ii xIR 14 (max : 13 x In)
Optional N IN xIn 0 - 0.5 - 1
tN (s) tN=tR
127
h400 - h630
Tripping curve
MCCB h630 LSI (630A electronic)

Tripping time (s)
MCCB h630 LSI (630A electronic)
IR (A)
LTD Pick-up current IR xIn 0.4 0.5 0.63 0.8 0.85 0.9 0.95 1
Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Standard LTD tR (s) 11 21 21 5 10 16
200% x I R 600% x I R
STD Isd xIR 2.5 5 8
tsd (s) 0,1 0.2
Optional N IN xIn 0 - 0.5 - 1
tN (s) tN=tR
128
h400 - h630
MCCB h400 TM (250A and 400A)
HHD... upto 25kA

HND... upto 50kA
(kA)
MCCB h630 LSI (250A and 400A) MCCB h630 LSI (630A)
HND... upto 50kA HND... upto 50kA

HED... upto 70kA HED... upto 70kA
129
h400 - h630
MCCB h630 LSI (250A and 400A) MCCB h630 LSI (630A)
MCCB h400 TM
HHD... upto 25kA HND... upto 50kA

HND... upto 50kA HED... upto 70kA
HED... upto 70kA
130
h400 - h630
Dimensions
MCCBs
A B C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
3P 140 45 214
4P 185 45 214
Terminal covers for extended straight connections Terminal covers for extended spreader connections
A A
A B C D A B C
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
3P 140 85 97 94.5 3P 180 110 97
4P 185 85 97 94.5 4P 240 114 98
Terminal covers for rear connections and collar terminal
A B B C D
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
3P 140 3 4.5 97 93
4P 185 3 4.5 97 93
131
h400 - h630
Connection
Connection for aluminium / copper conductors

(h400 TM, h630 LSI)
HYD005 (3P) - HYD006H (4P)
max. 1x240 mm2
10 25 Nm
HYD007 (3P) - HYD008H (4P)
max. 2x240 mm2
10 25 Nm
8 22.5 Nm
Rear connections
132
h400 - h630
1 2
8 22.5 Nm
Accessories
140 140
x
Motor operator
140 HXD040H HXD042H

Operating voltage 24-48V DC 100-240V AC
-/9.2 (ON)
24V DC 4.3/9.8 (OFF, -
RESET)
-/3,8 (ON)
Operating 48V DC 2.0/5.2 (OFF, -
current/starting RESET)
current -/1.9 (ON)
peak value (A) 100-110V AC - 1.3/3.8 (OFF,
RESET)
-/3.3 (ON)
200-240V AC - 0.9/3.8 (OFF,
RESET)
(ON) 0.1s
Operating time
(OFF) 1.5 s
(s)
(RESET) 1.5 s
133
h400 - h630
Auxiliaries
Auxiliaries for MCCBs and free tripping switches
SH
AX Shunt trip
Auxiliary contact
UV
AL Undervol-
Alarm contact tage release
DUVR
Delayed
undervoltage
release
134
Add-on block
h630
Characteristics
Reset button :
Test button for differential functioning :

association.

association.

contacts.

0,
I n (A)
0,
I
)
A (In)
0.03 0.1 0.3 1 3 6
S (t)
1 no OK OK OK OK OK
135
Add-on block
h630

22.5 Nm
Association / Compatibility Dimensions
250 - 400A 630A x 0.8

HBD631H
HBD401H
500A
400A
(Ie: 630A x 0.8)
136
h1000
MCCBs
220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V

AC AC AC
(kA) (kA) (kA)
Icu 85 (630-800A), 75 (1000A) 50 20

HNE
Ics 85 (630-800A), 75 (1000A) 50 20
Icu 100 70 20
HEE
Ics 100 (630-800A), 75 (1000A) 50 20
Icm _ 17 _
HCE
Icw _ 10 kA-0.3 s _
Electronic trip unit settings (LSI)
0 5
S - Short delay - protection against short circuits: Isd and tsd

settings
I - Instantaneous - max. instantaneous threshold (< 10 ms) in case of

short circuit: 2,5 to 10 x Ir (630-800A) and 2,5 to 8 x Ir (1000A).
In A
630-800 A 1000 A
LSI Long Time Short Time Inst Long Time Short Time Inst
Delay Delay Delay Delay
Ir (x In) tr (s) isd (xlr) tsd (s) li (xlr) Ir (x In) tr (s) isd (xlr) tsd (s) li (xlr)
0.4 OK OK
0.5 OK OK

Ir (x In) 0.63 OK OK
0.8 OK OK
0.9 OK OK
0.95 OK OK
1 OK OK
1 11s at 2 xlr 2.5 0.1 14 11s at 2 xlr 2.5 0.1 14
(max (max
2 21s at 2 xlr 21s at 2 xlr
12 x 10 x
Characteristics* 3 5 In) 5 In)
4 5 s at 6 xlr 10 5 s at 6 xlr 8
5 10 s at 6 xlr 0.2 10 s at 6 xlr 0.2
6 19 s at 6 xlr 16 s at 6 xlr
7 29 s at 6 xlr _ _ _
0%
Neutral 50%
protection 100%

137
h1000
Tripping curve
MCCB h1000 LSI (630-800A)
MCCBs 630-800A electronic
IR (A)
Standard LTD tR (s) 11 21 21 5 10 19 29
200% x I R 600% x I R
tsd (s) 0.1 0.2
Optional NP IN xIR 0.5 or 1 or NON (IN x 105% NT, IN x 120% T)
tN (s) IN=tR
138
h1000
Tripping curve
MCCB h1000 LSI (1000A)
MCCBs 1000A electronic
IR (A)
Characteristics No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Standard LTD tR (s) 11 21 21 5 10 16
200% x I R 600% x I R
STD Isd xIR 2.5 5 8
tsd (s) 0.1 0.2
Optional NP IN xIn 0.8
tN (s) IN=tR
139
h1000
MCCB h1000
MCCB h1000
140
h1000
Dimensions
MCCBs
A B
(mm) (mm)
3P 210 180
4P 280 250
141
h1000
Terminal covers for rear connections
Connection
Extended straight connections
1 2
19 65.7 Nm
40
Direct cable connection on terminal

Copper with conductor max. width: 50 mm
142
h1000
1 2
Rear connections
630-800A:
vertical or horizontal
position.
1000A:
vertical only.
143
h1000
Connection for aluminium / copper conductors (h1000)
HYE007 (3P) - HYE008H (4P)
max. 4x240 mm2
10 25 Nm
Accessories
115
Motor operator
115 HXE040H HXE042H

Operating voltage 24-48V DC 100-240V AC
-/12 (ON)
24V DC 6/11.5 (OFF, -
RESET)
-/7 (ON)
current/starting RESET)
current -/2.2 (ON)
RESET)
-/2.2 (ON)
200-240V AC - 1.3/3.5 (OFF,
RESET)
(ON) 0.1s
Operating time
(OFF) 1.5 s
(s)
(RESET) 1.5 s
144
h1000
Auxiliaries
SH
AX Shunt trip
Auxiliary contact
UV
AL Undervoltage
Alarm contact release
DUVR
Delayed
undervoltage
release
145
h1600
MCCBs
220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V

AC AC AC
(kA) (kA) (kA)
Icu 100 50 25
HNF
Ics 75 50 25
Icu 100 70 45
HEF
Ics 75 50 34
Icm 45 kA
HCF
Icw 20 kA-0.3 s
Electronic trip unit settings (LSI)
S - Short delay - protection against short circuits: Isd and tsd settings
I - Instantaneous - max. instantaneous threshold (< 10 ms) in case of short

circuit: 2,5 to 10 x Ir.
In A
1250 - 1600 A
LSI Long Time Short Time Delay Inst
Delay
Ir (x In) tr (s) isd (xlr) tsd (s) li (xlr)
0.4 OK
0.5 OK

Ir (x In) 0.63 OK
0.8 OK
0.9 OK
0.95 OK
1 OK
1 11s at 2 xlr 2.5 0.1 14 (max 12 x

In)
2 21s at 2 xlr

Characteristics* 3 5
4 5 s at 6 xlr 10
5 10 s at 6 xlr 0.2
6 19 s at 6 xlr
7 29 s at 6 xlr
Ir(A) Im N
LSI 0.4 - 1 2.5 - 0% 0%
Neutral 50%
In 10 Ir 50%
protection 100%
100 %

146
h1600
Tripping curve
MCCB h1600 LSI
MCCBs 1250A and 1600A electronic
IR (A)
Standard LTD tR (s) 11 21 21 5 10 19 29
200% x I R 600% x I R
tsd (s) 0.1 0.2

Optional NP IN xIR 0,5 or 1 or NON (IN x 105% NT, IN x 120% T)
tN (s) IN=tR
147
h1600
MCCB h1600
HNF... upto 50kA

HEF... upto 70kA
MCCB h1600
148
h1600
Dimensions
MCCBs
A B
(mm) (mm)
3P 210 185
4P 280 255
Connection
1 2
19 65.7 Nm
149
h1600
Accessories
115
Motor operator
HXF040H HXF042H
-/4.5 (ON)
current / starting RESET)
current -/1.2 (ON)
RESET)
(ON) 0,06s
Operating time
(OFF) 3s
(s)
(RESET) 3s
150
h1600
Auxiliaries
AX SH
Auxiliary contact Shunt trip
AL UV
Alarm contact Undervol-
tage release
DUVR
Delayed
undervoltage
release
151
Manual
Changeover Switches
63A to 1600A

Double break per pole facilitaling suitability for isolation as per Complies with IEC 60947-3
IEC 60947-3
Rating: 63A - 1600A
Safe isolation at 0 position for maintenance
Suitable for AC23
Compact dimension to save panel space
Flexibility to mount accessories on site Lockable position: 0
Voltage free stable position contact (I, 0, II)
Line load reversibility
Silver plated contact for long life

Expert
tips
Quick switching Compact dimension
1 operation
by spring action with
sweeping silver contacts 3 with back to back terminals
3 stable position Site mountable wide
2 changeover
with padlocking at zero position
for maintainance on direct &
extended handle
4 range of accessories based on
application needs
Manual changeover switches
63 to 1600 A
Manual changeover For safety breaking. Comply with NF EN 60 947-3.
switches, 4P,
63 to 1600A Connection with terminals.
lockable on position: I, O or II
Allows manual switch,
changeover switch or on load Mounting on perforated plate
power circuit permutation. or crossbars.
Description Characteristics In/A Catalogue No.
Manual changeover 4P 63A HI403I

switches 3 positions: I-0-II
100A HI405I
125A HI451I
160A HI452I
250A HI454I
HI451I
400A HI456I
630A HI458I
800A HI460I
1250A HI462I
1600A HI464I
External handle
for switches 250 to 400A HZI002I
3 positions: 0-I-II
locked with 3 padlocks for switches 800 to 1600A HZI003I
Shaft extension for switches 125 to 630A, 200mm HZC101I

for switches 125 to 630A, 320mm HZC102I
for switches 125 to 160A, 200mm HZC105I
HZC101I for switches 125 to 160A, 200mm HZC106I
Terminal shroud for switches 125 to 160A HZC202I
top and bottom for switches 200 to 400A HZC204I

2 pieces / packaging for switches 400 to 630A HZC206I
Auxiliaries contacts for switches 125 to 1600A

1NO + 1NC HZ160I
Insulated busbars for switches 100 to 125A HZ156RI
Terminal shield for HI460 HZ163MI
top bottom for HI462 and HI464 HZ164MI

HZC204I
154
63 to 1600A
Technical characteristics
HI403I HI405I HI451I HI452I HI453I HI454I HI455I HI456I HI458I HI460I HI461I HI462I HI464I
In 63 A 100 A 125 A 160 A 200A 250 A 315A 400 A 630 A 800 A 1000A 1250 A 1600 A
insulation voltage Ui (V) 750 750 800 800 800 800 1000 800 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
impulse withstand voltage

Uimp (kV) 6 6 8 8 8 12 12 8 12 12 12 12 12
Ie AC 22A / 22B, 400 V (A) 63 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Ie AC 23A / 23B, 400 V (A) 63 100 125 160 200 250 315 250 500 800 1000 1250 1600
operational power (kW)

AC 23A 400 V 30 30 63 80 80 132 132 220 280 450 710 710 710
short circuit current with

gG DIN fuses (kA) 80 80 100 100 50 50 50 18 70 50 100 100 100
associated fuse rated (A) 63 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 800 1000 1250 2 x 800
rated short circuit making

capacity Icm (kA peak) 15 15 12 12 12 17 22 15,3 30 48 75 75 86
rated short time withstand

current Icw (kA/1s) 5 5 7 7 7 9 9 9 13 26 35 50 50
mechanical endurance
(cycles) 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 8000 5000 3000 10000 4000 4000
connection for lugs (mm) 16 25 50 95 120 150 240 240 2 x 300 2 x 300 4 x 185 4 x 185 6 x 185
Dimensions diagram (in mm)
63A - 100A
155
63 to 1600A
125A - 630A
A
J
H
B
G
125
140
E
K C 18 45
D min.
800A - 1600A
38 F 88
J
11
460
220
B
B
II I 240
210
O E
K K K 52 C 18 61
D min.
Dimensions (in mm)
Rating A B C D E F G H J K L
HI451I 125A 251 135 218 208 148 186 101 235 20 36 -
HI452I 160A 251 135 218 208 148 186 101 235 20 36 -
HI453I 200A 251 160 218 208 148 246 116 280 20 50 -
HI454I 250A 312 160 218 208 148 246 116 280 25 50 -
HI455I 315A 312 170 218 208 148 246 116 280 35 50 -
HI456I 400A 312 170 218 208 148 246 116 280 35 50 -
HI458I 630A 379 260 295 285 225 306 176 400 45 65 -
HI460I 800A 460 320 374 390 302 335 220 460 50 80 609
HI461I 1000A 466 321 375 425 298 336 250 459 50 80 -
HI462I 1250A 592 330 374 390 302 467 220 460 60 120 741
HI464I 1600A 592 360 374 390 302 467 220 460 90 120 741
156
63 to 1600A
Fixing of door interlock mechanism
Rating: 63A - 100A
&KDQJHRYHUVZLWFK &+0[VFUHZ
6WDUZDVKHU0
6LQJOHKDQGOH
6FUHZWREHUHPRYHG
DQGXVHKHUH
3RVLWLRQODEHO
&6.VFUHZ0[
,QWHUORFNDVV\
(QFORVXUHFRYHU
,QWHUORFNEUDFNHW
,QWHUORFNEUDFNHW
ZLWKRXWVFUHZV
WREHXVHGLQ 8VH&6.0[VFUHZ
25,*,1$/326,7,21
6WDUZDVKHU0
1\ORQVSLQGOH+(;64$
6KDIW
M
6ZLWFK
Mounting
Rating: 125A - 630A

Direct
Bridging rotary handle
bar
157
Manual changeover switch enclosures
63 to 1600A
Enclosure for Manual Changeover Switch
# Note: Enclosures are supplied, assembled together with Manual Changeover Switch
Diagram:
Dimensions (in mm)
Rating A B C KOUT
VYE63M 63A 250 202 205 32
VYE100M 100A 250 202 205 32
VYE125M 125A 355 350 275 32
VYE160M 160A 355 350 275 32
VYE250M 250A 420 410 275 50
VYE400M 400A 420 410 275 50
VYE630M 630A 520 580 353 50
VYE800M 800A 610 680 538 50
VYE1000M 1000A 800 680 538 50
VYE1250M 1250A 800 680 538 50
VYE1600M 1600A 800 680 538 50
158
Smart solution for
voltage protection
Over & low voltage release - MZ215

MZ215 answers the need for voltage problems due to external factors like unstable
Electricity board supply, loss of neutral, etc. Voltage fluctuations cause damage to
electronic equipments like TV, Refrigerator, Computer, etc.
MZ215 is the ideal solution to protect equipments from over and low voltage
problems. Unique modular design and simple wiring makes it convenient to mount
in standard enclosures with Hager MCBs, RCCBs or RCBOs.
MZ215 continuously monitors voltage between Phase and Neutral to disconnect

when voltage is high or low.
www.hager.co.in
Automatic
Transfer Switches
controller
Advantages for you : Features :

Easy parameter display using remote interface Voltage monitoring
Controller with On / Off load testing facility Frequency monitoring

Controller with Genset Start / Stop option
Phase sequence monitoring
Plugin terminals for convenient wiring
No auxiliary supply required
LED indication of source and changeover status
Security access codes for programming and testing
Expert
tips
Controller with LCD for LED Indication
1 parameter display
for easy monitoring and flexibility
to modify parameters 4 of source availability and
changeover position
Genset Start / Stop Over / Under voltage,
2 function
enables convenient control
of Genset during power failure 5 Over / Under frequency
Phase sequence monitoring
and adjustable delay timers
RJ45 port ON-OFF testing
3 allows easy communication

with Remote Interface
6 facility for the system
Automatic
Transfer Switches
125A to 1600A

Manual override function for emergency operations Complies with IEC 60947-6-A
Flexibility to have line load reversibility Rating: 125A - 1600A

Voltage free stable position contact (I, 0, II)
Suitable for AC33B
Position indicator
Lockable on position: O
LED indicator of power ON and manual override
Padlocking facility at zero position in manual mode for

maintainance
Emergency stop command option available

Expert
tips
Padlocking facility Position indicator
1 in zero position and manual

mode
4
Line load Power ON and Manual
2 reversibility
5 override indicator
Emergency manual Plug-in terminals
3 operation by removable
handle
6
Automatic transfer switches
125 to 1600 A
Automatic changeover For safety breaking. Comply with NF EN 60 947-3.
switches, 4P,
125 to 1600A Connection with terminals.
lockable on position: O
Allows automatic switch,
changeover switch or on load Mounting on perforated plate
power circuit permutation. or crossbars.
Description Characteristics In/A Catalogue No.
Automatic changeover 4P 125A HIB412I

switches Positions: O
160A HIB416I
250A HIB425I
400A HIB440I
HIB412I
630A HIB463I
800A HIB480I
1000A HIB490I
1250A HIB491I
1600A HIB492I
Automatic transfer relays*

controller HZI811I
Double power supply for

Motorized Changeover HZI812I
Terminal shroud for switches 125 to 160A HZC202I
top and bottom for switches 200 to 400A HZC204I

HZI811I 2 pieces / packaging for switches 400 to 630A HZC206I
Terminal covers for switches 125 to 160A HZI201I

for switches 630A HZI203I
for switches 1600A HZI205I
Remotes changeover status display HZI910I
changeover status and

control display HZI911I
* Controller is neccessary for Automatic changeover to function
HZI910I
164
125 to 1600A
HIB412I HIB416I HIB420I HIB425I HIB440I HIB463I HIB480I HIB490I HIB491I HIB492I
rated current In 125 A 160 A 200A 250 A 400 A 630 A 800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A
rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
rated impulse withstand

voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Ie AC 31B, 415 V (A) 125 160 200 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Ie AC 32B, 415 V (A) - - - 200 400 500 800 1000 1250 1600
Ie AC 33B, 415 V (A) - - - 200 200 400 800 1000 1250 1000
short circuit current

with gG DIN fuses (kA) 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100
associated fuse rated (A) 125 160 200 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 2 x 800
rated peak making

capacity (kA peak) 20 20 20 30 30 45 55 55 80 110
rated short time

withstand current Icw (kA/1s) 7 7 7 8 8 10 26 35 50 50
mechanical endurance (cycles) 10000 10000 10000 8000 8000 5000 4000 4000 4000 3000
lugs connection (mm) MAX 50 95 120 150 240 2 x 300 2 x 300 4 x 185 4 x 185 6 x 185
165
125 to 1600A
HIB412I - HIB463I
Door cut-out for front panel Dimensions (in mm)
125A 160A 200A 250A 400A 630A
4P
1
J1 34 34 34 35 34 34
M 150 150 150 210 210 270
T 36 36 36 50 50 65
C 244 244 244 244 244 320
U 20 20 20 25 35 45
W 9 9 9 11 11 13
CA 10 10 10 15 15 20
HIB480I - HIB492I
M 51,5
=
250
280
=
C 21
T
Door cut-out for front panel Dimensions (in mm)

138 800A 1000A 1250A 1600A
20
4P
M 335 335 335 467
T 80 80 80 120
C 391 391 391 523

150
50.5
166
Automatic Changeover with Current Limitier
Description Features Technical Data
Automatic performs the Indicates the LED for Mains Standard: IEC 60947 - 3, IEC
changeover operation to back ON, Genset ON and Genset 60947 - 6
up Genset supply on Main Overload. Type: SPN Modular
supply failure. Different LED colors for clear Voltage: 150VAC to 300VAC
Switches from back up Genset differentiation between Mains Rating: 30A
supply to Mains when the main functions. Genset Rating: 1.5 to 20A
supply resumes. Blinking LED for overload and Utilization category: AC21A
Performs the current limiting permanent LED for overload (IEC 60947-3), AC 31B (IEC
function with 5 Switch OFF-ON Trip. 60947-6)
cycles in case the load current Modular design Short Circuit Withstand: 3kA
exceeds back up supply rat- Convenient and simple wiring Electrical Endurance: 6000
ing. terminal design. Operations
Auto reset if Main supply Terminal Size: Flexible:
resumes on genset trip. 10sqmm, Rigid: 16sqmm
RoHS compliant, CE Marking Terminals: IP 2X finger touch
proof
Description Characteristics Modules Catalogue No.
ACCL SPN Version Mains 30A, Genset 1.5A 4 EKS301B
Mains 30A, Genset 2.5A 4 EKS302B
Mains 30A, Genset 3A 4 EKS303B

EKS301B
Mains 30A, Genset 30A* 4 EKS330B
* without Current Limiter
167
Automatic Changeover and Current Limiter
Technical characteristics Dimensions
Mains Rating Genset Rating Cat. Reference
30 A 1.5 A EKS301B
30 A 2.5 A EKS302B
30 A 3A EKS303B
30 A 4A EKS304B
30 A 5A EKS305B
30 A 6A EKS306B
30 A 9A EKS309B
30 A 12 A EKS312B
30 A 15 A EKS315B
30 A 20 A EKS320B
30 A 30 A EKS330B
Recommended MCB Ratings Recommended Load Connections
ACCL Ratings MCB Ratings Connect NECESSARY LOADS like,

1. Tube Lights / CFLs,
Mains Genset On Mains Side On Genset Side
2. Television,
30 A 1.5 A 32 A 2A 3. Mixer, Juicer etc.
30 A 2.5 A 32 A 3A
30 A 3A 32 A 3A
30 A 4A 32 A 4A
30 A 5A 32 A 6A
30 A 6A 32 A 6A Connect HEAVY LOADS

30 A 9A 32 A 10 A Directly on MAINS like,
1. Air Conditioners,
30 A 12 A 32 A 16 A 2. Geysers,
30 A 15 A 32 A 16 A 3. Motors.
30 A 20 A 32 A 20 A
30 A 30 A 32 A 30A
MCB MCB
Installation
Mains Genset
LOAD
MAINS
SUPPLY
GENSET
SUPPLY
168
Switch disconnectors
Description Features & benefits In : 40, 63A
For use as isolators in Wide range 35sq mm rigid conductor
electrical circuits Finger proof (IP2X) terminal 25sq mm flexible conductor
Provides isolation to down- CE & RoHS compliant, Green
stream circuits product In : 100A
35sq mm rigid conductor
Technical data Connection 35sq mm flexible conductor
Conforms to IS/IEC 60947 - 3 In : 25, 32A
Ratings - 25A - 125A 16sq mm rigid conductor In : 125A
No. of poles - 2P, 3P & 4P 10sq mm flexible conductor 50sq mm rigid conductor
Utilization category - AC 22 35sq mm flexible conductor
Suitable for isolation as per
IEC 60947
Description Rating In Modules Catalogue No.
Double pole 25A 1 SBR225N

32A 1 SBR232N
40A 2 SBR240N
63A 2 SBR263N
100A 2 SBR290N
125A 2 SBR299N
Triple pole 32A 2 SBR332N

SBR432N 40A 3 SBR340N
63A 3 SBR363N
100A 3 SBR390N
125A 4 SBR399N
Four pole 32A 2 SBR432N

40A 4 SBR440N
63A 4 SBR463N
100A 4 SBR490N
125A 4 SBR499N
SBR490N
2 way centre-off changeover switches

Description Technical data Utilization category - AC 22A
To switch from one source to Conforms to IEC 60947-1 Mounting on 35mm DIN
another source of supply Ratings - 25A & 40A channel
Compact DIN channel mounted No. of poles - 2P & 4P
device 3 positions (I - O - II) with
centre off
Description Rating In Modules Catalogue No.
Double pole 25A 2 SFT225N

40A 2 SFT240N
40A 4 SFT440N
SFT240N
169
Miniature
Circuit Breakers
excellence in safety & performance

Positive Contact Isolation ensuring complete protection to user Conforms to IEC 60898-1:2002, IS/IEC 60898-1:2002
Ergonomically designed toggle for comfort switching Ratings - 0.5 to 63 A
Insulated safety shutter for finger touch proof terminal
No. of poles - 1P, 2P, 3P & 4P
Laser marking to ensure permanent information
Tripping curves - B, C & D
Front product labeling for displaying of load information
Energy Limiting Class 3 to ensure low let through energy to limit Breaking capacity
thermal & mechanical stress on cables 10kA (as per IEC 60898-1)
Direct mounting of wide range of accessories like OV, UV, ST, Suitable for isolation as per IEC 60947
AX, AL, OV + UV release
170
Expert
tips
Front product labeling Insulated safety shutter
1 for displaying of load information
4 for finger touch proof terminal
Ergonomically designed Direct mounting
2 toggle
for comfort switching
5 of wide range of accessories
like OV, UV, ST, AX, AL, OV +
UV release
Laser marking Energy Limiting Class 3
3 to ensure permanent information
6 to ensure low let through energy

to limit thermal & mechanical
stress on cables
171
Miniature circuit breakers 10kA
type NBN, NCN, NDN
Description Ratings - 0.5 to 63 A Ergonomined toggle for com- Direct mounting of wide range
Protects circuits against over- No. of poles - 1P, 2P, 3P & 4P fort switching of accessories like OV, UV, ST,
load & short circuit faults Tripping curves - B, C & D Insulated safety shutter for fin- AX, AL, OV + UV release
Provides isolation to down- Breaking capacity ger touch proof terminal
stream circuits 10kA (as per IEC 60898-1) Laser marking to ensure per- Connection
Suitable for isolation as per manent information 25sq mm rigid cables
Technical data IEC 60947 Front product labeling for dis- 16sq mm flexible cables
Conforms to playing of load information
IEC 60898-1:2002 Features & benefits Energy Limiting Class 3 to
IS/IEC 60898-1:2002 Positive Contact Isolation ensure low let through energy
ISI marking ensuring complete protection to limit thermal & mechanical
CE marking to user stress on cables
Description Modules In (Amp) B Curve C Curve D Curve
1P 1 0.5 NCN100N NDN100N

1 1 NCN101N NDN101N
1 2 NCN102N NDN102N
1 3 NCN103N NDN103N
1 4 NCN104N NDN104N
1 6 NBN106N NCN106N NDN106N
NCN110N 1 50 NBN150N NCN150N NDN150N
2P 2 0.5 NCN200N NDN200N

2 1 NCN201N NDN201N
2 2 NCN202N NDN202N
2 3 NCN203N NDN203N
2 4 NCN204N NDN204N
3P 3 0.5 NCN300N NDN300N

3 1 NCN301N NDN301N
3 2 NCN302N NDN302N
3 3 NCN303N NDN303N
3 4 NCN304N NDN304N
4P 4 0.5 NCN400N NDN400N

4 1 NCN401N NDN401N
4 2 NCN402N NDN402N
4 3 NCN403N NDN403N
4 4 NCN404N NDN404N
172
Miniature circuit breakers 80-125A, 10kA
type HLF
Description Breaking capacity - 10kA (as RoHS compliant, Green
Protects circuits against over- per IEC 60947) product
load & short circuit faults Suitable for isolation as per Wide range of accessories are
Provides isolation to down- IEC 60947 available
stream circuits
Features & benefits: Connection capacity
Technical data MCBs handle can be locked 35 sq mm flexible wire
Conforms to IEC 60947 in "off" position (50 sq mm possible with
CE marking Large terminal capacity - upto some cable end-caps)
Ratings 80A,100A &125A 70 sq mm 70 sq mm rigid wire
No. of poles - 1P, 2P, 3P & 4P Steel reinforcement plate to
Tripping curve - C improve terminal strength IP2X terminals
Serrations on jaws to provide
better grip on cables
Line-load reversible
Description In (Amp) Modules Catalogue No.
1P 80 1.5 HLF180S
100 1.5 HLF190S
125 1.5 HLF199S
HLF199S
2P 80 3 HLF280S
100 3 HLF290S
125 3 HLF299S
HLF299S
3P 80 4.5 HLF380S
100 4.5 HLF390S
125 4.5 HLF399S
HLF399S
4P 80 6 HLF480S
100 6 HLF490S
125 6 HLF499S
HLF499S
173
Miniature circuit breakers 6kA SP&N
type ML
Description Features & benefits Connection
Protect circuits against over- Compact design, SPN MCB in 16sq mm rigid cables
load & short circuit faults one mod (17.5mm) only 10sq mm flexible cables
Provides isolation to down- Switched neutral provides Prong type busbar.
stream circuits complete isolation to down-
stream circuits IP2X terminals
Technical data Line-load reversible
Conforms to IEC 60898-1 RoHS compliant, Green
CE marking product
Ratings 6A to 40 A Wide range of accessories are
No. of poles - 1 Pole + available
switched neutral in one module
Tripping curve - C
Description Modules In (Amp) Catalogue No.
SP & N MCB 1 6 ML506J
1 10 ML510J
1 16 ML516J
1 20 ML520J
1 25 ML525J
1 32 ML532J
1 40 ML540J
ML516J
174
Miniature circuit breakers
Characteristics ML NBN NCN NDN HLF
Poles SP+N SP DP TP FP SP DP TP FP SP DP TP FP SP DP TP FP
Rated operational 230 SP 240/415 SP 240/415 SP 240/415 SP 240/415
voltage Ue(V) DP, TP, FP 415 DP, TP, FP 415 DP, TP, FP 415 DP, TP, FP 415
Nominal Current 6-40A 6-63A 0.5-63A 0.5-63A 80-100-125A
Breaking capacity 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
to IEC 60 898
Breaking capacity - - - - 10kA
to IEC 60 947-2
Rated insulation 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V
voltage Ui(V)
Rated impulse 4000V 4000V 4000V 4000V 6000V
voltage Uimp (kV)
Electrical endurance
0.5 to 32A 10000 20000 20000 20000
40 to 63A 10000 10000 10000
80 to 125A 4000
Power loss
The power loss of MCB's is closely controlled by the standards and is
calculated on the basis of the voltage drop across the main terminals
measured at rated current. The power loss of Hager circuit breakers is
very much lower than that required by the Standard, so in conse-
quences run cooler and are less affected when mounted together.
The table below gives the watts loss per pole at rated current
MCB rated 0.5 1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

current (A)
Watts loss 1.3 1.5 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.7 1.8 2.6 2.8 3.3 3.9 4.3 4.8 5.2 5 5.5 8
per pole (W)
For use with DC No. of poles 1 pole 2 poles in series

Because of their quick make and break design and excellent arc Range Max Breaking capacity Max Breaking capacity
quenching capabilities Hager circuit breakers are suitable for DC voltage L/R=15ms voltage L/R=15ms
applications.
NBN, NCN 60V 10kA 125V 10kA
The following parameters must be considered. NDN 60V 15kA 125V 15kA
1. system voltage: HLF 60V 15kA 125V 15kA
Determined by the number of poles connected in series
2. short-circuit current: NBN, NCN, NDN
3. tripping characteristics: Characteristic curve B C D
- the thermal trip remains unchanged Magnetic trip 50Hz dc 50Hz dc 50Hz dc
- the magnetic trip will become less sensitive requiring Irm1 3 In 4.5 In 5 In 7.5 In 10 In 15 In
derating by 2 the ac value. Irm2 5 In 7.5 In 10 In 15 In 20 In 30 In
HLF (IEC 60-898)

Characteristic curve C
Magnetic trip 50Hz dc
Irm1 5 In 7.1 In
Irm2 10 In 14.1 In
175
Latest national & international standards covering Low Voltage Circuit and for desk top co-ordination studies, both lower and upper limits
Breakers provide the user with a better assurance of quality and per- have to be taken into account.
formance by taking into account the actual operating conditions of the
breaker. New definitions and symbols have been introduced which Energy limiting
should be committed to memory. Some of those most frequently used Energy is measured in Joules. *James Prescott Joule proved that ther-
are: mal energy was produced when an electric current flowed through a
Ue : rated service voltage resistance for a certain time, giving us the formula :-
Ui : rated insulation voltage (>Uemax) Joules = l2 x R x t or because we know that watts = l2R
Uimp : rated impulse withstand Joules = watts x seconds
lcm : rated short circuit making capacity Therefore we can say that :
lcn : rated short circuit capacity One Joule = one watt second
lcs : rated service short circuit breaking capacity or energy = watts x seconds = l2R t
lcu : rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity
lDn : rated residual operating current (often called residual If the resistance (R) remains constant or is very small compared with
sensitivity) the current (I) as in the case of short-circuit current, then energy
ln : rated current = maximum value of current used for the becomes proportional to l2t. Which is why the energy let-through of a
temperature rise test. protective device is expressed in ampere squared seconds and
Dt : trip delay of residual current devices referred to as l2t.
In addition, IEC 60898 sets out to provide a greater degree of safety to l2t (Joule Integral) is the integral of the square of the current over a
the uninstructed users of circuit breakers. It is interesting to note that given time interval (t0, t1)
the description "miniature circuit breaker" or MCB is not used at all in
the standard, but no doubt both manufacturers and users will contin- The l2t characteristic of a circuit breaker is shown as a curve giving the
ue to call circuit breakers complying with IEC 60898 miniature circuit maximum values of the prospective current as a function of time.
breakers or MCBs for some time to come.
Manufacturers are required by the Standard to produce the l2t charac-
The scope of this standard is limited to ac air break circuit breakers for teristic of their circuit breakers.
operation at 50Hz or 60Hz, having a rated current not exceeding 125A
and a rated short-circuit capacity not exceeding 25kA. The energy limiting characteristics of modern MCBs greatly reduce the
damage that might otherwise be caused by short-circuits. They pro-
A rated service short-circuit breaking capacity lcs is also included tect the cable insulation and reduce the risk of fire and other damage.
which is equal to the rated short-circuit capacity lcn for short-circuit Knowledge of the energy limiting characteristic of a circuit breaker also
capacity values up to and including 6kA, and 50% of lcn above 6kA helps the circuit designer calculate discrimination with other protective
with a minimum value of 7.5kA. as the circuit-breakers covered by this devices in the same circuit.
standard are intended for household and similar use, lcs is of aca-
demic interest only. The rated short-circuit capacity of a MCB (lcn) is Because of the importance energy limiting characteristic the
the alternating component of the prospective current expressed by its Standards for circuit breakers for household and similar installations
r.m.s. value, which the MCB is designed to make, carry, for its open- suggests three energy limiting classes based on the permissible l2t
ing time and to break under specified conditions. lcn is shown on the (let-through) values for circuit breakers up to 32A; class 3 having the
MCB label in a rectangular box with the suffix 'A' and is the value highest energy limiting performance.
which is used for application purposes. lcn (of the MCB) should be
equal to or greater than the prospective short-circuit current at the All Hager MCBs are well within the limits of energy let-through set by
point of application. IEC 60898 for energy limiting class 3.
You will see from the curves that the inverse time delay characteristic The circuit breaker can have the line\load connected to either top or
which provides overload protection is the same on all three. This is bottom terminals.
because the standards required the breaker to carry 1.13 times the
rated current without tripping for at least one hour and when the test
current is increased to 1.45 times the rated current, it must trip within
one hour, and again from cold if the last current is increased to 2.55
times the rated current the breaker must trip between 1 and 120 sec-
onds. The inverse time delay characteristic of all MCBs claiming com-
pliance with IEC 60898 must operate within these limits.
The difference between the three types of characteristic curves desig-

nated 'B', 'C' and 'D' concerns only the magnetic instantaneous trip
which provides short-circuit protection.
* For type 'B' the breaker must trip between the limits of 3 to 5 times
rated current
* For type 'C' the breaker must trip between the limits of 5 to 10
times rated current, and
* For type 'D' the breaker must trip between the limits of 10 to 20
times rated current
Often manufacturers publish their MCB tripping characteristics show-

ing the limits set by the standard and guarantee that any breakers that
you purchase will operate within these limits. So great care should be
taken when working with characteristics curves showing lower and
higher limits - on no account should you take a mean point for appli-
cation design purposes.
For cable protection applications you should take the maximum trip-
ping time and some manufacturers publish single line characteristics
curves which show the maximum tripping time. If the design problem
is nuisance tripping then the minimum tripping time should be used
176
Temperature Derating Lighting circuits
MCBs are designed and calibrated to carry their rated current and to Although the MCBs prime function is the protection of lighting circuits,
operate within their designated thermal time/current zone at 30C. they are often used as local control switches as well, conveniently
Testing is carried out with the breaker mounted singly in a vertical switching on and off large groups of luminaries in shops and factories.
plane in a controlled environment. Therefore if the circuit breaker is The MCB is well able to perform this additional task safely and effec-
required to operate in conditions which differ from the reference con- tively. Hager MCBs have an electrical endurance of 20,000 on/off
ditions, certain factors have to be applied to the standard data. For operations for MCBs up to and including 32A and 10,000 on/off oper-
instance if the circuit breaker is required to operate in a higher ambi- ations for 40, 50 and 63A MCBs.
ent temperature other than 300C it will require progressively less cur-
rent to trip within the designated time/current zone, For the protection of lighting circuits the designer must select the cir-
cuit breaker with the lowest instantaneous trip current compatible with
Temperature correction the inrush currents likely to develop in the circuit.
In(A) 30C 35C 40C 45C 50C 55C 60C High Frequency (HF) ballasts are often singled out for their high inrush
currents but they do not differ widely from the conventional 50Hz. The
0.5 0.5 0.48 0.46 0.44 0.42 0.40 0.38
highest value is reached when the ballast is switched on at the
1 1 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.84 0.80 0.76 moment the mains sine wave passes through zero. However, because
2 2 1.92 1.84 1.76 1.68 1.60 1.52 the HF system is a "rapid start" system whereby all lamps start at the
3 3 2.88 2.76 2.64 2.52 2.40 2.28 same time, the total inrush current of an HF system exceeds the usual
4 4 3.84 3.68 3.52 3.36 3.20 3.04 values of a conventional 50Hz system. Therefore where multiple bal-
6 6 5.76 5.52 5.28 5.04 4.80 4.56 lasts are used in lighting schemes, the peak current increases propor-
10 10 9.60 9.20 8.80 8.40 8.00 7.60 tionally.
16 16 15.36 14.72 14.08 13.44 12.80 12.16
Mains circuit impedance will reduce the peak current but will not affect
20 20 19.20 18.40 17.60 16.80 16.00 15.20 the pulse time.
25 25 24.00 23.00 22.00 21.00 20.00 19.00
32 32 30.72 29.44 28.16 26.88 25.60 24.32 The problem facing the installation designer in selecting the correct
40 40 38.40 36.80 35.20 33.60 32.00 30.40 circuit breaker is that the surge characteristic of HF ballasts vary from
50 50 48.00 46.00 44.00 42.00 40.00 38.00 manufacturer to manufacturer. Some may be as low as 12A with a
pulse time of 3ms and some as high as 35A with a pulse time of 1 ms.
63 63 60.48 57.96 55.44 52.92 50.40 47.88
Therefore it is important to obtain the expected inrush current of the
80 80 77.60 75.10 72.60 70.00 67.20 64.40 equipment from the manufacturer in order to find out how many HF
100 100 96.60 93.10 89.40 85.60 81.60 77.50 ballasts can safely be supplied from one circuit breaker without the
125 125 121.90 118.90 115.70 112.40 109.10 105.60 risk of nuisance tripping.
Grouping factors This information can then be divided into the minimum peak tripping
Consideration should also be given to the proximity heating effect of current of the circuit breaker as shown in the Table below.
the breakers themselves when fully loaded and mounted together in
groups. There is a certain amount of watts loss from each breaker Minimum peak tripping current
depending on the trip rating which may well elevate the ambient air
temperature of the breaker above the ambient air temperature of the Circuit
enclosure. breaker Circuit breaker rated current
type 6A 10A 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A
grouping factor (rated current reduce by factor K) B 26 43 68 85 106 136 170 212 268
C 43 71 113 142 177 223 283 354 446
No. of Units K HLF D 85 142 226 283 354 453 566 707 891
n=1 1 1
2n < 4 0.95 1 Example:
4n < 6 0.9 1
6n 0.85 1 How many HF ballasts, each having an expected inrush of 20A can be
supplied by a 16A type C circuit breaker? From table above, 16A type
Effects of frequency change C we have a minimum peak tripping current of 113A.
thermal - unchanged
magnetic - value multiplied by coefficient K Therefore, 113 / 20 = 5
F(Hz) 17Hz-60Hz 100Hz 200Hz 400Hz i.e. 5 ballasts can be supplied by a 16A type C circuit breaker.
K 1 1.1 1.2 1.5
Example
Five circuit breakers are to be installed inside an enclosure in a switch-
room which has an average ambient air temperature of 35C. Each cir-
cuit breaker will be required to supply a continuous current
of 20A.
From table, we would select a circuit breaker which has a rated cur-
rent of 25A at 30C and 23.5A at 35C. This takes care of the switch-
room ambient air temperature of 35C, but we also have to take into
account the grouping factor of live continuously loaded breakers
mounted together in one enclosure. Table gives us a grouping factor K
of 0.9. We then apply this grouping factor to the rated current at 35C
which gives us a circuit breaker rated current of 23.5 x 0.9 = 21.15A in
the specified conditions
177
B curve (IEC 60898) C curve (IEC 60898) D curve (IEC 60898)
MCBs: NBN rated 6-63A MCBs: NCN rated 0.5-63A MCBs: NDN rated 0.5-63A
HLF rated 80-125A
time in seconds
time in seconds
time in seconds
multiples of In multiples of In multiples of In
current limiting at 400V

NBN NCN NDN HLF
peak current in kA
peak current in kA
100 500 1000 5000 10000 40000
short circuit current short circuit current
I2t characteristics
NBN NCN NDN HLF
energy let through in kA2s
energy let through in kAS
short circuit current short circuit current
178
Automatic changeover
and current limiter
ACCLs
Automatic changeover and current limiter

Convinent modular solution for controlling individual loads and automatic
changeovers.
www.hager.co.in
Residual Current
Circuit Breakers
contemporary range with user friendly features
to ensure earth leakage protection

Earth fault Indicator on front face for easy fault diagnosis IS 12640-1, IEC 61008
Contact position indication on front face ISI marking
Bi-connect terminals for simultaneous termination of bus bar Ratings - 16A, 25A, 40A, 63A, 100A
& wires
No. of poles - 2P & 4P
Unique pull up terminals with safety shutters for enhanced
Sensitivity - 10mA, 30mA, 100mA & 300mA
safety of users
Trip class - class AC and class Hi
IEC, CE & RoHS compliance
Earth fault trip indicator on front face
Hi version for disturbed electrical networks having pulsated,
DC currents, harmonics and transient voltage Protection against nuisance tripping caused by switching
transients
180
Expert
tips
Earth fault indication on Positive contact
1 front face
Grey : normal condition
Yellow : tripping on
earth fault
3 indicator
Red : ON
Green : OFF
more safety to the user
yellow flag provides visual positive contact indication
indication on earth fault indicates actual contact posi-
tion
User friendly terminal Special Hi RCCBs for
2 design

bi-connect terminal
pull-up design
safety shutter (IP 2X)
line - load reversible
4 commercial application
ideal earth leakage protection
solution for offices, IT parks &
BPOs
avoid nuisance tripping in
electrical networks with
electronic loads
ensure tripping in networks
with pulsated DC components
181
Residual current circuit breakers (RCCBs)
Automatically trips in event of Positive contact indicator on 25-63A: 25sq.mm rigid
earth leakage fault front face 16sq.mm flexible
Provides protection against Earth fault indicator on front 100A: 50sq.mm rigid
direct & indirect contact with face 35sq.mm flexible
live parts Bi-connect terminals with pull-
up design
Technical data Finger proof (IP2X) terminal
IS 12640-1, IEC 61008 with safety shutters
ISI marking Protection against nuisance
CE marking tripping due to switching
Ratings - 16A, 25A, 40A, 63A, transients
100A CE & RoHS compliant,
No. of poles - 2P & 4P Green product
Sensitivity - 10mA, 30mA, Wide range of accessories are
100mA & 300mA available
Trip class - class AC
Sensitivity IDn Rating In Modules Catalogue No.
Double Pole (1P + N)
10mA 16A 2 CC216Y

25A 2 CC225Y
30mA 25A 2 CD225Y

40A 2 CD240Y
63A 2 CD263Y
100A 2 CD284Y
CD240Y 100mA 25A 2 CE225Y

40A 2 CE240Y
63A 2 CE263Y
100A 2 CE284Y
300mA 25A 2 CF225Y

40A 2 CF240Y
63A 2 CF263Y
Four Pole
30mA 25A 4 CD425Y

40A 4 CD440Y
63A 4 CD463Y
100A 4 CD484Y
100mA 25A 4 CE425Y

40A 4 CE440Y
63A 4 CE463Y
100A 4 CE484Y
CD440Y
300mA 25A 4 CF425Y
40A 4 CF440Y
63A 4 CF463Y
100A 4 CF484Y
182
Residual current circuit breakers (RCCBs) -
type Hi (high immunity)
Automatically trips in event of Positive contact indicator on 25sq.mm rigid
earth leakage fault front face 16sq.mm flexible
Provides protection against Earth fault indicator on front
direct & indirect contact with face
live parts Bi-connect terminals with
Suitable for electrically distur- pull-up design
bed networks with pulsated Finger proof (IP2X) terminal
DC, transients & harmonics with safety shutters
Avoids nuisance tripping & Protection against nuisance
blinding tripping due to switching
transients & harmonics
Technical data Avoids blinding due to
Conforms to pulsated DC currents
IEC 61008 RoHS compliant, Green
Ratings - 25A, 40A, 63A product
No. of poles - 2P & 4P Wide range of accessories are
Sensitivities - 30mA & 300mA available
Trip Class - class Hi
30mA 25A 2 CH225J
40A 2 CH240J
63A 2 CH263J
300mA 25A 2 CQ225J
40A 2 CQ240J
CH225J
63A 2 CQ263J
Four pole
30mA 25A 2 CH425J
40A 2 CH440J
63A 2 CH463J
300mA 25A 2 CQ425J
CQ440J 40A 2 CQ440J
63A 2 CQ463J
183
Residual circuit breakers (RCBOs): 2P, 2 module
with overcurrent protection
Description Breaking capacity 6kA as Connection
Provides protection on over- per IEC 61009 25sq.mm rigid
load, short-circuit & earth 16sq.mm flexible
leakage faults Features & benefits:
Compact 2 pole, 2 module Earth fault indicator on front
device, saves space face
Bi-connect terminals with pull-
Technical data up design
Conforms to Finger proof (IP2X) terminal
IEC 61009 with safety shutters
Ratings - 6 to 40 A Energy let thru Class 3 reduces
No. of poles - 2 pole (in 2 stress on cables & insulators
modules) RoHS compliant, Green
Sensitivity - 30mA, 100mA & product
300mA Wide range of accessories are
Tripping curve - C available
Trip Class - class AC
30mA 6A 2 AD956Y
10A 2 AD960Y
16A 2 AD966Y
20A 2 AD970Y
25A 2 AD975Y
32A 2 AD982Y
40A 2 AD990Y
AD956Y
100mA 6A 2 AE956Y
10A 2 AE960Y
16A 2 AE966Y
20A 2 AE970Y
25A 2 AE975Y
32A 2 AE982Y
40A 2 AE990Y
300mA 6A 2 AF956Y
10A 2 AF960Y
16A 2 AF966Y
20A 2 AF970Y
25A 2 AF975Y
32A 2 AF982Y
40A 2 AF990Y
184
Residual circuit breakers (RCBOs) - type Hi (high immunity)
with overcurrent protection
Description Connection
Provides protection on over- Features & benefits 25sq.mm rigid
load, short-circuit & earth Earth fault indicator on front 16sq.mm flexible
leakage faults face
Suitable for electrically distur- Bi-connect terminals with pull
bed networks with pulsated up design
DC, transients & harmonics Finger proof (IP2X) terminal-
with safety shutters
Technical data Protection against nuisance
Conforms to tripping due to switching
IEC 61009 transients & harmonics
Ratings - 6 to 40A Avoids blinding due to
No. of poles - 2P pulsated DC currents
Sensitivities - 30mA & 300mA RoHS compliant, Green
Tripping curve - C product
Trip class - class Hi Wide range of accessories are
Breaking capacity 6kA as available
per IEC 61009
30mA 6A 2 ADH956
10A 2 ADH960
16A 2 ADH966
20A 2 ADH970
25A 2 ADH975
32A 2 ADH982
40A 2 ADH990
ADH956
300mA 6A 2 AFH956
10A 2 AFH960
16A 2 AFH966
20A 2 AFH970
25A 2 AFH975
185
Residual circuit breakers (RCBOs):
Description Trip Class - class AC Connection
Provides protection on over- Breaking capacity 10kA 25sq.mm rigid
load, short-circuit & earth 16sq.mm flexible
leakage faults Features & benefits:
2 pole RCBO-4 module width No of Poles: 2P, 4P
4 pole RCBO-7.5 module Current Rating: 6A to 63A
width Sensitivity: 30, 100, 300mA
Breaking Capacity: 10kA
Technical data RCD Type: Type AC
ISI Marked MCB Trip Curve: C
Conforms to IEC 61009/ Trip Indication: Blue colour on
IS 12640-2 toggle
Ratings - 6 to 63 A Terminal Cover: Yes
No. of poles - 2 pole and 4 pole Accessories: Yes (on the left
Sensitivity - 30mA, 100mA & side)
300mA
Tripping curve - C
Double Pole
30mA 6A 4 AD206Y
10A 4 AD210Y
16A 4 AD216Y
25A 4 AD225Y
32A 4 AD232Y
40A 4 AD240Y
63A 4 AD263Y
AD263Y
100mA 6A 4 AE206Y
10A 4 AE210Y
16A 4 AE216Y
25A 4 AE225Y
32A 4 AE232Y
40A 4 AE240Y
63A 4 AE263Y
300mA 16A 4 AF216Y

25A 4 AF225Y
32A 4 AF232Y
40A 4 AF240Y
63A 4 AF263Y
Four Pole
30mA 16A 7.5 AD416Y

25A 7.5 AD425Y
32A 7.5 AD432Y
40A 7.5 AD440Y
63A 7.5 AD463Y
100mA 16A 7.5 AE416Y

AD463Y
25A 7.5 AE425Y
32A 7.5 AE432Y
40A 7.5 AE440Y
63A 7.5 AE463Y
300mA 16A 7.5 AF416Y

25A 7.5 AF425Y
32A 7.5 AF432Y
40A 7.5 AF440Y
63A 7.5 AF463Y
186
Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCBs)
Residual current devices Working principle of RCCBs
A residual current device is the generic term for a device which simul-
taneously performs the functions of detection of the residual current,
comparison of this value with the rated residual operating value and
opening the protected circuit when the residual current exceeds this
value.
l2 l1
For fixed domestic installations and similar applications we have two
types :-
l Residual current operated circuit-breaker without integral Ires

over-current protection (RCCB) which should comply with the
requirements of IEC 61008
l Residual current operated circuit-breaker with integral over-current
protection (RCBO) which should comply with the requirements of
IEC 61009
Both RCCBs and RCBOs are further divided into types depending on
their operating function:
Type AC for which tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal

alternating currents, whether suddenly applied or slowly ris- I3
ing.
Type A for which tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal

alternating currents and residual pulsating direct currents,
whether suddenly applied or slowly rising.
S Type S for selectivity, with time-delay. Current flowing through torroid in healthy circuit

Ires I1 + I2 = 0
RCCBs must be protected against over-current (overload & short-
circuit) by means of circuit-breakers or fuses Current flowing through torroid in circuit with earth fault I3

RCBOs have their own in built short-circuit protection, up to its Ires I3 = I1 + I2
rated breaking capacity
The drawing above shows how a torroid is located around the line and
RCCBs - domestic installation neutral conductors to measure the magnetic fields created by the cur-
rent flowing in these conductors. The sum of the magnetic fields set
RCCBs can be installed in two ways:
up by these currents (which takes into consideration both the magni-
1. whole house protection tude and phase relationship of the currents) is detected by the torroid.
2. per phase isolation (PPI)
In a normal healthy circuit the vector sum of the current values added
Whole house protection is provided typically by a consumer unit where together will be zero. Current flowing to earth, due to a line earth fault,
the RCCBs serves as the main switch. Although very popular this suf- will return via the earth conductor, and regardless of load conditions
fers from a disadvantage: all circuits are disconnected in the event of will register as a fault. This current flow will give rise to a residual cur-
fault. Selective protection can be provided by associating the RCCBs rent (Ires) which will be detected by the device.
with identified high risk circuits by adopting one or more of the follow-
ing: It is most important that the line and neutral conductors are passed
through the torroid. A common cause of nuisance operation is the fail-
l Split busbar consumer unit: ure to connect the neutral through the device.
All circuits are fed via an overall isolator and selected circuits fed
additionally via the RCCBs. Typical circuits fed direct are lighting, RCCBs work just as well on three phase or three phase and neutral cir-
freezer, storage heating: and circuits fed via the RCCBs are socket cuits, but when the neutral is distributed it must pass through the tor-
outlets, garage circuits. This concept minimises inconvenience in roid.
the event of fault.
l Per phase isolation (PPI):

A 30mA RCD is used as sub-incomer for each individual phase. In
event of a fault, only faulty phase is disconnected and supply to
remaining healthy phases is not affected.
Nuisance tripping
All Hager RCCBs incorporate a filtering device preventing the risk of
nuisance tripping due to transient voltage (lightning, line disturbances
on other equipment) and transient currents (from high capacitive cir-
cuit).
Two opposing diodes placed in parallel to secondary coil prevent volt-

age surges from reaching the secondary and hence the delay.
187
Use of RCCBs The tripping characteristic for a 30mA RCD is also shown in the graph.
RCCBs offer excellent protection against earth leakage currents, the It shows the level of current required to cause the RCD to trip, for
main areas of application being as follows: example; 50mA will cause a trip but not 10mA. Comparing its charac-
teristic with the various zones on the graph it can be seen that the
Zs value too high to allow disconnection in the required time 30mA RCD gives a very good measure of protection against the haz-
ards associated with electric shock. Where a higher level of protection
Where the overcurrent protection or a circuit breaker cannot provide is required, for example in laboratories, 10mA devices are available.
disconnection within the specified time because the earth fault loop
impedance is too high, the addition of RCCB protection may well solve Note:
the problem without any other change in the system. Because of its
high sensitivity to earth fault current and its rapid operating time, in
most cases the RCCB will ensure disconnection within the specified
time. This is achieved without any detriment to overcurrent discrimi-
nation because, unlike the situation in a fuse based system, the
increased sensitivity is obtained without increasing sensitivity to over-
current faults. Use of RCCBs in this way can be particularly useful for
construction sites and bathrooms where disconnection times are more
stringent than for standard installations. (Construction sites - 0.2s at
220-277V, bathrooms - 0.4s).
The limitation to this technique is the requirement that the rated resid-
ual operating current multiplied by Zs should not exceed 50V. This is
to avoid the danger of exposed conductive parts reaching an unac-
ceptably high voltage level.
Residual current protection can even be added to a completed distri-

bution system where the value of Zs is excessive, either because of a
design oversight or subsequent wiring modification.
Protection against shock by direct contact
So far we have considered shock by indirect contact only. Direct con-

tact is defined thus:
Direct contact - contact of persons or livestock with live parts which

may result in electric shock. The consideration here is not the hazard Although RCDs are extremely effective devices they must never be
of parts becoming live as a result of a fault but the possibility of touch- used as the only method of protection against electric shock. With or
ing circuit conductors which are intentionally live. without RCD protection all electrical equipment should be kept in
good condition and should never be worked on live.
RCCBs, although provides good protection against the potentially
lethal effects of electric shock, must not be used as the sole means of
protection against shock by direct contact. The other measures that
should be taken are :
insulation of live parts
barriers or enclosures
obstacles
placing live parts out of reach
Additionally an RCCB used for this purpose should have:

a sensitivity of 30mA
an operating time not exceeding 40mS at a residual current of
150mA
The specified sensitivity is based on research that has been carried

out to estimate the effect of various levels and duration of current can
have on the human body. This experience is summarised in a graph
shown in 'IEC 60479-1: Effects of current passing through the human
body'. A simplified version of this graph is shown. It shows that very
small currents can be tolerated for reasonably long periods and mod-
erate currents for very short periods. It can be seen, for instance, that
100mA for 100mS or 20mA for 500mS will not normally cause any
harmful effect. 200mA for 200mS or 50mA for 500mS which are in
Zone 3, would be more dangerous; and shock levels in Zone 4 carry a
risk of lethal consequences.
188
Various national & international regulations make it mandatory to use the voltage).
RCCBs in electrical installation. For ex - IEC-60364 standard also
deals with protection against electric shocks resulting from direct & When a non-linear load, such as a rectifier, is connected to the system,
indirect contacts with electrically parts in electrical installations. it draws a current that is not necessarily sinusoidal. The current wave-
IS-12640 part I & part II and IEC-61008 & IEC-61009 gives guidelines form can become quite complex, depending on the type of load and
for residual current devices for protection against electric shocks. its interaction with other components of the system. It is possible to
decompose it into a series of simple sinusoidal waveforms, with each
RCCBs are an efficient protection device for ensuring people s pro- waveform having a frequency which is an integer multiple of funda-
tection against electrical shocks resulting from direct and indirect con- mental frequency. These current waveforms which have frequency
tact with electrically live parts in any installation. which is integer multiple of main power frequency current is known as
harmonic current. Some common examples of non-linear loads
RCCBs are used for various applications depending upon different include common office equipment such as computers and printers,
current sensitivities. and also variable speed drives.
30mA RCCB - for protection against direct contacts
100mA RCCB - for protection against indirect contact / in large or These high frequency harmonic current negatively affects the per-
old installations where natural leakage is high formance of RCCBs. Harmonic current increases the impedance of the
300mA RCCB - for protection against fire, insulation faults in secondary circuit (given by XL = 2 fL) of the RCCB CBCT. This
commercial & industrial installations increase in impedance of secondary circuit hampers the power trans-
fer to the tripping relay. It leads to non-tripping of RCCBs which is also
High Immunity (Hi) RCCBs known as blinding of RCCBs.
Increased use of semi-conductors in electronic instruments in com- Transients
mercial application such as computers, printer, photocopiers and
other non-linear loads and in industrial applications such as VFD, thris- Transient over voltages when present in a network generally exceeds
tors, inverters, speed controllers have increased problems of pulsated the insulation voltage of an installation. This leads to momentary punc-
DC currents, harmonics and transients in electrical networks. These ture of the insulation, thereby generating leakage current, causing nui-
electrical disturbances (pulsated DC currents, harmonics and tran- sance tripping of AC class RCDs. AC class RCDs cannot differentiate
sients) distorts the pure sine waveform of alternating current and low- between a transient and permanent leakage current.
ers the overall power quality.
Effects of electronic loads on RCCBs
RCCB being a very sensitive device may trip due to these electrical Electronic devices like computers, printers, copiers, medical equip-
disturbances in the system, which deforms/distort the sine wave. ments like x-ray machines, to comply with EMC directives, are
equipped with interference filters. These interference filters generate
These disturbances can be due to: permanent leakage current to the tune of 1.5 mA. When a few such
External disturbance - High voltage network disturbance, natural loads are connected in a network, the summation of the leakage cur-
lightening rents may cross the tripping threshold, and trip the AC class RCD. The
Internal disturbances - Harmonics - non linear loads like VFD, risk is high when the installed RCD is AC class with sensitivity of 30
electronic loads mA.
Pulsated DC currents Thyristors,
SMPS, Effect of harmonic filters on RCCBs
electronic loads Harmonics generated and circulating in the networks is harmful and
Switching surges switching of induction needs to be eliminated by employing filtering condensers between
motors, transformers phase / neutral & earth, i.e Harmonic filters. This is essential to facili-
tate proper functioning of other equipments connected in the network.
IEC 61008 defines RCCB as per following class:
Class AC - for normal AC supply networks with no harmonics AC class RCDs installed in such networks cannot differentiate
Class A - for disturbed AC supply networks having pulsated between a high frequency harmonic leakage current bypassed to the
DC currents earth and a normal 50 HZ leakage current and trips.
Class B - for pure DC networks
In summary, electrical disturbance in power supply interferes with the
Effect of network disturbances of working of RCCBs operation of RCCBs connected to network. These disturbances have
Pulsated DC currents following effects on the working of residual current devices:
Electrical networks feeding power to devices like SMPS, thyristors, Nuisance Tripping
dimmers, VFDs, power electronics etc. would generate pulsated DC
components in the leakage currents. RCCB may trip without a genuine earth leakage.
Continuity of supply is affected, though no compromise in
As per Faraday s law, the rate change of flux generated at the core people s safety.
due to the leakage current with pulsated DC components is not pro-
portional to the magnitude of the leakage current. The tripping relay Blinding
then would not have sufficient power to trip the RCCB, thereby com- RCCB may not trip on a genuine earth leakage
promising on safety. This phenomena is know as Blinding of People s safety is no longer guaranteed
RCCBs.
In both above cases, either continuity of supply or people s safety is
Harmonics compromised which is not desirable.
In a normal alternating current power system, the voltage varies sinu-
soidally at a specific frequency, 50 hertz for India. When a linear elec-
trical load is connected to the system, it draws a sinusoidal current at
the same frequency as the voltage (though usually not in phase with
189
To take care of blinding & nuisance tripping problems, Hager Hi (High Immunity) RCCBs are suitable for earth leakage
Hager offers special Hi RCCB which can withstand the distur- protection in electrically disturbed networks (electrical networks
bances which causes nuisance tripping or blinding in normal having pulsated DC components, harmonics & switching tran-
(class AC & class A) RCCBs. sients).
Hager Hi RCCBs have following design features which make it superi- Hager Hi RCCBs employs special filter circuits to avoid nuisance
or than Class A or AC RCCBs for electrically disturbed networks: tripping (tripping without any genuine fault) and ensure tripping on
specially designed torrid which solves the problem of non-activation genuine earth faults (avoids blinding).
of relay in case of leakage of pulsated DC current.
electronic filter circuits for treatment of tripping signals to improve Various disturbances causing nuisance tripping or blinding
the performance compared to standard RCCBs. Following table shows the common loads in commercial & industrial
Improved tripping band of 80 - 100% of rated sensitivity which is application which generate pulsated DC components or harmonics.
much narrower than a normal class AC RCCBs (50-100%).
Disturbance Nuisance Blinding Loads / Factors
Tripping
50 Hz constant leakage Charged Cables

currents
!
HF Transient leakage Electronic Ballasts,

currents / Equipped Dimmers, SMPS,
with filters ! ! Power Electronic
Equipments
Leakage currents with DC Motors, SMPS,

pulsed DC components ! Variable Speed
Drives
Devices with Computers, Printers,

interference filters for ! Copiers, X rays,
EMC complaince Medical equipments
Lightning surges ! Natural lightning

Special filter circuit to take care of pulsated
DC currents, harmonics & transients is shown above. Switching surges Motors,
Transformers, Neon
!
Hager Hi (High Immunity) RCCBs provides reliable earth leakage pro- Lights
tection in electrically disturbed networks (electrical networks having
pulsated DC components, harmonics & switching transients).
Comparison of Hager Hi RCCBs with Class A & Class AC RCCBs

generally available
Following table shows the comparison between Class AC, Class A &
Hager Hi RCCBs.
RCCB type Suitable for electrical networks with
Pulsated DC Harmonics Switching

current surges
Class AC RCCB No No No
Class A RCCB Yes No No
Hager Hi RCCB Yes Yes Yes
Class A RCCB may not work satisfactorily in electrical networks dis-

turbed by harmonics & switching transients and may give nuisance
tripping.
190
Technical Specifications
Standards IEC 61008-1, IS 12640 (Part 1)

Rated Current In 25, 40, 63 & 100A
No. of poles 2P & 4P
Sensitivity 10, 30, 100 & 300mA
Class Class AC & Class Hi (high immunity)
Rated Voltage 230V (2P) - for 25-3A, 240V for 100A
230/400V (4P) - for 25-63A, 240/415V for 100A
Rated Frequency 50Hz
Rated Residual Making &
Breaking Capacity IDm 1500A(2P), 630A(4P)
Rated Making & Breaking Capacity IDm 1500A(2P), 630A(4P)
Short Circuit Withstand: with fuse back up 10kA for 25, 40A; 6kA for 63A
with MCB 10kA back up 10kA for 25, 40A; 9kA for 63A
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage 1.2/50s 4KV
Electrical Endurance at pf = 0.9 10000 operations
Rated Insulation Voltage Ui 500V
Dielectric Voltage 2500V
Degree of Protection IP2X
Contact Flag Indication Red for ON, Green for OFF
Fault Indication Yellow flag indication
Ambient Temperature -25 to +40C
Storage Temperature -55 to +70C
Mounting Position Horizontally, vertically or flat
Bus Bars KDNxxx
Residual current circuit breaker with

over current protection (RCBO)
RCBO gives combined protection against earth leakages as well as against overloads and short circuits.
Standards IEC 61009-1, EN 61009-1
Rated Current In 6,10,16,20,25,32 & 40 A
No. of Poles 2P
Sensitivity 30, 100 & 300mA
Tripping curve C curve (5 - 10 in)
Energy Limiting Class 3
Rated Voltage 240V AC
Rated Residual Making and Breaking Capacity Im 1500A
Electrical Endurance at pf = 0.9 10000
Rated Insulation Voltage Ui 500V
Dielectric Voltage 2500V
Degree of protection IP2X
Fault Indication Yellow flag indication
Ambient Temperature -25C to + 30C
Storage Temperature -55C to + 70C
Mounting Position Horizontally, Vertically or Flat
Busbars KDNxxx
191
Product presentation
contact position indicator
Test push button
trip indication
ergonomic operating
handle
Contact position indicator Trip indicator

The mechanical indicator on the front of RCCB shows the physical The status of the RCCB can be visualised by the colour of the trip
position of the contacts. indicator in addition to the position of the operating lever.
Red indication for closed contacts Grey indication for normal conditions (even when operating lever is
Green indication for open contacts in ON/OFF position)
Yellow indication for tripped condition, operating lever in OFF
The green indication is the guarantee that the contacts are open and position
that the terminals are not live.
Similar condition exists when TEST button is pushed or RCCB is
remotely tripped via protection auxiliaries.
Positive contact indication Earth leakage fault indication
OFF
OFF ON
green red
grey yellow
Mounting of auxiliaries
It is possible to mount two auxiliaries on RCCB.

Auxiliary CZ 001 for ON/OFF status and TRIP indication is
mounted first on the left hand side of the RCCB.
Additional protection auxiliary MZ 203 to MZ 209 can be mounted
besides CZ 001.
Auxiliaries association possibilities
CZ 001 MZ 203... + CZ 001

(CA+SD) MZ 206 (CA+SD)
MZ 209
192
RCD add-on blocks - 125A
Description No. of poles - 3P & 4P trip time delay version
RCD Add on blocks (RCD AoB) Sensitivity Class AC and class Hi versions
suitable for 80, 100 & 125A - Fixed - 30mA & 300mA
HLF MCBs - Adjustable 300, 500mA,
Fits on right side of 3P & 4P 1A
HLF MCBs Trip time
Protection against fire caused - Fixed - instantaneous
by insulation faults 300mA, - Adjustable 0, 60, 150
500mA, 1A msec
Protection against electric Trip class
shocks 30mA - AC for normal circuits
Combined unit (HLF - Hi for electrically disturbed
MCB+RCD AoB) provides pro- networks
tection against over-loads, Breaking capacity 10kA (with
short-circuits & earth leakage HLF MCBs)
faults
Feature & benefits
Technical Data Common rating for 80,100 &
Conforms to 125A HLF MCBs
IEC 61009 Choice of fixed or adjustable
IEC 60947-2 sensitivity
Rating 125A Choice of instantaneous trip or
Rating Sensitivity / Trip time Modules Catalogue no.
Type AC
3P 125A 30mA, instantaneous trip 6 BDC380E
125A adjustable sensitivity 300/500mA/1A 6 BTC380E

Trip time Inst, 60msec, 150 msec
4P 125A 30mA, instantaneous trip 6 BDC480E
125A 300mA, instantaneous trip 6 BFC480E

BTH380E
125A adjustable sensitivity 300/500mA/1A 6 BTC480E
Trip time Inst, 60msec, 150 msec
Type Hi
3P 125A 30mA, instantaneous trip 6 BDH380E
125A adjustable sensitivity 300/500mA/1A 6 BTH380E

Trip time Inst, 60msec,150 msec
4P 125A 30mA, instantaneous trip 6 BDH480E
125A 300mA, instantaneous trip 6 BFH480E

BDC480E
125A adjustable sensitivity 300/500mA/1A 6 BTH480E
Trip time Inst, 60msec,150 msec
193
RCBO (RCD + MCB)
RCBO offers three in one protection against earth leakages, over-loads and short-circuits.
Standards IEC 60947-2, IEC 61009-1

Rated Current In 6A to 63A
No. of Poles 2P & 4P
Sensitivity 30, 100 & 300mA
Class Class AC
Tripping curve C type
Energy Limiting Class 3
Breaking capacity 10 KA
Rated Voltage 230V AC (2 pole)
230/400V AC (4 pole)
Terminal Cover yes
Accessories Aux, trip, ST, OV, UV
Fault Indication Mechanical Fault Indication* (on handle)
* Earth leakage trip indicator: blue printing on the AOB handle.
RCD add on block - 125A (for HLF MCBs)
Standards IEC 60947-2, IEC 61009

Rated Current In 125A
No. of Poles 3P & 4P
Sensitivity Fixed - 30mA, 300 mA
adjustable - 300mA, 500mA, 1A
Tripping time Fixed - instantaneous
adjustable - Inst. 60msec, 150msec
Tripping curve Depending on MCB
Energy Limiting Class Depending on MCB
Rated Voltage 230V - 2P, 415 V - 4P
Fault Indication Mechanical Fault Indication* (on handle)
194
RCD add on block + MCB
Electrical connection
Operating ON Operating OFF
TEST
25, 40 & 63A 25A 40 & 63A

No. of poles 2 4 4
No. of modules 4 6 7.5
Weight (g) 154g 174 g 250g
Qty per pack 1 1 1
195
Auxiliaries and accessories for MCBs, RCCBs and RCBOs
Description the left hand side of devices Connection capacity
Auxiliaries are common to both Use of MZ203, MZ204, 6sq. mm. rigid cables
single / multi-pole circuit MZ205, MZ206 and MZ209 on 4sq. mm. flexible cables
breakers RCCBs requires the use of
These auxiliaries are fitted to interface auxiliary CZ 001
Description In (Amp) Modules Catalogue No.
Auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC auxiliary contact 1/2 MZ201

indication of main contact
status.
6A - 230V~
Use with MCB / RCBOs
Alarm contacts trip alarm contact is used to 1/2 MZ202

indicate tripping of connected
device on fault (e.g. MCB tripped
on overload or short circuit).
1NO + 1NC
MZ201 6A - 230V~
Use with MCB / RCBOs
Auxiliary + alarm switch indicates the position of the 1 CZ001

(for RCCBs) associated RCCB on, off, tripped.
Also acts as RCCB interface with
standard MCB auxiliaries MZ203,
MZ204, MZ205, MZ206 & MZ209
2 NO + 2 NC
6A - 230V~
Use with RCCBs)
MZ203
Shunt trip allows remote tripping
of the connected device.
230V - 415V AC 1 MZ203

110V - 130V DC
24V - 48V AC 1 MZ204

12V - 48V DC
Under voltage release allows MCB to be closed only

when voltage is above 70% of Un
MZ206 MCB will automatically trip
when voltage falls by 35% of Un
48V DC 1 MZ205
230V AC 1 MZ206
Over voltage release monitors the Ph-N voltage 1 MZ209

supplied over the network.
Causes automatic tripping of
protection device and prevents
MZ209 reclosing in case of permanent
over voltage Un > 280V AC.
Tripping indication by red flag.
Over / low voltage release continuously monitors voltage 1 MZ215

between Phase and Neutral to
disconnect when voltage is
high or low.
Over voltage: >267 V AC
Low voltage: 60V AC < U <170V AC
MZ215 Over voltage release 3Ph+N continuously monitors voltage 1 MZ216

between 3 Phase and Neutral
to disconnect when voltage is
high.
Over voltage: U> 275 V AC
Suitable for 3Ph+N
Locking kit allows locking of the device MZN175

(for operating knob) in the on/off position.
will accept padlocks with
hasps of 4.75mm diameter max.
MZN175
196
Accessories & Auxilliaries for circuit breakers
Functions Under voltage release MZ205 - MZ206
Tripping and indication auxiliary contacts are common to the range of Allows the MCBs to trip when the voltage drops or by pressing a
multi-pole MCBs. remote off switch (i.e. emergency stop)
They should be mounted on the left hand side of the device. MZ 205 - 48V DC
MZ 206 - 230V AC
Auxiliary contact MZ201
Allows remote indication of the status of the device contacts to which Over voltage release MZ209
it is associated. The over voltage auxiliary causes remote opening of the electrical
circuit by tripping the protection device, if there is an over voltage
Alarm contact MZ202 on the network.
The alarm contact will provide indication if the breaker trips under MZ 209 - 230V AC
fault conditions.
Over voltage release MZ216
Shunt trip MZ203 - MZ204 The over voltage auxiliary causes remote opening of the electrical
Allows tripping of the device by feeding the coil. It is fitted with circuit by tripping the protection device, if there is an over voltage
internal contacts which allows it to be fed by an impulse or latched feed. on the network. It monitors 3Ph+N voltage and is in single module
MZ 203 - 230V to 415V AC / 110V to 130V DC MZ 216 - 3Ph+N - 230V AC
MZ 204 - 24V to 48V AC /12 to 48V DC
Over & Low voltage release MZ215
Continuously monitors voltage between Phase and Neutral to dis-
connect when votage is high or low.
MZ215 - 230V AC
Wiring diagram
MZ201 auxillary contact MZ202 auxillary contact MZ205/MZ206 under release MZ209 OV release / MZ215
OV & UV release
U< U>
MZ216 Wiring connection * U< - For MZ215 release

Neutral on the left (MCB) Neutral on the right (MCB)
Combination of auxiliaries with MCBs and RCBOs
It is possible to combine 4 auxiliaries with miniature circuit breakers
however the following must be observed:
only one protection auxiliary is allowed
1 the trip contact MZ202 must be mounted first
all auxiliaries are left mounted
Mounting of auxiliaries
MZ203 + MZ201 + MZ201 + MZ202 + circuit breaker
No tool is necessary for the mounting of the auxiliaries. The auxiliaries
MZ206 + MZ201 + MZ201 + MZ201
click onto the left side of the breakers and are held in place with spe- MZ209
cial designed fixing points. The whole operation is performed within MZ215
seconds.
Electrical
characteristics MZ201 MZ202 MZ203 MZ204 MZ205 MZ206 MZ209 MZ215 MZ216
Contact 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC
Rating of contact 6A 230V AC 6A 230V AC
Col voltage Un - - 230 to 415 VAC 24 to 48 VAC 48VDC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230V AC
110 to 130V DC 12 to 48V DC 3Ph+N
Energisng power - - 8VA 8VA - - 0.7VA 0.7VA 0.7VA
Voltage - - -15% of Un -15% of Un - - U > 267V U> 267V U> 275V
tolerances - 290VAC
Under voltage - - - - 0.35 - 0.7 Un 0.35 - 0.7 Un - 60VAC < -
U < 170VAC
197
Earth leakage relays
Description Sensitivity Features & benefits Positive security - relay trips in
Provides protection against - Fixed - 30mA, 300mA Test button for simulation of case of break in relay & CT link
insulation faults - Adjustable 30mA, 300mA, fault
Suitable for higher rated cir- 500mA, 1A, 3A, 10A Inbuilt protection against nui- Connection
cuits Trip time sance tripping like class A for HR510
- Fixed - instantaneous device rigid 1.5 to 10 sq mm
Technical data - Adjustable 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, LED for power supply indica- flexible 1 to 6 sq mm
Conforms to 0.4, 0.5, 1, 3 sec tion for HR500 and HR502
IEC 60947-2 annexe B Contact rating- 16A, AC-1, 1 Choice of fixed or adjustable rigid 1.5 to 4 sq mm
IEC 61008 changeover trip time flexible 1 to 2.5 sq mm
IEC 61543 Max distance between relay & Choice of fixed or adjustable
Supply voltage - 230V AC torroid - 20 meters sensitivity
standard output 1 C/O Instantaneous tripping 1 HR500

fixed sensitivity
IDn : 30mA
standard output 1 C/O Instantaneous tripping 1 HR502

fixed sensitivity
IDn : 300mA
HR502
standard output 1 C/O adjustable sensitivity 3 HR510

IDn : 0.03 - 0.1 - 0.3 - 0.5 - 1 -
3 - 5 - 10A
adjustable time delay :
0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 1
- 3s
Hi Type
HR510
Torroids for Earth leakage relay

Description Max length of wire between Connection
Torroids suitable for HR range relay & torroid 20 meters rigid - 1.5 to 4mm2
of earth leakage relays
flexible - 1 to 6mm2
Mounting
Technical data Either directly on cable or
Available in 35mm, 70mm, metal strip
105mm, 140mm & 210mm dia- Or on perforated kits
meter

(diameter)
Circular section torroids 35mm HR741

70mm HR742
105mm HR743
140mm HR744
210mm HR745
HR742
198
Earth leakage relay (ELR)
Non adjustable Adjustable
HR500 HR502 HR510
Voltage Supply 230V AC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption 5 VA
Output Volt free contact
Contact Rating 1 NO (6A, 230V, AC1)
Sensitivity In 30mA 300mA 0.03 / 0.1 / 0.3 / 0.5 / 1 / 3 / 10 A adjustable
Instantaneous/time delay Instantaneous Instantaneous 0-0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.5-1-3 sec
Torroid withstand capacity 5 kA / 1,5 s - 14 kA / 1 s - 100 kA / 0,05 s
Distance between torroid and relay 20 meter maximum
Relay cable connection
- Rigid 1.5 to 10 sq mm
- Flexible 1 to 6 sq mm
Torroid cable connection
- Rigid 1.5 to 10 sq mm
- Flexible 1 to 6 sq mm
Relay
- Working temperature - 25 to + 70 C
- Storage temperature - 10 to + 55 C
Torroid
- Working temperature - 25 to + 70 C
- Storage temperature - 10 to + 55 C
ELR - Wiring Diagrams

A - Wiring diagram for contactor B- Wiring diagram for MCB + shunt
199
Torroids for earth leakage relay
HR741, HR742, HR743, HR744, HR745

(Suitable for HR500, HR502, HR510)
Dimension details
HR 741 HR 742 HR 743 HR 744 HR 745
A (mm) 35 70 105 140 210
B (mm) 79 110 146 196 284
C (mm) 100 130 170 220 299
D (mm) 35 52 72 97 141
E (mm) 43 57 73 98 142
F (mm) 26 32 38 48.5 69
G (mm) 48.5 66 94 123 161
Installation Instructions
200
Surge protection devices: type 1 (Class-B)
mains protection - against lightning surges
Description Type - 1 device (class B) Features & benefits Connection
SPDs protects installation No of poles - 1P & 3P High discharge current withs- - 35 mm2 flexible conductor
against surges Discharge current, I max - 50 tand capacity - 50 mm2 rigid conductor
Type - 1 SPD for protection kA, 100kA Robust Spark-gap techno-
against lightning surges Discharge current wave form - logy for long life
10/350 micro sec
Technical data Voltage protection level, Up <
Conforms to IEC 61643-11, 4kV
EN61643-11 Response time <100 nsec
Description Characteristics Modules Catalogue. No.
Encapsulated surge protection 1 pole 1 ph 2 SP120

(type1) limp : 50kA
Un : 230/400V Up < 4kv
50/60 Hz
1 poles 2 SP150
( for N-PE in TT mode)
limp: 50 kA
Up < 4 KV
3 poles 4 SP320
limp : 100kA
Up < 4kv
SP320
Surge protective devices: type 2 (Class-C)

mains protection - against switching surges
Description Discharge current waveform - Connection
SPDs protects installation 8/20 micro sec for terminal blocks, (L, N/E) :
against surges Voltage protection level, - 25 mm2 flexible conductor
Type-2 SPD for main protec- Up < 1.5kV - 35 mm2 rigid conductor
tion against switching surges for auxiliary contact :
Features & benefits - 0.5 mm2 min.
Technical data End of life indicator - 1.5 mm2 max.
Conforms to IEC 61643 - 11 Aux contact for remote fault
Type - 2 device (class C) signalling IP2X terminal
No. of poles - 1P, 2P & 4P Plug-in version for easy repla-
Discharge current, Imax - cement
65kA, 40kA & 15kA
Type 2 Products-Main Protection
I max. 65 kA 1P 1 SPN165R
(with reserve indicator 1P+N 2 SPN265R
& remote signalling) 4P 4 SPN465R
SPN265R I max. 40 kA 1P 1 SPN140R

(with reserve indicator 1P+N 2 SPN240R
& remote signalling) 4P 4 SPN440R
I max. 40 kA 1P 1 SPD140D
1P+N 2 SPD240D
4P 4 SPD440D
I max. 15 kA 1P 1 SPN115D
SPN465R 1P+N 2 SPD215D
4P 4 SPD415D
201
Surge Protection Devices : type 2 (Class-C)
for fine protection
Description Voltage protection level, Up < Connection
Type-2 fine SPD for protection 800 V (mains + fine protection) 6 mm2 flexible conductor
of very sensitive electronic 10 mm2 rigid conductor
devices Features & benefits
To complements type-1 & End of life LED indicator on IP2X terminal
type-2 SPDs for maximum pro- front face
tection Up level < 800V, offers best
protection to devices on
Technical data surges
Conforms to IEC 61643-11 Can be used in coordination
No of poles - 2P & 4P with type-1 & type-2 SPDs
Discharge current, I max - 8kA
Discharge current waveform -
8/20 micro sec
SPD 2 poles 1 Ph + N 2 SPN208

with low voltage protection level Up : <1,25 kV at In
Un : 230/400 V ~ 4 poles 3 Ph + N 3 SPN408S

50/60 Hz Up : <1 kV at In
Voltage protection level with a

type-2 main + fine protection :
SPN408S Up < 800 V
SPDs for telephone lines
Description Technical data Connection :

SPDs for telephone lines Conforms to IEC 61643-21 - 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 flexible
For the protection of receiver Discharge current, I max - conductor
against transient current surge 10kA - 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 rigid conductor
vehicled by telephone lines Discharge current waveform -
(fax, modem, etc...) 8/20 micro sec IP2X terminal
In-line connection on telepho-
ne line with receiver to be pro-
tected.
Voltage surge protection for Un : 130 V 2 SPN505

analog telephone lines Up : 600 V
Voltage surge protection for Un : 40 V 2 SPN504

digital telephone lines Up : 600 V
SPN505
202
Replacement cartridges
for SPDs with plug in cartridge
Description Cartridges are available for all A keying system exists to
Cartridge allows simple repla- discharge currents (65 kA, prevent a line cartridge being
cement without the need to 40kA, 15kA) with or without interchanged by mistake with a
cut-off the power supply. reserve protection indication. neutral and vice versa.
Description Catalogue. No.
Replacement cartridges for Phase : SPN165R, SPN265R, SPN465R SPN065R
SPN140R, SPN240R, SPN440R SPN040R
SPD140D, SPN240D, SPD440D SPD040D
SPD215D, SPD415 SPD015D

SPN065R
for Neutral : SPN265R, SPN465R, SPN065N
SPN240R, SPN440R, SPN040N
SPDxxxD SPD040N
SPN065N
Remark : for replacement of cartridges, choose the same reference as the previous cartridge.
203
Surge protection devices
Voltage transients occur quite frequently and are caused by the Direct strike to power lines
switching on and off of current in the electrical distribution system, any If lightning directly hits a power line, it will continue to earth taking
by lightning activity in the vicinity of the installation. most of the current with it. A proportion however will be left on the
lines and potentially cause havoc on unprotected equipment connect-
Over-voltage transients caused by lighting ed to these lines.
Lightning occurs due to a build up of an electrical charge within a
cloud. Friction within the cloud caused by warm rising air and coll Resistive coupling
falling air separates electrical charges so that the positive charges go If lightning strikes the ground the current injected will want to dissipate
to the top of the cloud and the negative charges go to the bottom. as quickly as possible. To do this it will choose the easiest path. If this
means using the earth / neutral / live conductors of a distribution sys-
If we compare the situation in fig. to a capacitor it can be seen the tem in preference to the soil it will. It will then enter the system via the
negative charges in the cloud will attract an equal number of positive earthing arrangement.
charges on the ground. When there is enough potential difference
between either two cloud, or a cloud and the ground there will be a Inductive coupling
massive discharge, which will be seen as lightning.
When a current flows, whether in a cable or through the air, there is an
associated magnetic field set up perpendicular to the director of cur-
rent. When lightning discharges either between clouds or from clouds
to earth, a magnetic field can cut any conductors of the supply lines,
thus inducing a voltage on it. This voltage then appears across any
connected equipment.
The above principle applies for lightning striking a lightning rod. The
full current passes down the lightning rod to ground, and sets up a
magnetic field. As it does induces a voltage in the power and data
lines running throughout the building.
Capacitive coupling
The negative charges accumulating on a cloud will induce a corre-
sponding number of positive charges on to power lines. Once the
induced voltage rises sufficiently, breakdown of insulation or destruc-
tion of devices can occur.
All four methods of transient coupling can damage equipment

installed in a building.
Over-voltage transients caused by current switching

A lightning discharge to earth will occur at the point where the light- Whenever an electrical load containing components, other than pure-
ning sees the easiest path, exactly in the same way as electrically ly resistive loads, is switches, there is a surge of current as the induc-
takes the lowest resistance route within a circuit. If the ground is per- tive and capacitive elements try to establish their steady state condi-
fectly flat and the distribution of the negative charges in the cloud is tions.
homogenous (evenly spread), and the cloud base is of uniform height
above the ground, then the chances of a discharge happening in any An example of this is switching off fluorescent lights. The choke in the
particular place will be equal. light fitting stores up energy while the lamp is running. On switch off,
the energy stored in the choke tries to escape because the current that
However in reality any object that presents itself as an easier path to maintains it has been stopped, it does this by using the collapsing
earth for the lightning is more likely to be struck. For example an aver- magnetic field to generate a voltage across its terminals. This voltage
age tree is about 10 meters high and contains water, this therefore is dependant on the rate of change of current i.e.
reduces the distance the lightning has to travel and once struck also
presents a lower resistance path to earth than the surrounding air. V=-L di / dt
Depending on the current, the rate of change of the current, and the
(When lightning hits a tree, the current can be 100,000A plus, the inductive effective of the system the voltage can rise to many times the
resultant energy will be around, 1,000,000,000 Joules of energy and nominal system voltage, this will appear across any devices connect-
the turn the water to steam so fast, the expansion rips the tree apart) ed to the system.
The principle of presenting a low resistance path is the basis for light- Motors, transformers and discharge lighting are common sources of
ning rods. In its most basic form a lightning a rod is a metal pole point- transients.
ing into the air and situated so that its tip is higher than the structure
it is there to protect. The pole is connected to the ground by copper It would appear that on power system the maximum transient voltage
or aluminium tape. The top of the rod is usually pointed in design, as likely to be created is 6kV, with an associated maximum transient cur-
the electric charge density on an object increases as the radius of the rent of 10kA.
object decreases. This increase of electric charge per unit area can
ionize the air around it which again makes it easier for the lightning to Risk assessment
get to ground. Risk assessment for lightning strikes is the calculation necessary to
decide the need for a particular level of protection. To be accurate with
If a building without any form of protection from direct lightning strikes the assessment certain parameters need to be known such as the
(i.e. a lightning rod), received a direct strike then no form of electronic number of lightning strikes in the area and how exposed the installa-
protection will help. The magnitude of the current and potential differ- tion is .
ence involved will cause massive destruction.
The assessment for transients is much more difficult as the switching
If the same building is protected by a lightning rod, the actual struc- of loads is always unpredictable, and in many instances the transient
ture is safe but the electronic equipment within it needs extra protec- is caused by a switching action outside of the building where the prob-
tion because of the indirect effects caused by the lightning. lem is detected.
Below is a summary of the mechanisms by which transient over-voltages
can appear in an electrical distribution system due to lightning strikes.
204
The cost of installing and protecting the installation correctly is (before it start to heat up and melt due to I2R watts losses). This is
extremely low compared with the damage / problems caused by the known as lmax. Probably more importantly, the product of the internal
transient. When fitting a surge protective device not only should the impedance and the current passing through the VDR will give a volt-
above be considered but also the amount of disruption caused by lost age drop across the device. the p.d. is one of the most important
of corrupt computer data, down time of process / manufacturing plant parameters for a transient suppressor and is called the 'residual volt-
and the likelihood of danger to personnel due to equipment failure. age'.
As you can see it is extremely difficult to accurately assess risk, so the So for the duration of the transient over-voltage, typically 10-20ms,
surge protective device should be given strong consideration when the device operates very quickly to a short-circuit and allows current
designing an installation which supplies any type of electronic or sen- to flow to earth. This has the effect of raising the neutral voltage to the
sitive equipment. same potential as the phase conductor, therefore there is no potential
difference across the load and it is not damaged.
The correct selection of the device and installation method is essen-
tial when deciding the level of protection required and later we will see In practice, a surge protection device may contain more than one VDR
that the choice of surge protective device will depend upon the fol- and they will be configured in various ways between live/neutral,
lowing : live/earth, and neutral/earth so as to protect all earthing options.
1. The type of installation (domestic / commercial etc)
2. The type of earthing system Air Gap technology
3. The level of protection required This type of VSP uses a technology known as air gap. There is a phys-
ical gap between the positive and negative electrodes the gap and
How much voltage cause equipment failure? current the potential is large enough, it will jump across the gap and
The European norm EN60-950 and the BS 7002, requires that equip- current flows. This technology should only be used in an installation
ment manufacturers test their products to susceptibility levels of where a lightning rod is present and forms apart of a building protec-
1.5kV, this means that if a higher voltage appears across the terminals tion system. Because this technology is suitable for very large tran-
then it would most probably be severely damaged or destroyed. sients it leaves a high residual voltage across the installation. It is
therefore essential to cascade this device with other VSP's to ensure
All equipments that complies with these standards ensures that no full protection.
significant damage will occur if a transient over-voltage of upto 1.5kV
is presented across the terminals. As with varistor technology air gap products are also configured in var-
ious ways between Live/Neutral, Live/Earth and Neutral/Earth so as to
How do voltage surge protectors work? protect all earthing options.
To stop large over-voltage transients appearing across equipment, we Important parameters of voltage surge protectors. Below is a list and
can take one of two steps. description of the important parameters that need to be understood
1. Place a very high impedance in series with the equipment load when selecting a transient suppresser.
2. Place a very low impedance in parallel with the equipment load.
Nominal working voltage - Un
Must match the nominal voltage of the supply i.e. 230/400V
Maximum working voltage - Uc max

This is the voltage above which the device is going to start to change
into the suppression mode i.e. in a shunt device, it will start to become
a short-circuit. Uc max must always be equal to or greater than nom-
inal supply voltage.
The most common method used to protect a system is as method B Nominal discharge current rating - In
above, and there are two technologies commonly used.
This is the highest peak current at which the device will work, contin-
Varistor technology ue to accept subsequent transients, and still maintain its design let
through voltage. For testing purposes the devices have to be able to
The device which has been developed for this purpose is the voltage
withstand a minimum of 20 transients at In, the 20th must still main-
dependent resistor (VDR). This device can be manufactured to start
tain a let through voltage of Up. All Hager surge protection devices are
opening when it sees a specific voltage and as most of the transient
tested with over 80 transients at In and still maintain their design spec-
suppressors that we market use this method the following data will be
ification.
based upon the principle.
Maximum discharge current rating - Imax
Europe operates a broadly similar mains voltage range (230V rms
nominal), and as such all VDR's for mains protection are designed to The maximum one-short current the device can withstand. Once it has
operate around this value, allowing for any likely variations (i.e.250V) seen this level of current it will need replacing.
single phase. This means that at 230V we want the suppressor to be
open circuit, but at any voltage greater than 250V the device would Residual voltage - Up
become a short-circuit, when it enters this state it is known as its sup- In the previous section the let through voltage is defined as the volt-
pression mode. age that is measured across the terminals of the device when its oper-
ating in suppression mode. The figure quoted, typically 1.5kV is meas-
Up to its maximum working voltage (250V) the VDR acts as an open ured when the device has its nominal current rating in flowing through
circuit and above its maximum working voltage the device complete- it.
ly changes state and becomes a short circuit. In an ideal situation the
device would have impedance and work effectively no matter how The importance of Up is that the maximum potential difference that will
much current it passes and not break down. However in theory the be seen across the load as long as In is not exceeded.
VDR cannot be a perfect open circuit in one instance, and a perfect
short-circuit in another; this means that there will be some leakage
current through the VDR during normal operation, and some inherent
resistance in the device during voltage suppression. A result of the
internal resistance is that the VDR will have a maximum current limit,
205
From the true characteristics curves of our transient suppressors, we 1.2/50 : a voltage waveform used for devices which are normally open
can ascertain the let through voltage of the device at a specified cur- circuit i.e. spark gap arresters.
rent providing we know the magnitude of the transient. (This is highly A set level of potential must be reached before sparking or flashover
unlikely) occurs.
On some of the devices two values for Up will be stated, as there are
two modes of operation, common mode and differential mode.
Common mode is the let through voltage Up between live conductors

and earth.
Differential mode is the let through voltage Up between live conduc-

tors not between live conductors and earth.
The names are derived from the type of connection i.e. common mode
- because earth is common or relative to the transient, and differential
mode because there is no common conductor, as the transient flow
between live and neutral. 10%
Note : if protection below 1.5kV is required it is worth considering the

relationship between Up and In. The residual voltage will only reach
1.5kV when In is at its maximum. As In rarely reaches its maximum
then Up will usually be less than 1.5kV. also cascading devices can be
considered to give a higher degree of protection. 10/350 : is the resultant current waveform through a spark gap arrester
during a direct lightning strike.
Principle of operation
The principle of operation, when installed in a circuit, is that the device
will act as a short-circuit and divert the excess current to earth. As has
been explained it is essential to reduce the voltage appearing across
the installation to 1.5kV when a transient appears, any added induc-
tance due to cables and connections will cause a rise in voltage
across the load therefore reducing the protection to the equipment.
It is therefore very important that some basic rule are followed when
installing the product to reduce inductance:
1. Shortest cable runs - always use the shortest cable runs to connect
the surge protection device, this will reduce the back e.m.f.
2. Use the thickest possible cable - all cables used in alternating cur-
rent circuits are subject to skin affect, (i.e. the resistance is greater
in the centre of a conductor than around its circumference), there-
fore the larger the diameter cable the less the skin effect.
3. Use multi strand cables - also used to reduce skin effect.
4. Keep cables straight - this will ensure voltage drop, due to induc-
Principle of surge protective devices
tance is kept to a minimum
Equipment will be vulnerable if exposed to greater than 800V.
Test waveforms Therefore our aim is to ensure than the voltage value is maintaining at
Test waveforms are used to simulate the effects of real world tran- 800V or less ( this is further explained under 'cascading')
sients. There are three waveforms, which enable repeat, reliable test-
SPD's work by minimising the potential difference between circuit
ing.
conductors when transient over voltages appear :
8/20 : is a current waveform used for device which conduct on short- They divert transient overcurrents down to earth, thus maintaining
circuit. The first value is the rise time (from 10% to 90% of peak); the voltage levels at reasonable values. This is achieved by connecting
second value is the duration for the test transient to decrease to hal f SPD's to earth in parallel (shunt) and/or in series.
of its peak value.
There are three different operating principles which the hager system
employs to safeguard your equipment.
Class 1
Spark gap arresters are robust devices which pass no current until the
voltage across them increases to a point where flashover occurs. They
can handle large amounts of energy than MOV's but leave a relatively
high residual voltage of approximately 4kV. Test waveforms 1.2/50,
10/350.
Class 2
The metal oxide varistor (MOV) is a robust and inexpensive device
which can pass quite large amount of energy and leave a residual volt-
age of 1.2-1.5kV Test waveforms 8/20. If a class 1 devices is used in
an installation, a class II device must be placed down stream from it to
create a voltage drop across it.
All the class 2 medium devices have replaceable cartridges, and con-
nection is bi-connect i.e. busbar can be used.
206
These devices are to be used in geographic sites that are exposed to upto 65kA leaving a residual voltage of 1.2-1.5kV. These voltage levels
indirect lightning and switching transients. Typically for commercial, are still too high for our sensitive equipment so that the next step is to
rural and domestic application. limit this voltage to 800V. This is achieved with the use class 2 fine
device which have a lower current carrying capacity, but will limit the
Class 3 voltage to 800V.
These devices actively monitor, the AC since wave and have excep-
tionally fast response times (1ns). This limits the amount of let through Cascading increases the current diverting capacity of our SPD system
current. They also eliminated high frequency interference which mini- whilst maintaining a low voltage to ensure the best protection for valu-
mizes the risk of logic failures. Low to medium diverting capacity and able equipment.
excellent residual voltage (Imax upto 25kA, cascade residual voltage
<800V). Main Imax Residual Cascade Final Residual
device voltage device Up (L-PE)
These products are specifically designed for use in multiple tenancies.
SPD X 15D 15kA 1.5kV SPN208 800V
SPD X 40D 40kA 1.5kV SPN208 800V
SPN X 65R 65kA 1.5kV SPN208 800V
transient
overvoltage
can easily
destroy sensi-
tive equip-
ment.
Surge current is allowed to flow through to senstive equipment.
Cascading main protection

Cascading is the term used to describe the method of combining sev-
eral levels of SPD's in the one installation.
fine protection
This takes advantage of the best features of each devices to make an
installation highly secure. In a perfect would do the job. This theoreti-
cal device would have infinite impedance at low voltage levels, zero
impedance at a set voltage and be capable of handling the biggest, normal current
direct strike, of course, no device can do this. flow allowing cor-
rect operation.
As a guideline, it is generally accepted that few electronic devices can
withstand much more than twice the nominal voltage rating. excess current
240V is an RMS value 240x1.414 = 339V peak During transient overvoltage the protective devices divert current.
Plus 10% supply variations ~ 400V
Devices will be vulnerable if exposed to greater than 800V.
Therefore our aim is to ensure that the voltage value is maintained at

800V or less.
Hager recommends using a high current carrying capacity devices to

divert the bulk of the transient overvoltage. In the case of the class 1
& 2 installation this would be either the spark gap arrester or a high
current capacity MOV. The spark gap arrester will divert a surge upto
50kA leaving a residual voltage of 4kV. The MOV's will divert a surge
207
Application and installation Application of SPD's in low voltage power distribution systems.
To successfully protect a system using a surge protector, it is impor- It is important to carry out risk assessment as mentioned above to
tant that certain parameters are establish and basic rules are followed determine the need for SPD protection. Some information's necessary
for correct risk assessment is as follows :
The key parameters are : what is the type of equipment?

a. shortest cable runs cost of the protection devices?

b. use the thickest possible cable what is the risk of downtime?

c. use multi-strand cable is the protected equipment insured?

d. keep the cables as straight as possible is the region exposed to lightning?

is there a lightning rod nearby the installation?
It is also essential that the type of earthing system is establish along
with the number of phases to be protected so that the correct prod- The following are the selection criteria for SPD's:
ucts for the system cab advised.
As you have previously seen lighting can effect the incoming conduc-
Supply Equipment Geographical
tors in many different ways. As a general consideration the surge
Network Characteristics location
arrester must protect between phase(s) and earth(s), neutral and earth
and phase(s) and neutral.
If this is considered along with the earthing system, then the correct
products can be suggested.
Parallel connections
Where connection between the main circuit and the surge protection
1 or 3 Voltage Up Value of Ng
device exceed 1m (i.e. 50cm for each conductor), it is essential that
Earthing system and Nk
parallel conductors are used or cascading is considered. If parallel
Nominal voltage Uo Imax for SPD
conductors are used then they must be bound together. If this is not
done then the voltage rise due to the back emf induced the connect-
ing cables, will appear across the load.
All parallel conductors should be bound in groups with respect to their

phase i.e. if 6x2.5mm2 are required for the red, yellow, and blue phas-
es plus neutrals, then one of each of the 3 phases and neutral con-
ductor should be bound together. Surge protection devices
Insulation testing
Supply network :
VSP's must be disconnected when performing insulation tests.
what is the earthing system (TT, TN-S, TN-C, IT etc)?
SPD standards (SPD classes) the network characteristics (1, 2 or 3 phases, short-circuit current at
point of installation )?
The following are the documentations/drafts for further reference on
The Un (nominal voltage ) of the network
SPD's :
IEC 61643-11 : (class 1, class 2) : Equipment characteristics:
Low voltage surge protection devices - part 11:
the peak voltage Up the equipment to be protected can withstand
Surge protection devices connected to low voltage power
Distribution systems - performance requirements and testing meth- Geographical location:
ods.
Information on keraunic level (Nk) can be obtained from the local
IEC 61643-12 : (class 1, class 2) : meteorological department.
Low voltage surge protection devices - part 12 : The number of lightning flashes per square kilometer Ng can be esti-
Surge protective devices connected to low voltage power distribution mated as Nk/10 or 15.
system s- selection and applicant principles The value of Ng corresponds to a maximum probable current Lmax
which may flow through the lightning arrester.
IEC 61643-21 : low voltage surge protection devices - part 21 :
Surge protective devices connected to telecommunications and sig- Choose SPD with the following parameters
naling networks - performance requirements and testing methods lmax : 15kA for Ng < 1.5
40kA for Ng > 1.5
IEC 61643-22 : low voltage surge protection devices - part22 : Uc 1.1 Uo, between L & N or between L & PE
Surge protective devices connected to telecommunications and sig- (for TT & TN-S systems)
naling networks - selection and application principles : Uo between N & PE
(for TT & TN-S systems)
In addition to above , the following national standards are followed : Uo : 240V
France - NFC 61740/95 (class 1, class 2) : low voltage surge protec- Up : Use Up as low as possible to match equipment to be
tion devices protected. If not possible use Class 2 main
protection cascaded with Class 2 fine protection.
Germany : VDE (class 1 - VDE B), (Class 2 - VDE C) : low voltage surge
protection devices For areas exposed to lightning or installation with lightning rod :
use class 1 products for main entry protection
use decoupling elements if distance between the class 2 main pro-
tection and the class 1 device is less than 10m.
208
Installation of SPD : Installation rules :
Ensure that all loads and SPD are connected to the system Earth
Recommended modes of protection in an installation is dependent on All extraneous conductive parts are bonded with shortest possible
the earthing system of the installation. The tables below shows the length of conductor
possible modes of protection for various LV Systems The SPD should be installed at the point of entry (power supply)
The lead lengths connecting the SPD should be as short as possi-
SPD TT TN-C TN-S IT ble
Between A protective device as per manufacturers recommendation must be
Line and neutral x x x* installed upstream of SPD. If possible, this should be of discon-
Line and PE x x x necting type to allow for easy replacement of cartridges
Line and PEN x Cable runs after SPD should be installed away from the cable
runs into SPD to avoid pollution due to induction
Neutral and PE x x x*
Limit the earth loop
Line and line x x x x
Ensure proper co-ordination in case of cascading
* when the neutral is distributed
TN-C system
S S S
P P P
D D D
TT System
209
Protection against over-voltage Level 3 :
The protection against over voltage covering the whole network is Protection against over-voltages, close to the loads/devices (fine
carried out with a concept of three safety levels. The necessary protection). This is generally integrated in its supply or to the
measures for the realization of the protection of the installations distribution of low voltage.
and the devices are as per the following levels :
These 3 levels are mainly characterized by the current diverting capacity
Level 1 : of SPDs (for example of the lightning) ad by their limiting voltage across
Surge protective device for protection of the main supply of the the load (residual voltage). This residual voltage must be less than
network (main protection) according to the standard IEC 61643-11, this Impulse withstand voltage of the parts of the installation to be
is Type 1 Protection. protected. The levels must naturally complement each other, which
implies that the surge protective devices must be uncoupled from/to
Level 2 : each other. This decoupling causes the protection of devices of weak
protection by a stronger surge protective device. The lines between the
Protection against over-voltages, installed in the low voltage
various levels act as decoupling inductivity.
panels/enclosures (medium protection) according to the standard
IEC61643-11. This is type 2 Protection.
Decoupling can also be carried out by inserted induction coils.
Installation of the customer
With combined surge protective device
210
Installation example
telephone line
general SPD
with plug on
cartridge
sensitive equipment very sensitive equipment class I or class II
Some installation rules for SPDs Distressing of SPD

General SPD protects the whole installation by diverting the Successive discharging of current due to lightning reduces progressi-
lightning current to the earth. Fitted in directly dowstream the vely the performance of SPD s, with the consequence of a possible
type S differential function or delayed for system TT and TN-S. short circuit for the installation.
The cable length L1 must be reduced to less than 0.5m. For this reason, all our SPDs are fitted with an automatic thermic and
The resistance of the earth connection must be weakest possible dynamic disconnection device
(approx. 10 ) and only one is requested by installation.
LED on front indicates the good working of the device :
SPDs SPN 208 and SPN 408S protect very sensitive devices of
class I and class II. for normal version : green = OK red = replacement
for version with reserve indicator : green = OK yellow = caution
A cable length of at least 1m is requested between general and
red = replacement
secondary SPD to ensure a minimum impedance in order to avoid
for version with electric LED for SPDs for fine protection green = OK
the simultaneous bringing into conduction of both SPDs.
LED off = replacement
SPDs SPN 504 and SPN 505 protect analog or digital telephone
lines from very sensitive receivers.
Warranty
Warranty can not be applied for SPDs as their life expectancy depends
Choice of disconnection device on the perturbation level absorbed to protect the electric installation.
The choosen device is an MCB
Selection chart for disconnection device according to the SPD

type
general SPD C1 (1)
SPN 165R 32 A curve C

SPN 265R
SPN 465R
SPD 140D 32 A curve C
SPN 240R - SPD 240D
SPN 440R - SPD 440D
SPN 215R 32 A curve C
SPN 415D
SPN 115D
(1) The breaking capacity of MCB must be choosen according to the
short-circuit intensity at the head of the installation and according to
the number of poles (1,2 or 4)
211
SPDs with plug in cartridge Keying system for fitting of neutral and phase cartridge
Presentation of 1 pole and multi pole SPDs : Neutral plug in cartridges cannot be fitted in slots for phase cartridges
available in two versions : and vice versa
base with an auxiliary contact and cartridges with reserve indicator
base without auxiliary contact and cartridges with end of life LED
On the front of the cartridge, a mechanical LED indicates the state of

SPD
auxiliary contact
with reserve indicator
base Green Orange Red
end of life LED
Green Red
reserve
indicator
end of life
LED
plug in
cartrige
Auxiliary contact for signalling and remote monitoring
auxiliary contact mini 0.5 mm2

connection capacity maxi 1.5 mm2
remote signalling voltage 230 V~ 250 V~
nominal current 1A 0,1 A
2 poles or
4 poles base
Connection diagrams
Single pole SPDs : SPN1xx - SPD1xx Multi pole SPDs : SPN2xx - SPN4xx - SPD2xx - SPD4xx
protection only in common mode protection is assured in both common and differential modes
without adding devices
IT / TN-C TT / TN-S
d1 50 cm
d1 + d2 50 cm
212
Surge protective devices free from arc blower requirement of separate protection when the upstream fuses do not exceed 160A. If
rotection Type 1 these fuses are larger, it is necessary to protect the surge protective
Our surge protective devices Type 1 are able to control strong impulse devices with fuses 160A.
currents according to IEC 61024-1 without melting down. These surge
protective devices correspond to standards VDE and to installation
guidelines of the safety devices against the lightning and the over
voltages. Surge protective devices SP120 and SP320 do not need
Surge protective device SP120 Surge protective device SP320 Surge protective device SP150
references SP120 SP320 SP150 (N-PE)

standards EN 60099/1
IEC 61643-11
construction modular device
number of modules 2 4 2
max. continuous operating voltage Uc 255 V / 50 Hz
follow current interrupting rating if 3 kA 100 A

lightning test current Iimp (10/350 s) 50 kA (1 pole) 100 kA (3 poles) 50 kA (1 pole)
voltage protection level, Up 4 kV
maximum rating of overcurrent protection (fuse) 160 A gL/gG -
short-circuit withstand capacity with backup fuse 50 kA / 50 Hz -
protection degree IP 20
environment :
storage temperature -40C to +80C
working temperature -40C to +80C
insulation resistance 103 M
connection rigid 10 to 50 mm2

flexible 10 to 35 mm2
reponse time 100 ns
213
Technical characteristics of single pole SPDs
references SPN 165R SPD 140D / SPN 140R SPD 115D

installation exposure level (risk) very high medium low
installation of SPDs in parallel in parallel in parallel
nominal voltage Un 230 V~ 230 V~ 230 V~
frenquency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Max. continuous operating voltage Uc 275 V 275 V 275 V
voltage protection level Up 1.5 kV 1.2 kV 1.0 kV
discharge current capacity nominal current In 20 kA 15 kA 5 kA
8/20 s wave maximal current Imax 65 kA 40 kA 15 kA
degree of protection IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Conditional short-ciruit current Icc (with fuse or C curve MCB) 20 kA - 32 A 20 kA - 32 A 10 kA - 32 A
temperature working -20 to + 60C -20 to + 60C -20 to + 60C
storage -40 to + 70C -40 to + 70C -40 to + 70C
end of life indicator - yes yes
reserve indicator + auxiliary contact yes SPN 140R -
domestic building collective/individual yes yes yes
industrial/commercial yes yes yes
earthing systems IT, TN-C IT, TN-C IT, TN-C
max. connection capacity flexible 25 mm2 25 mm2 25 mm2
(Ph, N, E) rigid 35 mm2 35 mm2 35 mm2
screw head PZ2 PZ2 PZ2
Technical characteristics of multipole SPDs
references SPN 265R-SPN 465R SPN 240R, SPN 440R SPD 215D, SPD 415D
SPD 240D, SPD 440D
installation exposure level (risk) very high medium low
installation of SPDs in parallel in parallel in parallel
nominal voltage Un 230/400 V~ 230/400 V~ 230/400 V~
frenquency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Max. continuous operating between Phase / Neutral 255 V 255 V 255 V
voltage Uc between Neutre / PE 275 V 275 V 275 V
protection mode common yes yes yes
differential yes yes yes
voltage protection level Up 1.5 kV 1.2 kV 1.0 kV
discharge current capacity nominal current In 20 kA 15 kA 5 kA
8/20 s wave maximum current Imax 65 kA 40 kA 15 kA
degree of protection IP 20
Conditional short-ciruit current Icc (with fuse or C curve MCB) 20 kA - 32 A 20 kA - 32 A 10 kA - 32 A
working temperature -40C to + 60C
end of life indicator - SPN 240D - SPN 440D SPN 215D - SPN 415D
reserve indicator + auxiliary contact SPN 265R - SPN 465R SPN 240R - SPN 440R -
domestic building collective / individual yes
industrial / commercial yes
earthing systems TT TT TT
TN - S TN - S TN - S
connection capacity flexible 25 mm2
(Ph, N, E) rigid 35 mm2
screw head PZ2
214
Technical characteristics of secondary SPDs (fine protection)
references SPN 208 SPN 408S

installation exposure level (risk) very high medium
installation of SPDs in parallel in parallel
nominal voltage Un 230 V~ 230/400 V~
frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Max. continuous operating between N / PE 255 V 255 V
voltage Uc between Phase and Neutral 255 V 255 V
protection mode common yes yes
differential yes yes
voltage protection level Up 1.25 kV 1.kV
discharge current capacity nominal current In 2 kA 2 kA
8/20 s wave maximal current Imax 8 kA 8 kA
degree of protection IP 20 IP 20
conditional short-ciruit current Icc (with fuse or associated MCB) 6 kA - 16 A 6 kA - 32 A
temperature working -25C to +40C -25C to +40C
storage -25C to +60C -25C to +60C
well functioning indicator green LED green LED
domestic buildings collective / individual yes yes
industrial / commercial yes yes
earthing systems TT, IT, TT, IT,
TN - S TN - S
connection capacity flexible min./mix. 2.5/6 mm2 2.5/6 mm2
(Ph, N, E) rigid min./mix. 6/10 mm2 6/10 mm2
screw head PZ1 PZ1
SPDs SPN 208S and SPN 408S
215
Technical characteristics of secondary SPDs for telephone line
references SPN 504 SPN 505

surge protective device digital line analog line
(Numeris, RNIS, ISDN...)
installation of SPDs in series in series

ingress protection IP 10 IP 10
tension nominale Un 5 V / 40 V 130 V
maximum continous operating voltage Uc 7.5 V / 60 V 170 V
voltage protection level Up 600 V 600 V
voltage protection level common mode yes yes
differential mode yes yes
series impedance 1.0 4.7
discharge current wave In (total) 10 kA 5 kA / 10 kA (RJ 45 / screw)
In (line) 5 kA 2.5 / 5 kA (RJ 45 / screw)
working temperature -40C + 60C -40C + 60C
connection in screw screw / RJ 45
out screw / RJ 45 screw / RJ 45
connection capacity flexible min./max. 0.08 mm2 0.08 mm2
(Ph, N, T) rigid min./max. 2.5 mm2 2.5 mm2
applications digital line, analog line
ISDN, RNIS
SPN 504 SPN 505
216
HRC fuse carriers
Description - climate sealed : T2 Connection capacity
Protection and control of circuits - will accept accessories - L38 (10x38) :
against overloads and short - short circuit resistance with rigid conductors : 25mm
circuits. fuse link 10,3 x 38 mm : flexible conductors : 16mm
80kA 690V~ / - L51 (14x51 ):
Technical data 120kA 500 V~ rigid conductors : 35mm
- sizes : L38, L51 - short circuit resistance with flexible conductors : 25mm
- poles : 1P, 2P fuse link 14x51 mm :
- voltage rating : 500 V AC, 100kA 690V Comply with IEC 60 269-2,
690V AC IEC 60 269-2-1
- current rating : 32 to 50A and IEC 60 947-3
- frequency : 50/60Hz
Description Characteristics Width in Pack Catalogue

17.5 mm qty. No.
L38 fuse carriers single pole 1 12 LS501

690V - 32A two pole 2 6 LS502
compatible with accessories
L51 fuse carriers - compatible with accessories :

690V - 50A single pole 1.5 1 LS601
two pole 3 1 LS602
LS501
217
HRC fuse carriers
Withstand current correction table Microswitch
A - depending on ambient temperature, mounting on L51, single pole or multi pole

B - depending on the proximity heating effect of the fuse carriers
themselves when fully loaded and mounted together in groups.
connection
type L38 L51 with lugs
fuse size 10 x 38 14 x 51 5 mm
c
In for Un 400 V 32 A 50 A
In for Un 500 V 20 A 40 A
A 20 1 1
30 0,95 0,95
40 0,90 0,90
50 0,80 0,80
B 1 - 3 Ph 1 1
4 - 6 Ph 0,8 0,8
7 - 9 Ph 0,7 0,7
> 10 Ph 0,6 0,6
> 10 Ph 0,6 0,6 0,6

Microswitches functions Application
- Fuse melting : a fuse-carrier containing a fuse-link with a striker that

sends out a signal when the fuse element melts
- Pre-cut : when the fuse-carrier opens
- Presence : sends a signal when the fuse-carrier is closed with no
fuse in it
Signal light
Mounting on L 51
Padlocking and sealing of the others fuse carriers

in open position
Padlocking and sealing
LS51 in open position
4,5 mm
218
HRC cartridge fuses
gG type
Description Sizes :
Cylindrical gG fuse-links are L 38 : 10 x 38
intended for industrial L 51: 14 x 51
applications.
gG protection for general Comply with IEC 60 269-1 and
purpose applications against 60 269-2
overload and short-circuits.
Description Voltage In Catalogue No.
Cartridge fuses 500 V AC 0.5A LF300G

type gG 1A LF301G
10 x 38 mm 2A LF302G
breaking capacity: 120kA 4A LF304G
6A LF306G
8A LF308G
LF302G 10A LF310G
12A LF312G
16A LF316G
20A LF320G
25A LF325G
400 V AC 32A LF332G
Cartridge fuses 690 V AC 2A LF402G

type gG 4A LF404G
14 x 51 mm 6A LF406G
breaking capacity: 8A LF408G
2 to 25A : 80kA 10A LF410G
32 to 50A : 120kA 12A LF412G
16A LF416G
20A LF420G
LF425G 25A LF425G
500 V AC 32A LF432G

40A LF440G
45A LF445G
400 V AC 50A LF450G
219
HRC fuse carriers
gG type
Cartridge fuses - gG type
Cut-off characteristics current limitation Time-current characteristics
102
0,5 A
100
125 A 1A
100 A
101 80 A 2A
63 A
50 A
40 A
peak)
(kA peak)
32 A 4A
A)
(A eff)
25 A 101 6A
(RMS
20 A
16 A 12 A 8A
current (kA
10 A
current
10 A 12 A
8A
6A 4A 16 A
valueofofcurrent
current
20 A
25 A
100 32 A
Prospective
2A 40 A
50 A
Prospective
63 A
102 80 A
value
1A 100 A
125 A
Max.
Max.
0,5 A
10-1
103
10-2
10-1 100 101 102 10-2 10-1 100 101 102 103 104 105
Prospective current (kA
Prospective current (RMS kA)eff) Prearcing time (s)
Prearcing time (s)
R
Energy let through chart (A2 s) Rated power dissipation (W)
In prearcing I2t - 400 V I2t - 500 V I2t - 690 V In (A) size size size
time I2t 10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58
0,5 4,0 8,6 10,4 15,0 0,5 1,43 - -
1 6,5 13,2 15,7 22,0 1 2,77 3,90 -
2 7,0 14,6 17,6 25,0 2 0,60 0,90 1,00
4 45 90 108 150 4 0,70 1,00 1,10
6 70 140 166 230 6 0,85 1,15 1,30
8 80 158 188 260 8 0,75 1,00 1,10
10 120 248 297 420 10 1,00 1,30 1,50
12 180 362 431 600 12 1,30 1,70 1,80
16 270 536 636 880 16 1,60 2,00 2,10
20 500 981 1162 1600 20 2,00 2,50 2,70
25 800 1688 2034 2900 25 2,60 3,30 3,30
32 1200 2412 2871 4000 32 2,90 3,50 3,50
40 2500 4907 5808 8000 40 - 4,75 4,00
45 2870 5603 6623 9100 45 - 4,80 -
50 5100 11262 13728 20000 50 - 4,80 5,50
63 7900 16451 19762 28000 63 - - 6,90
80 16000 37242 46000 - 80 - - 7,80
100 28000 68072 85000 - 100 - - 9,00
125 40000 120000 - - 125 - - 11,4
220
vector IP65
enclosures
vector IP65
vector IP65 enclosures

vector range of weather proof enclosures answer the needs of electrical
distribution in dust and moisture prone environment. Equipped with special door
gasket, they maintain high ingress protection (IP65) level of enclosure to protect
modular devices mounted inside.
www.hager.co.in
Photovoltaic solutions
IP65
outdoor vector range
complete & reliable protection for your solar installations
vector enclosures IP65 outdoor 226
Photovoltaic fuse carriers,

SPD and switch disconnectors 227
The vector range
for outdoor use
the outdoor vector range has been developed to endure bad weather for a long period of
time. The mechanical properties of the material used in their manufacture make it possible to
install them in most locations. Designed to resist bad weather, humidity, dust, chemical
aggressions and ultraviolet radiation exposure.

Space from 2 to 54 modules Enclosure made of high grade insulating material, self-
extinguishing, class II
Ease of installation : IP65 VE103-110, IK07 / VE112 318, IK08
- DIN rail adjustable in depth Glow wire test 850C acc. IEC 695.2.1
- Accessories for installing enclosure in specific outdoor Material : polycarbonate, excellent resistance to a large
locations like for example masts variety of chemical substances (saline, acid, hydrocar-
The characteristics and aspects of the material remain unchan- bons, alcohols) and ultraviolet radiation.
ged over the years and perfectly resist to chemical attacks and Compliant with the REACH and RoHS recommenda-
ultra violet exposure tions
Accessories to guarantee optimal IP65 protection grade Compliance to EN60439-3 standard CE certificate
AC / DC applications
224
Expert
tips
Enclosures for outdoor Covered height adjust-
1 applications
Resistance to ultraviolet radia-
tion, immersion in water in
accordance with UL746C
5 ments
Provided in each enclosure to
protect the fixing screws.
Adjustable in depth to correct
the irregularities on a wall (up to
3mm)
Excellent behavior in Adjustable DIN rails
2 tough environments
Usage in a wide scope of tem-
peratures. Dimensional stability
up to 130C. Resistance to frost
up to -25C (IK07 acc. to EN
6 To fit products of different
depth, provided with quick fixing
chassis
60439 below -5C)
No condensation inside Gone through rigorous
3 the enclosure
Special ventilated cable glands
to drain water from condensa-
tion. Guarantees an IP65
protection grade
7 test
Glow wire test, temperature test
at -25C, IK impact test, dust
proof, Yellow card ultraviolet
radiation resistance, chemical
resistance
Product environment profile
Quick and easy installa- Compliance to environ-
4 tion in difficult places

Fixing brackets for wall moun-
ting and plates for fitting on
masts for example in photovol-
taic installations
8 mental recommendations
REACH and RoHS
No use of substances listed as
hazardous by the ECHA (European
Chemical Agency)
225
vector enclosures IP65 outdoor
Surface mounting enclosures Premarked knock outs for IP65 IK07 < 12
with transparent doors bushes or cable glands M20, IK08 > 12
1 to 4 rows from 2 to 48 M25, M32 and M40 on PN
1 to 3 rows from 18 to 54 version; class II
polycarbonate UV resistant out-
Adjustable DIN rail for shoulder door use UL746C, IEC 60 439-3
measurement 47 and 63 mm, colour : light grey RAL 7035
transparent hinged cover for equipment up to 63A Installation: -25C to +100C
(2 to 10) or door (12 to 54), isolation voltage 1000V DC
2 lateral knock outs for cable IEC 60 695-2-10 and
entry or coupling pieces. 60 695-2-11: 850C
Designation Characteristics Cat. ref.

with premarked
knock-outs
Enclosures 3 to 10 modules
1 row, 2 + 1 w. 111 x h. 175 x d. 93 mm VE103PN
1 row, 4 + 2 w. 165 x h. 190 x d. 113 mm VE106PN

VE106SN
1 row, 8 + 2 w. 237 x h. 210 x d. 114 mm VE110PN
Enclosures 12 modules
1 row, 12 w. 310 x h. 302 x d. 151 mm VE112PN
2 row, 24 w. 310 x h. 427 x d. 151 mm VE212PN
3 row, 36 w. 310 x h. 552 x d. 151 mm VE312PN

VE312SN
4 row, 48 w. 310 x h. 677 x d. 151 mm VE412PN
Enclosures 18 modules
1 row, 18 w. 418 x h. 302 x d. 151 mm VE118PN
2 row, 36 w. 418 x h. 452 x d. 151 mm VE218PN
3 row, 54 w. 418 x h. 602 x d. 151 mm VE318PN

VE218SN
Designation Characteristics Cat. ref.
Cable glands M16 VZ016M

M20 VZ020M
M25 VZ025M
M32 VZ032M
M40 VZ040M
Ventilated cable glands M20 VZ020D

M25 VZ025D
M32 VZ032D
Photovoltaic DIN rail terminal 10mm KNX10LH

1000V AC/DC
Closing plate for KXN10LH KW10LH
226
Photovoltaic fuse carriers, SPD
and switch disconnectors
Photovoltaic fuse carriers and - minimum Interrupting : 2 x In Switch disconnectors
fuses (2-3-4A), 1.9 x In (6-8-10-12A), Designed for photovoltaic
DC protection of photovoltaic 1.6 x In (16-20A) applications but fully compatible
strings against overload and to any DC purposes.
short-circuits Connection capacity Contact making and break
rigid conductors : 16mm independent to operator speed.
Technical data flexible conductors : 10mm
- sizes : L38 (10x38) Technical data
- class of operation : gPV (PV Comply with IEC 60269-2, IEC - poles : 4P
fuse) 60269-2-1 and IEC 60947-3 - voltage rating : 1000V DC 21B
- poles : 1P, 2P - current rating : 32A
- voltage rating : 1000V DC for
fuse carriers and 900V DC for Connection capacity
fuses rigid conductors : 16mm
- fuse carriers current rating : flexible conductors : 10mm
32A
- fuses current rating : 2 to 20A Comply IEC 60 947-3
- breaking capacity : 30kA
Description In (A) Characteristics Pack Cat. ref.

qty.
L38 photovoltaic fuse carriers 32 single pole 12 L501PV

1000V DC
32 double pole 6 L502PV
Photovoltaic cartridge fuses 2 10 LF302PV

900V DC
3 10 LF303PV
L501PV 4 10 LF304PV
6 10 LF306PV
8 10 LF308PV
10 10 LF310PV
12 10 LF312PV
16 10 LF316PV
20 10 LF320PV
25 10 LF325PV
32 10 LF332PV
DC switch disconnectors 32 4 poles, 1000 V DC 1 SB432PV
Double pole polarized 25kA, 4kV, class 2 SPV325

surge protection devices with end of life indicator
SB432PV photovoltaic Ucpv 1000V DC
Cartridge for photovoltaic polarized +/- for SPV325 SPV025

SPDs
photovoltaic Ucpv 1000V DC earth for SPV325 SPV025E
SPV025
227
Control & Signaling
power interface
efficient control of electricity
Hager offers control and signaling products to achieve safe & efficient control of electricity within
domestic, commercial and industrial applications. Hager contactors compliments our control and
protection devices. They are commonly used for remote switching of electrical circuits for lighting,
pumps, HVAC and building automation systems.
Indicator lights 232
Push buttons 232
Analogue voltmeters 234
Analogue ammeters 234
Selector switches 234
Current transformers 234
Bells & Buzzers 237
Modular contactors 238
Latching relays 241

SVN
indicators
LED indicators for status indication in electrical networks

LED technology for maintainance free long life Conforms to IEC 60947-1 and IEC 62094-1
Low power consumption LED technology

Superior asthetics Supply voltage - 230/415V AC
Special 3 in 1 indicators
Power consumption - 0.8 watts
Burning hours - upto 100,000 hours
230
Expert
tips
Compact in size & highly Front product labeling
1 functional
saves space
value for money
superior aesthetics
3 for easy circuit identification
Latest LED technology Special 3 in 1 indicators
2 long life, upto 100,000 hours

low power consumption
4 RYB phase indicator in one
module
On-Off-Trip (RGO) in one
module
231
Indicators lights & Push buttons
Indicator lights Technical data-Push buttons Connection
Modular LED indicators for Conforms to 10sq mm rigid cable
visual indication of circuit status IEC 60947 part 5 - 1 6sq mm flexible cable
Modular push buttons for Range - 1 NO, 2 NO, 1 NO + 1
remote actuation of loads NC without indicator IP2X terminal
1 NO & 2 NO with green
Technical data-Indicator lights indicator
Conforms to IEC 62094 - 1
Available in Red, Orange, Features & benefits
Green & Blue color Modular design, fits on 35mm
Triple indicators for RYB & ON- DIN channel
OFF-trip (RGO) in single mod- Very low power consumption
ule LED technology, long life,
Long life of 100,000 burning maintenance free
hours Superior aesthetics with true
True color LEDs with very long colors LEDs
life RYB & On-Off-Trip indicators
2 in 1 indicator for ON-OFF or in one module, saves space &
main-back up supply cost
Single Indicator light green 1 SVN121

red 1 SVN122
orange 1 SVN123
blue 1 SVN124
2 in 1 Indicator light red+green 1 SVN126
3 in 1 Indicator light red+green+orange 1 SVN129

red+orange+blue (RYB) 1 SVN222
SVN222 & SVN129
Latching Push buttons

16 A - 230 V~ without indicator
contact: 1 NO 1 SVN312
contacts: 2 NO 1 SVN332
contacts: 1NO+1NC 1 SVN352
with LED indicator

contact: 1 NO green 1 SVN413
SVN332 contacts: 2 NO green 1 SVN433
232
Indicators lights and Push buttons
Electrical and mechanical characteristics
General features
Part number SVN1... SVN4... SVN3...

Designation Indicator lights Indicator lights Push buttons
+ Push buttons
Indicator lights Push buttons
Standard IEC62094-1 IEC60947-5-1
Light technology LED light
Rated insulation voltage 250V
Rated impulse withstand voltage 4kV (2kV for 12-48V version) 4kV
Operational voltage 230VAC
Frequency 50 Hz
Operational thermal current n/a 16A
Operational current @230V AC12 n/a 16A
Operational current @230V AC14 n/a 10A
LED power 0.8W (230V), 0.33W (48V), 0.8W (24V)
LED consumption 3.45mA (230V), 6.9mA (48V), 3.3mA 9.7mA (48VDC), 4.6mA (24VDC),
(24V) 2.1mA (12VDC)
Conditional short-circuit current n/a 1000A with gl 10A fuse

IP class IP2X
Degree of pollution 3
Connection
Type of connection Cage terminals
Connection capacity with flexible cable 0.75mm2 to 6mm2
Connction capacity with rigid cable 0.75m2 to 10m2
Terminal tightening torque Mini : 1.3Nm ; Max 2Nm : advised 1.65Nm rigid and 1.8Nm
Case material Thermoplastic (Polyamide) comply with IEC 695-2-1
Electric endurance in number of cycles n/a 15000 (AC12); 6000 (AC14)
Mechanical endurance in no. of operations n/a 15000
Life time 100000h
Operating temperature -20 to +50C
Storage temperature -40 to +80C
Protection index IP 20
Height 2000m
Installation
Mounting DIN rail EN50022-35
Mounting position Performance not affected if installed vertically, horizontally or
flat
233
Voltmeters, Ammeters, Selector
switches and Current transformers
Description Technical data Features & benefits
Analog ammeter for current Conforms to IEC 60947-3 Modular device for measure-
measurement Ammeter direct reading - ment of current / voltage
Analog voltmeter for voltage 0 - 30A Fits on 35mm DIN channel
measurement Ammeter CT operated upto
Selector switches ASS & 250A Selector switches
VSS Voltmeters 0-500V AC For ammeter and voltmeter or for
Current transformers for CT Voltmeter accuracy 1.5% circuit selection.
operated ammeters ASS 4 positions with off
VSS - 7 positions with off Connection
CT 50/5, 100/5, 150/5, 1.5 to 10sq mm rigid conductor
250/5 1 to 6sq mm flexible conductor
Voltmeter Accuracy 1.5% 4 SM500

Consumption < 3VA
0-500V
Ammeter direct
0-30A 4 SM030
SM500 CT operated
0-50A 4 SM050
0-100A 4 SM100
0-150A 4 SM150
0-250A 4 SM250
Selector switches Voltmeter selector switch 3 SK602

3 readings between phases
3 readings between phase
and neutral
null position (no reading)
SM030
Ammeter selector switch 3 SK603
4 positions
null position (no reading)
Key selector switch 3 SK606

4 position
10A 400V AC
Current transformers 50/5A SRA00505

100/5A SRA01005
SK602 150/5A SRA01505
200/5A SRA02005
250/5A SRA02505
SRA01005
234
Voltmeters, ammeters
Analogue voltmeter and ammeter Ammeters range
Technical specifications cat. ref. scale reading

Electrical characteristics SM 030 0-30A direct
direct reading voltmeter : 500V for 50/60Hz
direct reading ammeter : 30A SM 050 0-50A via CT/5A
ammeter with CT : CT/5A
consumption : voltmeter <3VA/ammeter <1.1VA SM 100 0-100A via CT/5A
isolating voltage : 2kV
SM 150 0-150A via CT/5A
Environment
working T: 23C 10C accuracy 1.5% SM 250 0-250A via CT/5A
working T: -10C to +50C accuracy 1.5%
storage T: -40C to +70C
Connection capacity
flexible : 1 to 6 mm
rigid : 1.5 to 10 mm
Voltmeters range
cat. ref. scale reading
SM 500 0-500V direct
Electrical connection Electrical connection
CT*
* current transformer
see next page
voltmeter
ammeter
235
Current transformers
- Standard: EN/IEC60044-1 - current rating: 120 %
- Primary rated current: 50 A - 250 A - Rated short time thermal current: Ith = 60 x In (max 50 kA)
- Rated secondary current: 5 A - Rated dynamic current: Idyn = 2,5 x Ith (max 120 kA)
- Rated frequency: 50 - 60 Hz - Permissible ambient temperature: -40 C to + 40 C
- Highest voltage for equipment Um: 720 V - Class of insulation in accordance with IEC 60085: E
- Rated power-frequency withstand voltage (r.m.s.): 3 kV - Degree of protection DIN/EN 60529 / VDE 0470 T1: IP 20
- Instrument security factor (FS): FS 5 - Recommended tightening torque secondary terminals: 1,5 - 2 Nm
- Rated continuous thermal current: 1,2 x In
Current transformers
Reference SRA00505 SRA01005 SRA01505 SRA02005 SRA02505
Busbars 20x10mm,
15x15mm, 20mm 30x10mm, 25x15mm, 20x20mm
Primary Current 50A 100A 150A 200A 250A
Secondary Current 5A 5A
Dimensions 78x60x30mm 70x49.5x30mm
Accuracy Class 1 1
Burden 1.5VA 2.5VA
Range of all CTs
SRA00505 SRA01005 / SRA01505 /

SRA02005 / SRA02505
236
Bells and buzzers
To provide an audio alarm Compact device, only 1 6 sq mm rigid cable
module (17.5mm) 4 sq mm flexible cable
Technical data Can be used to signal events
Rating - 230 V AC like switching ON , OFF
Consumption - 6.5 VA and Tripping of device
Bells - 85 db Fits on 35mm DIN channel
Buzzers - 78 db
Desicription Characteristics Modules Catalogue No.
Bells 230V AC 6.5VA 1 SU213
SU213
Buzzers 230V AC 6.5VA 1 SU215
SU215
237
Contactors
Description Features & benefits Options
For remote switching of power Compact modular design Contact choice
& control circuits Fits on 35mm DIN channel - normally open (NO)
Ideal for use with time - normally closed (NC)
Technical data switches, twilight switches &
Rating - 25A, 40A & 63A PIRs Auxiliary contact
No of poles - 2NO, 1NO+1NC, Day & night contactors with Auxiliary available for 1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC, 3NO, 3NO+1NC, 4 manual override switch for complete range
NO Low power consumption
Utilization category - AC 7A
(for resistive loads)
Coil voltage - 230V AC, 50 Hz
Description Coil Rating Modules Catalogue No.

voltage AC 7A
2NO 230V 50 Hz 25A 1 ESC225

40A 3 ESC240
63A 3 ESC263
1NO+1NC 230V 50 Hz 25A 1 ESC227
2NO+2NC 230V 50 Hz 40A 3 ESC442

63A 3 ESC465
ESC225
3NO 230V 50 Hz 40A 3 ESC340
63A 3 ESC363
3NO+1NC 230V 50 Hz 40A 3 ESC443

63A 3 ESC466
4NO 230V 50 Hz 25A 3 ESC425

40A 3 ESC440
63A 3 ESC463
ESC463
230V 50 Hz 40A 3 ETC440

63A 3 ETC463
Night & day

contactor
Auxiliary contact 2A 1/2 ESC080

(for 1NO+1NC)
ETC463
ESC080
238
Contactors and override contactors
Description Modular contactor and relay Auxiliary contact
Standard conformity EN 61095

Approvals NF - VDE - IMQ - KEMA - RMC / CCC
Contactor Contactor Contactor Accessory
Number of modules 3 0.5
Thermal current Ith (40C) 25A 40A 63A 6A
Rated frequency 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 250V 440V 440V 250V
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 4kV 4kV 4kV 4kV
Protection degree 2 2 2 2
Rated operating currents and power ratings in AC
AC-1 / rated operational currents Ie 25A 40A 63A -
AC-7a rated operational 230V 4.6kW 7.3kW 11.6kW -
power 400V - 22kW 35kW -
AC-3 / rated operational currents Ie 8.5A 25A 32A -
AC-7b rated operational 230V 880W 2.6W 3.3W -
power 400V - 7.8kW 10kW -
AC-12 rated operational currents at 230V - - - 6A
AC-15 rated operational currents at 230V - - - 2A
Mechanical and electrical endurances

Mechanical endurance nr of 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000
operations
Electrical endurance at Ie AC7a nr of 60,000 60,000 60,000 60,000

(AC12 for aux contacts) operations
MCB protected short-circuit withstand

Prospected short-circuit rms 3kA 3kA 3kA 1kA
current
Associated protection MCB MCB MCB 6A 10x38 gG fuse or

C25-6kA C40-10kA C63-10kA mcb
Power dissipation
Power dissipation per current path 1.5W 3.2W 5W 0.4W
Magnetic system for eco and standard contactor
Pick-up 7.4VA 60VA 60VA -
Coil consumption 1.8VA 7VA 7VA -
Closing delay 25ms 25ms 25ms -
Opening delay 15ms 20ms 20ms -
Connection
Main contact rigid 1...10mm2 4...25mm2 4...25mm2 1...6mm2
cable section flexible 1...6mm2 4...16mm2 4...16mm2 1...6mm2
Main contact type M3.4 M5 M5 M3.4
connection screw posidrive PZ2 PZ2 PZ2 PZ2
max. tight. torque 1.2Nm 2Nm 2Nm 1.2Nm
Coil connection rigid 1...10mm2 1...10mm2 1...10mm2 -

cable section flexible 1...6mm2 1...6mm2 1...6mm2 -
Coil connection type M3.5 M4 M4 -
screw posidrive PZ2 PZ2 PZ2 -
max. tight. torque 1.2Nm 1.5Nm 1.5Nm -
Working temperature
-10C to +50C
Storage temperature
-40C to +80C
239
Choice of contactors
Choice of contactors
The choice of contactor is based on many factors: Heating applications
- type of the load supplied, The choice of the contactor is based on the electrical heating load,
- nominal current of the load, and the targeted life time.
- operating voltage,
- number of operations,
etc..
The contactors are AC7-a (resistive load) and AC7-b (inductive load)
approved.
Single phase Three phase supply
Number of operations 60,000 100,000 150,000 300,000 600,000

Maximum load* 230V 16A 3.0 2.5 1.9 0.8 0.7
in kW 25A 4.6 4.0 3.0 1.3 1.0
40A 7.3 6.3 4.7 2.2 1.6
63A 11.6 10.0 7.5 3.5 2.5
400V 16A 8.9 8.0 5.8 2.8 2.0
25A 13.8 12.0 8.6 4.3 3.0
40A 22.0 18.5 14.3 6.3 5.0
63A 35.0 30.0 22.6 10.2 7.6
* On three phase configuration the maximum load per phase Example:

corresponds to the values states divided by 3. Function of a heating installation 200 days/annum, 75 operations
per day (1 opening + 1 closing = 2 operations)
Mechanical life = 10 years
Total number of operations: 200 x 75 x 10 = 150,000
in that case, depending on the type of circuit, select a contactor 40A
230V to control a load of 4.7 kW, or a contactor 16A 400V to control
a load up to 5.8 kW.
Motor applications (AC7-b equivalent to AC3)

Single phase 230V Three phase 400V
R R
Y B
Contactor rating Control diagram

2P 230V single phase 3P 400V three phase
Maximum power for the motor 16A 0.57 kW 1.7 kW
25A 0.88 kW 2.65 kW
40A 2.6 kW 7.8 kW
63A 3.3 kW 10 kW
Influence of working temperature: Adjacent fitting:

Derating factor between 40C and 50C : 0.9 It is necessary to put a heat dissipation insert (reference LZ060)
Example: heating with convector between each 3 products, or each humfree contact.
The maximum load of ESC225 is 4.6kW for 60,000 operations
and for a temperature <40C.
between 40C and 50C, the load is 4.6 x 0.9 i.e. 4.14kW
240
Latching relays
Operates loads on impulse Used for controlling loads with 10 sq. mm. flexibles
signal multiple control points for ex- 6 sq. mm. rigid
warehouse or long corridors
Technical data Very useful for application like
Rating - 16A staircase light management
No of poles - 1NO, 2NO, Can be used in hotel rooms for
1NO+1NC, 4NO, 2NO+2NC controlling lights from multiple
Utilization category - AC 1 (for points
resistive loads)
Coil voltage - 230V AC, 50Hz
Latching relays 1NO

16A-230V 1 EPN510
Coil Voltage: 230 VAC
1NO + 1NC
16A-230V 1 EPN515
EPN 510 2NO

16A-230V 1 EPN520
2NO + 2NC
16A-230V 2 EPN525
4NO
16A-230V 2 EPN540
EPN 540
241
Latching relays
EPN510 EPN525
EPN515 EPN240
EPN520
Coil in AC
voltage rating 230V 230V
tolerance +10/-20% +10/-20%
frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
start consumption 25VA 55VA
Coil in DC
voltage rating 110V 110V
tolerance +10/-20% +10/-20%
start consumption 12VA 25w
Contacts
max. perm. Current AC1 16A 16A
voltage 250V AC 250V AC
electrical endurance 150 000 operations 150 000 operations
mechanical endurance 500 000 operations 500 000 operations
ohmic loss per current path 1.2W 1.2W
minimum duration of impulse 50 ms 50 ms
maximum time under voltage 1H 1H
push button with signal lamp
without condensator 6 (1mA / lamp) 6 (1mA / lamp)
push button with signal lamp
with condensator = 1uF parrallel * 10 (1mA / lamp) 10 (1mA / lamp)
push button with signal lamp with
condensator = 2.2uF parrallel * 44 (1mA / lamp) 44 (1mA / lamp)
ingress protection IP20 IP20
working temperature -5 to +40C -5 to +40C
storage temperature -40 to 80C -40 to 80C
Connection
flexible 6 mm2 6 mm2
rigid 10 mm2 10 mm2
242
Latching relays
The following table shows the number of lamps which can be connected per phase at 230V 50Hz.
Incandescent lamps
230V lamps with and
without halogen
load : 40W 60W 75W 100W 150W 200W 300W 500W 1000W
number : 45 30 24 18 12 9 5 3 2
Low voltage halogen
load : 20W 50W 75W 100W 150W 300W
number : 70 28 19 14 9 3
Fluorescent lamps
uncompensated
load : 15W 18W 30W 36W 58W
number : 29 25 25 24 14
Parrallel compensation
load : 15W 18W 30W 36W 58W
number : 27 27 25 25 16
C total max(a) : 121F 121F 112F 112F 72F
Two lamp circuit,
series compensation
load : 2x18W 2x20W 2x36W 2x40W 2x58W 2x65W
number : 40 40 22 22 12 12
C: 2.7F 2.7F 3.4F 3.4F 5.3F 5.3F
load : 18W 36W 58W
number : 30 28 15
Two lamp circuit with electronics
power supply units
load : 2x18W 2x36W 2x58W
number : 15 13 8
Fluo compact uncompensated
load : 7W 10W 18W 26W
number : 50 45 40 25
Fluo compact electronic power
supply unit
load : 11W 15W 20W 23W
number : 80 60 50 40
High intensity discharge
metal halogen lamps,
uncompensated
load : 50W 80W 125W 250W 400W
number : 11 9 7 3 2
Metal halogen lamps,
parrallel compensation
load : 50W 80W 125W 250W 400W
number : 9 8 6 3 2
C total max(a) : 63F 58F 60F 54F 50F
High pressure sodium vapour
lamps, uncompensated
load : 70W 150W 250W 400W
number : 9 5 3 2
High pressure sodium vapour
lamps, parrallel compensated
load : 70W 150W 250W 400W
number : 5 3 2 1
C total max(a) : 60F 54F 64F 50F
(a) : these values must not be exceeded
243
Latching relays auxiliaries
Auxiliaries for centralised Auxiliary contact Connection latching relay +
control A remote signalling can be auxiliary
The EPN 050 allows the centrali- realised with the auxiliary contact Several auxiliaries can be
sed control of several light EPN 051. combined with the latching relay.
sources which can be turned on
or off simultaneously. The sepa- Auxiliary for control by Connection
rate switching by pushing the maintained contact 10 sq. mm - rigid cables
pushbuttons, which are connec- When control devices with per- 6 sq. mm - flexible cables
ted with the latching relay, manent impulse are externally
remains possible. driven, e.g. time switches or limit
switches, an impulse control
The EPN 052 allows an overall directly to the latching relay s
central control of individual cen- coil is possible with the auxiliary
tral on/off EPN 050. contact EPN 053.
Auxiliary for 24 to 230V AC 1/2 EPN050

centralised control
EPN 050
Auxiliary contact 2A - 230 V AC 1/2 EPN051
EPN 051

multi levelled
centralised control
EPN 052

control by
maintained contact
EPN 053
244
Auxiliaries for latching relays I
Auxiliaries for latching relays Installation of the auxiliaries
EPN050 EPN051 EPN052 EPN053 2

voltage rating (a) - (a)
24 to 230V AC
12 to 110V DC
nominal load - 2A/250V AC -
lmin/230V AC - 15mA -
working temperature -5 to +40 C
storage temperature -40 to +80 C
Connections : flexible 6 mm2
rigid 10 mm2 3
1
(a) : according to a latching relay connected with an auxiliary
4
4
Application diagram
centralised command (EPN050 - EPN052)
Ph
N
general
OFF ON centralised
command
local local local local

command command command command
EPN050 EPN050 EPN050 EPN050
EPN052 33 33
31 11 11 31 11 11
A1 1 3 A1 1 3 A1 1 3 A1 1 3
A2 2 4 A2 2 4 A2 2 4 A2 2 4
32 14 14 32 14 14
ON OFF ON OFF
34 12 12 34 12 12
group EPN052 group

centralised centralised
command command
Remote signalling (EPN051) Maintained command (EPN053)
Ph Ph
N N
23
11
21
A1 1 3
A1 1 3
A2 2 4
A2 2 4
12
22
14
24
245
Energy and lighting
Innovative solutions for
efficient use of energy
Hager offers innovative solutions for efficient use of available resources to keep energy consumption at
lowest with higher control, comfort and convenience to users. Hager s lighting control devices are
totally unique and provides real benefits to end users.
Time switches 250
Twilight switches 256
Presence & movement detectors 262
LED Floodlight 273
Dimmers 281
Time lag switch 283
Energy meters 293

Digital
time switch
Digital time switches are used in residential, commercial
and industrial premises to improve comfort and save
energy by switching loads automatically as per real time

Easy programming using keypad on product or using Lithium battery with 5 yr backup
programming software
16A AC1 changeover relay
Backlit LCD display for reading the programming in low
illuminated areas Programming via software EG003U
Programming of impulses helps in applications like school 56 programming steps

bells, watering of plants, defrosting refrigerator
300 programming steps for yearly time switch
Holiday mode helps keeping the loads OFF for a
pre-defined duration Impulse programming from 1 sec. to 30 mins
Time switches can be programmed without power supply Permanent overrides ON/OFF
10 sub programs for yearly version
248
Expert
tips
Large LCD display for Programming on the
1 better visualisation
backlit display for easy reading
in less illuminated areas 3 product without power supply
Protective cover Spare USB key
2 for protecting the LCD from

mechanical shocks and
scratches 4 for storing programs from PC
to time switches and vice
versa
249
Analogue time switches
Description Manual override function : Minimum switching time :
Time switches improve com- For EH011 : 15 min for daily version din rail
fort by switching loads - automatic mounted
automatically as per real time - permanent ON 20 min for daily version wall
Helps in saving energy For EH111 : mounted
- automatic 2 Hour for weekly version wall
Applications - permanent ON mounted
Residential, commercial & - permanent OFF
industrial premises For EH711 Operating voltage :
To control lighting, heating -automatic 230V ~ 50 Hz
Household appliances -permanent ON
Shop windows -permanent OFF Connection :
1 to 4mm for 1M
Technical data For EH771 1 to 6mm for 3M
Conforms to IEC 60730 -automatic
Programming by captive -permanent ON Features & benefits
segments -permanent OFF Battery reserve of 200 hrs.
Easy time setting
Sealing of cover to avoid
unwanted modifications
Possibility of manual override
1 channel, daily dial 1 NO 16A - 230V AC1 1 EH011

with battery reserve 1 module device
of 200 hours after being
connected for 120 hours
1 changeover contact 3 EH111
16A - 230V AC1
3 module device
EH111
1 channel, daily dial 1 changeover contact - EH711

din rail / wall mounted 16A-230V AC / wall mounted
with battery reserve upto
200 hours after being
EH711
1 channel, weekly dail 1 changeover contact - EH771
din rail /wall mounted 16A-230V AC / wall mounted
with battery reserve upto
200 hours after being
250
Analogue time switches
Technical specifications
EH 011 EH 111 EH 711 EH 771
Width in 17.5mm 1 3 Wall Mount Wall Mount
Version daily daily daily weekly
voltage supply 230V +10/-10% 230V + 10% - 15% 230V + 10% - 15%
frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
consumption 0.5VA 0.5VA 0.5VA
output 1NO 1 changeover 1 changeover 1 changeover
Switching capacity
AC1 16A/250V 16A/250V 16A/250V
inductive load (cos phi = 0.6) 4A/250V 3A/250V 3A/250V
incandescent lamps 900W 1000W 1000W
Characteristics
technology Quartz Quartz Quartz
dial 24 hours 24 hours 7 days
min. switching 15 min 20 min 2 Hour
max. number of switching 96
accuracy +/- 1 sec per day +/- 1 sec per day +/- 1 sec per day
supply failure reserve 200 hours 200 hours 200 hours 200 hours
reached in 120 hours 120 hours 120 hours 120 hours
manual override auto/ON auto/ON/OFF auto/ON/OFF auto/ON/OFF
Environment
ingress protection IP20 IP20 IP20
working temperature -10C to +55C -10C to +50C -10C to +50C
storage temperature -20C to +60C -20C to +60C -20C to +60C
connection 1 to 4 mm2 1 to 6 mm2 1 to 6 mm2
Ph
N
EH 111 Electrical connections Simple time setting and programming using dual direction dial
EH 111 EH 711 EH 771

Programming by
captive segments
EH 011
electrical connections
251
Digital time switches
Time switches improve com- Conforms to IEC 60730 Large backlit display
forts by switching loads Operating voltage : 230V ~ 50 Protective cover for LCD
automatically as per real time Hz display
Helps in saving energy Connection : 6 for EG103E Easy programming on the
(screws) product
1 to 2.5mm for EG293B (quick 20, 56, 300 (yearly) program-
connect) ming steps
Programmable via PC &
software (EG003U)
5 years battery reserve
Yearly programming cycle
1 channel weekly program capacity : 56 program steps 2 EG103E

delivered with USB key EG005 1 changeover contact
16A - 230V AC1
with "holiday" function
impulse function
programming via software
or using local keypad
EG103E
2 channel yearly program capacity : 300 program steps 4 EG293B
2 changeover contacts
10A - 250V AC1
with "holiday" function
10 sub programs
programming through software
or using local keypad
252
Digital time switches
EE 180 EE 181 EG 103E EG 293B
Width in 17.5mm 2 2 2 4
Version astro astro weekly yearly
voltage supply 230V +15/-15%
50/60Hz
consumption 3VA 3VA 6VA 2 VA
output changeover contact
Switching capacity
AC1 16A
incandescent lamps 2300W 1500W
Characteristics
accuracy +/- 1.5 sec per hr 0.2 sec/day
supply failure reserve Lithium battery 5 years
manual override permanent ON/OFF
temporary ON/OFF
Environment
ingress protection IP20
working temperature -10 to +55C -5 to +45C -10 to 45C
storage temperature -20 to +60C -20 to +70C -20 to 70C
connection 0.5 to 4mm
Electrical connections
Display :
EG 110 1. Time
2. Ouput contact (ON or OFF)
3. Program selected
Buttons :
4. To select the program to
apply
5. To scroll program steps
6. Reset
7. + and - : change time
settings
Display :
EG 170
1. Time
2. Circuit status (ON or OFF)
3. Day of the week (1=Monday,
2= Tuesday,...)
Buttons :
4. Mode selector : to select
one of the following modes :
- time setting
- programming
- running mode
- manual override
5. 1 to 7 : selection of the
days
6. ON/OFF : chooses whether
the circuits is ON or OFF.
EG 293B
7. + and - : changes settings
8. enter : to confirm selection
9. reset
253
Astronomical time switches
Description Features & benefits Programming via the PC
The hager range is composed of Programming of the lighting software and the associated
two Astronomical time switches interruption interface (EG003)
EE180/EE181 Automatic change of winter / Weekly program
summer time
Technical data Astro program and expert
Supply voltage 230V AC 15% program with individual Astro
Power consumption : max. 6 VA program steps
Max. load 16A AC1 Programming for day or group
Galvanic insulation between of days
power supply and output Anticipation ON
Output (EE180): 1 changeover Maintained ON
voltage free contact Temporary overrides
(EE181): 2 changeover voltage
free contact
Astro time switch 1 channel capacity: 56 program steps 2 EE180

230V 50Hz
Astro time switch 2 channel capacity: 56 program steps 2 EE181

230V 50Hz
EE180
PC programming Kit for EE180, EE181, EG003U
EG103E, EG293B
EG005 Spare USB key for EE180, EE181, EG103E EG005
Spare USB key for EG293B EG007
254
Technical data
Technical data EE180 (1 channel) EE181 (2 channels)
Technical data EE180 (1 channel) 2 EE181 (2 channels)
astronomical
Technical
astronomical time switches
Width in specifications
17.5mm
2
astronomical time
Width in
Supply voltagetime switches
switches
17.5mm
2
230V 2
AC (+10% / -15%), 50/60Hz
Supply voltage
230V AC (+10% / -15%), 50/60Hz
Astronomical time switches
Number of output 1 2
EE180 (1 channel) EE181 (2 channels)
Number of output
Characteristics 1 2 16A AC1 250V /10A cos = 0,6
Width in 17.5mmof relay 2 change over contact 2
Characteristics of relay change over contact 16A AC1 250V /10A cos = 0,6
incandescent
Supply
Technical voltage
Technical
Technical
specifications
specifications
specifications 230V 2300W
AC (+10% / -15%), 50/60Hz
incandescent
230V-halogen
Number of output 2300W
2300W
1 EE180 (1 channel) 2EE181 (2 channels)
230V-halogen
Characteristics
Connection
Width in 17.5mm of relay EE180
2300W
EE180
EE180
change (1(1channel)
over
(1 channel)
EE180
2terminal(1 channel)
channel)
contact
n 5 EE181 EE181
EE181
216A AC1
EE181
(2(2channels)
(2 channels)
channels)
250V
(2 /10A cos = 0,6
channels)
Width
ConnectionWidthin inin17.5mm
17.5mm
17.5mm 22
terminal n 5 22
Width inWidth
incandescent
flexible 17.5mm
Supply voltage 2230V
2 2300W1 to ACAC
6mm (+10%2 / 2
-15%),2 50/60Hz
Supply
Supply
Supply voltage
voltage
voltage 230V
230V
230V (+10%
AC(+10%
AC (+10% // /-15%),
-15%),
-15%), 50/60Hz
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
rigid voltage
Supply
flexible Number of output
230V-halogen 230V 1
1AC
2300W1,5to(+10%
6mm
to 10mm /2 -15%),
2 250/60Hz
Number
Numberof
Number of output
ofoutput
output 111 22
2
Number
rigid
Connection of output
Characteristics of relay change
1 terminal over
1,5 tonover10mm contact
2
5 contact 16A 16A
2 AC1 250V /10A cos = 0,6
Environment
Characteristics
Characteristics of
ofrelay
relay change
changeover overcontact
contact16A AC1
16AAC1
AC1250V250V
250V/10A cos===0,6
cos
/10Acos 0,6
0,6
flexible
Characteristics
Characteristics
incandescent
Environment of relay relay
of change
change over2contact 16A AC1 250V /10A/10A
2300W
1 to2300W
6mm cos =0,6
storage incandescent
temperature
incandescent
incandescent -20C
2300W
2300W to +60C
incandescent 230V-halogen 2300W 2300W
rigid
storage temperature
230V-halogen
230V-halogen 1,52300W
to 10mm
-20C
2300W to2+60C
working230V-halogen
230V-halogen temperature
Connection 2300W 2300W
-10C to
terminal n 5 +55C
Environment
working Connection
Connection terminal
terminal n
n 5+55C
5
Connection
IP and IKtemperature
Connection
flexible terminal 1-10C
terminal
IPton206mm 5 IK
to
n25
3
storage flexible
temperature
flexible
flexible -20C1 11to
to 6mm
to
toto
6mm 6mm 2
+60C
22 2
IP and
flexible
Standards IK
rigid 1 to 6mm2 IP
1,5
CEtoto20 IK
10mm
+10mmCTICK 3 and CEI 60-669
working rigid
rigid
rigid temperature -10C 1,5
1,51,5 toto+10mm 10mm
+55C
2
22
Standards
rigid Environment 1,5 to CE 10mm2 CTICK and CEI 60-669
IPFunctional
Environment
Environment
Environment
andEnvironment
IK
storage
characteristics
temperature IP 20 -20CIK 3to +60C
Functional
display storage
LCD
storage characteristics
temperature
temperature -20C
without
-20Cto to +60C
backlighed
to+60C
+60C screen
Standardsstorage temperature
working temperature CEC -20C
-10C
+ CTICK to +55C
and CEI 60-669
storage
displaytemperature
LCD
working temperature -20 to
without
-10C +60 to Cbacklighed
+55C screen
operating working
working
IP and reserve
IK temperature
temperature -10C
Lithium
-10C
IP 20 to
IKto3 +55C
battery
+55C 5 years
Functional
working characteristics
temperature -10 CIPto +55 C
IP
operating
IP and
IPandand IK
reserve
IKIK IP IP 20
Lithium
20 IKIK
20+1,5s/day
IK 3
3 battery
3 5 60-669
years
precisionStandards CE
+/- CTICK and CEI
IPdisplay LCD
and IKStandards
Standards characteristics
IPwithout
20CE IK backlighed
3 CTICK
CE+++1,5s/dayCTICKand and screen
CEI
andCEI 60-669
CEI60-669
60-669
precision
Standards
Standards
Functional
programming key
CE +/- CTICK
yes battery
+ CTICK
CELithium and CEI 60-669
operating reserve
Functional
Functional characteristics
characteristics 5 years
Functional
display
programming LCD characteristics
key without
yes backlighed screen
Functional
automatic
precision displaycharacteristics
change
displayLCD LCD
LCD of +/-without
1,5s/day
without backlighed
withoutbacklighedbacklighed screen
screen
display
operating reserve Lithium battery screen
5 years
automatic
display LCD
programming
operating
winter/summer
operatingchange
key reserve
timeof
reserve without
yesLithium backlighed
Lithium
yes1,5s/day
Lithium battery
battery screen
55 years
years
operating
precision reserve +/- battery 5 years
operating
automatic reserve
winter/summer
precision
change
precision time
of Lithium +/-battery
yes
+/- 1,5s/day
1,5s/day 5 years
functions
precision available
programming keyin free +/-
yes 1,5s/day
precision programming
functions available
programming key
keyinoffree +/- 1,5s/day
yes
yes
winter/summer
programming
automatic
programming timekey
change yesyes
programming automatic key change
automatic change ofof yes weekly programming / permanent override / temporary override
programming
functionsautomatic change
available intime
winter/summer
Astrowinter/summer
functions
of
free weekly
yes programming / permanent override / temporary override
automatic change of time
winter/summer time yes
yes
Astrowinter/summer
programming
astro
winter/summer
functions
functions
mode time
timein free
available
yes yes
yes
weekly programming / permanent override / temporary override
independent programming
functions
functions
functions available
availablein
available ininfree
free
free
Astro programming weekly programming / permanent override / temporary override
astrofunctions
functions mode
available in free
programming yes
weekly programming / independent
permanent programming
override
programming
programming
Astro functions weekly programming
weekly programming / permanent / for eachoverride
permanent channel
override// /temporary
temporary override
temporaryoverride
override
astro mode
programmingAstro
Astro functions
functions
yes
weekly programming / independent
permanent for each programming
channel
override / temporary override
programming
Astro of
functions
astro mode the lighting yes independent programming
Astro functions
astro
programming mode
astromode
mode of the lighting yes
yes for each channel
independent
independent programming
programming
astro
interruption yesyes (if channel ASTRO) independent
for each channelprogramming
programming
astro mode
interruption of the lighting yes yes (if channel for each channel programming
for
for
ASTRO) independent
each
each channel
channel
programming
temporary override of the lighting 15 / 30 / 60min.
programming ofofthe
the lighting
interruption
programmingof
programming
interruption
temporary override
lighting yesyes
thelighting (if channel
15 (if
/ 30 channel
/ 60min.ASTRO) for each channel
ASTRO)
maintained
programming
temporary of ON
interruption
the
interruption
override
interruption lighting 15 /
yes
adjustment
yes
yes
30 (if(if
(if / channel
channel
60min.
channel
common
ASTRO) to the 2 channels
ASTRO)
ASTRO)
temporary
maintained ON override 15 / 30 / 60min.common
adjustment to the 2 2 channels
channels
anticipation
interruption
maintained ONON
temporary
temporary
temporary
maintained
override
override
override
ON yes adjustment
15
(if15
15
adjustment / 30
channel
/ /30
adjustment
/ 60min.
ASTRO)
30/ /60min.
60min.
common common
common totothetheto22 the
channels
channels
anticipation
temporary maintained ON
override
maintained
maintained ON
ON 15 / 30 adjustment
adjustment
/ 60min.
adjustment common
common
common toto theto
the 22 the 2 channels
channels
channels
anticipation ON ON
anticipation ON adjustment
adjustment
adjustment common
common
commonto to the
tothethe222channels
channels
channels
maintained anticipation
anticipationON
anticipation ONON adjustment
adjustmentcommon
ON adjustment
adjustment common
commonto
common to
to the
tothe 222channels
the2
the channels
channels
anticipation ON adjustment common to the 2 channels
Electrical connection Presentation
Presentation
Electrical
Electrical
connection
connection
Electrical
Electrical
connection
connection Presentation
Presentation
Presentation
Presentation
Presentation
Presentation
EE180
EE180 : 1:: 11channel
channel
Ph
Ph EE180
EE180:EE180
EE1801 :channel
EE180
EE180
1 :channel
1
channel
: :1channel
1channel
channel Keys
Keys:
Ph
Ph
PhPh
Keys:
Keys: Keys:
Ph Keys:
Keys: menu : :selection
menu selectionofofoperating operatingmode mode
Keys:
menu menu

auto
menu
: selection
menu:::selection
auto menu
selection
:modemode ofofof
: selection
ofof :operating
running
running selection
operating
operating mode
according
according
ofaccording mode
operating
of operating
mode toto the
mode
the mode
program
program
auto
auto
auto
auto

:: :mode
mode
mode
selected.
selected.
: mode
selected.
ofofrunning
menu
auto
of running
of
: selection
running mode according of to
of running
according
running according
toto the
operating
the program
theprogram
program
according modeto th
to the program
prog
prog : selected.
:selected.
newnew for
auto
for programming
: selected.
mode
programming ofmode.
running according
mode. to th
prog
prog::::new
prog
prog newnewselected.
modif for
for
for programming
programming
toprogramming
modify anfor
selected. mode.
mode.
existing
mode. program. mode.
prog
prog : modif prog to :
modify new an programming
existing program.
prog ::::modif
prog
prog modif : new
modif
checking to
to modify
for
tomodify
modify
of the
new
an
programming existing
anexisting
program.
an program.
existingprogram.
fordate programming
mode.
program.
mode.pro
prog :checking
checkingprog
checking
::::checking: modif
modification of
of
ofof :the
to
the
modif
the
the
of program.
modify
time,
program.
toan
program.
program. modify
existing
and selection anprogram.
existing
of progwinter:of
modification
:: :modification
modification
modification
the
: checking modif
/checking
of of
of time,
time,
time,
summer
of
time, to
date
thedatedate modify
dateof
time
program. and
and
and the
and an existing pro
program.
selection
selection
selection
selection
of
of the
ofthe
change the
:the winter
winter
winter
mode
modification
winter ://checking
summer
modification
/summer
summer
/summer of time,time
timeof date
time
time the program.
of time, date and s
and selection
change
astro:change change
change
astronomical mode
mode
mode
mode : ofmodification
mode the winter of / timetime, date
summer time and s
astro:
of the winter / summer
astro:
astro
astro: :astronomical
astronomical
astronomical
: astronomical
indicates
change that mode mode
mode
the
of
modemode
change channel
the winter
mode is in/astronomical
summer time
:: :indicates
astro::indicates
indicates
mode
indicates
astro:
that
that
that
astronomical that the
thethe channel
the
change channel
astronomicalchannel
channel
mode
isisin
is
mode
inin astronomical
astronomical
isastronomical
in astronomical
mode
EE181 : 2 channels mode
mode
mode
+and- : mode
navigation astro:
: indicates or astronomical
setting of
that the channel values. mode
Ph
L EE181
EE181:: :222channels
channels
channels : indicates that theischannel in astronomical
is in as
LNL
Ph
L Ph
Ph
EE181 +and-
+and-+and-::::navigation
A+and- navigation
:in navigation
navigation
auto
mode mode,or
or setting
:orsetting
or setting
setting
selection
indicates
mode
ofofof
of values.
values.
values.
of
values.
that overrides,
the channel is in as
N
NN EE181 : 2 :channels A
AbA :
: :inin
or auto
inauto mode,
automode,
waivers mode, . mode selection
selectionofof
selection
selection of overrides,
ofoverrides,
overrides,
overrides,
EE181 2 channels
EE181 : 2 channels b +and- :waivers
navigation or settingorofsetting values. of values.
Ph
L Ph
L bb or
or waivers
+and-.. .: navigation
waivers.
orwaivers
N EE181 : 2 channels okA : to:validate
ok :
to validate
in
A+and- flashing
autoflashing
:: mode,
navigation
flashing
in auto
information
selection
information
mode, or onon
of
setting display.
overrides,
of values.
display.
selection of over
N
Ph
L
ok
okok :: :to
to to validate
validate
validate flashing
flashing information
information
information on
on display.
ondisplay.
display.
N 1 3 5 7
b : :totoreturn return
or
A
b totothe
waivers : the
in
or
previous
previous
.
auto
waivers mode, step.selection of over
step.
.
1 13 35 57 7
1 3 5 7
:: to
:to return
toreturn
returnto to the
tothe previous
theprevious
previousstep. step.
step.
EE181
You may okreturn
may return :bto validate
into auto
or waivers
flashing
modeatat
.
information
any moment on display.
EE181
EE181
EE181 EG005 You
You
You
using
using may
may
menu.
menu.

return
returninto
into
ok
into
auto
auto
intoauto auto
: tomode
mode
validate
mode at
any
any
atanyany
moment
flashing
moment
information
momentinformation
1 3 5 7 EG005
EG005
EG005 You
using
may
menu.
menu.
return ok : tomode validate
: to return to the previous step. at flashing
moment
Ifusing menu.
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
2 24 46 68 8
using no action is taken for: to 1 min, return to thereturns
the switch previous into step.
1 3 52 74 6 8
EE181 If
Ifauto
auto
no
IfIfno
no action
action
noaction
You
action
mode. is
isisistaken
taken
taken
taken for
for
for :11to
for
may return into auto mode at any moment
mode.
return
min,
1min,
1min, the
min, the
the the to
switch
switch
switch thereturns
switch previous
returns
returns
returnsinto
into
into step.
into
EE181 EG005 auto
autoautomode.mode.
mode.
EE181 EG005 using menu. You may return into auto mode at any mom
You may
using return into auto mode at any mom
is menu.
2 4 6 8
EG005 If no action taken for 1 min, the switch returns into
2 4 6 8
using menu.
If no action is taken for 1 min, the switch re
auto mode.
2 4 6 8
If no action
auto mode.is taken for 1 min, the switch re
N.16
N.16
N.16 auto mode.
N.16
255
N.16
Twilight switches
Description Must be used in conjunction- Features & benefits
This device controls lighting with a suitable rated contactor LED to show status of
circuits in relation to ambient Protected cable clamps changeover contact
light, based on user settings capacity : Sealable front cover
rigid : 1.5 to 10mm2 Photo-electric cell measures
Technical data flexible : 1 to 6mm2 the light level and in conjuction
Maximum distance : 50m with the relay provides ON /
between photocell and con- OFF control of a circuit.
troller 4 position override switch
Available with electromechani- allowing :
cal programmers - auto: normal operating mode
Switch to select - ON : permanently switched
- Auto ON
- Permanent ON - OFF : permanently switched
- Permanent OFF OFF
- test: setting mode for easy
adjustment
Twilight switch adjustable sensitivity 1 EEN100

delivered with a separate 0 to 100 lux & 50 to 2000 lux
surface photo electric 16 amp 230V AC1
cell (EEN003) changeover contact
Programmable twilight+ adjustable sensitivity 5 EE110

time switch 5 to 100 lux & 50 to 2000 lux
delivered with a separate 16 amp 230V AC1
EEN100 surface photo electric changeover contact
cell (EE003)
Compact twilight switch 230V~ 50 Hz - EE702

with integrated photo cell 1 NO contact 16A AC1
IP55 Integrated cell
Light setting: from 2 to 1000 lux
Time settings : from 1s to 120s
EE702
Spare surface cell IP54 surface cell for - EEN003

EEN100 & EE110
EEN003
256
Twilight switches (din rail mounted)
EEN100 EE110
Width in 17.5mm 1 5
voltage supply 230V +10/-15%
frequency 50Hz
consumption 1.5VA maximum
output 1 voltage free changeover contacts
Maximum switching capacity
AC1 16A / 250V
incandescent lamps 2000W
230V halogen lamps 1000W
fluorescent lamps -
non compensated 1000W
fluorescent lamps, compensated 200W
in series 1000W
duo fluorescent lamps 1000W
lighting level : 2 ranges 0 to 100 lux and 50 to 2000 lux 5 to 100 lux and 50 to 2000 lux
ON and OFF delay 60 sec
mounting of cell surface surface
programmable no yes
technology electromechan.
cycle 24 hours
programming setting 15 min.
accuracy +/- 6min/year
operating reserve 200h after being connected for 120h
Environment
working temperature -10C to +45C (cell) -30C to +60C (cell)
storage temperature -25C to +70C -20C to +60c
Connection
maximum length between
cell and modular device 50 meters
capacity (modular device) 0.5 to 4mm2
capacity (cell) 0.75 to 4mm2 0.75 to 4mm2
Cells EEN003
Type surface mounting
Dimension (mm) 25x25x20 hole 25mm
Connection 0.75 to 4mm2
Ingress protection IP54
Working and storage temperature -30C to +60C
Wiring diagram
EEN100 EE110
257
Twilight switches (surface mounted)
EE702 (Integrated photocell)

Compact light sensitive switch
Dimensions 80 x 40.5 x 95
Supply voltage 230V AC (+10%/-15%), 50Hz
Characteristics of relay NO contact 16A AC1
Incandescent 2300W
Halogen ELV (12 or 24V) via 1500 VA
ferromagnetic or electronic
transformer
Non compensated fluorescent tubes 400W
Compact fluorescents 2000W
Electronic ballast 900W
Connection
flexible 1 to 6 mm2
rigid 1.5 to 10 mm2
Environment
Storage temperature -25C to +60C
Operating temperature -25C to +45C
IP / IK IP55 / IK03
Isolation class 2
Standards NFC 15 100 - IEC 60364-1-EN 60669-2-1
Lighting switching-on level Setting by potentiometer from 2
to 1000 lux hysterisis 10%
Setting delay Setting by potentiometer from 1 to 120 seconds
Dimensions Electrical connections
Ph
Ph
258
Designed to save energy
for a greener world!
E2LM
Energy Efficiency
through Lighting
Management
Save energy and save costs

Hager has complete range of building automation products like motion & presence
detectors, dimmers, latching relays, time switch etc. This allows an automatic
management of lighting in residential, commerical & industrial sectors.
It also helps reducing energy consumption and brings down manual intervention to
manage electrical loads.
Now saving & caring comes in a quality package called E2LM.
www.hager.co.in
Wall mounted
PIR detectors
Hager range of PIR detectors are used for movement
detection in outdoor areas and switch ON/OFF the loads
accordingly. The range offers wide viewing angle and a
long frontal detection area to maximise its effectiveness.

Large area of detection gives better surveillance Angle of view - 140, 200, 220 and 360
Suitable for outdoor applications, thanks to overmoulded Output relay - 10A AC1 and 16A AC1
gasket
Detection area - 16m frontal and 12m dia.
Vertical and horizontal orientation of detection head to
control the detection area of the sensor Time delay settings - from 5 sec. to 30 mins.
Time delay and lux level can be set using IR remote control Lux level settings - from 5 to 1000 lux
Easy ceiling and corner mounting with accessories
260
Expert
tips
Mounting options 140, 200, 220 and 360
1 easy corner mounting with

accessory
easy ceiling mounting with
accessory
3 angle of view
Vertical and horizontal IR remote control
2 adjustment of detector
head
helps in controlling the detec-
tion area
4 for setting time delay, lux level
and sensitivity of the sensor
261
Movement detectors
These devices are used for EE804 They turn off the light after a
automatic control of lighting in Surface mounted version preset duration
both residential & commercial Time delay and the lux level They are particularly suitable
applications are set via potentiometers for applications like corridors,
They monitor human move- from 1-15 mins. & 5-1000 lux parking areas, washrooms,
ment in their detection zone respectively godowns etc.
and automatically switch on 1 NO contact, 10A They bring comfort and
lights in case human move- enhance security in residential
ment is detected EE805 buildings.
Flush mounted version They guarantee significant
Time delay and the lux level savings in lighting power
are set via potentiometers consumption by switching on
from 1-15 mins. & 5-1000 lux lights only when required
respectively
1 NO contact, 10A
Detection angle 360 230 V 50 Hz EE804

Detection range 6 meter (dia)
surface mounting 1 NO contact, 10A AC1
IP21
Lux: 5 to 1000 lux
Time delay: 5s to 15 mins.
EE804
Detection angle 360 230 V 50 Hz EE805

Detection range 6 meter (dia)
flush mounting 1 NO contact, 10A AC1
IP21
Lux: 5 to 1000 lux
Time delay: 5s to 15 mins.
EE805
262
Movement detectors
EE804 EE805
Mounting surface mounted flush mounted
Voltage supply 230 V AC
Frequency 50 hz
Brightness level 5 to 1000 lux
Lighting output operating time 5 s. to 15 min
Contact rating AC1 10 A
- incandescent 1000 W
- halogen 230 V 1000 W
- halogen ELV via ferro.transfo. 500 VA
- halogen ELV via electro.transfo. 500 VA
- non compensated fluorescent tubes 1000 W
- compensated fluorescent tubes 8 x 58 W
- electronic ballast 8 x 58 W
- fluocompact 10 x 20 W
Terminal capacity 1 to 2.5 mm2
IP IP 21 / IK 03
Working temperature 0C to + 45C
Product dimension EE804 : 105 x p.54 EE805 : 85 x 69.2
Detection area Mounting - Movement detectors 360

EE 804 - EE 805 EE 804 - EE 805
ceiling mouting
They are particularly intended for use in interior traffic areas such as
corridors, entrance halls...
Dimensions
EE 804 EE 805
Electrical connections
EE 804 EE 805
263
Presence detectors
Description Micro movements are sufficient Direct control of a light load or
Hager presence detectors are to switch on and maintain lights used as a slave for detection
specially suited for applica- on area enlargement
tions like office cabins, confer- Adjustable head orientation Lux level and ON delay setting
ence rooms, cafeteria, class- allows adapting the detection via potentiometers
rooms etc. zone according to rooms con- Test mode in order to set lux
figuration level and the detection area
Features & benefits Lights are inhibited from being
Double lens technology used in switched on if natural light is
hager PIRs offers exceptional sufficient in the room
standards in infrared detection
IR remote control for parameter IR, battery operated EE807

setting of EE815 & EE816
Set or modify settings of EE815 &
EE816
Multiple settings can be stored in
memory
IR remote control for IR, battery operated EE808

EE810 user to operate EE816
Four scene buttons for easy
scene recall
ON/OFF, dim up/down button
Presence detector 230V~ 50Hz

1 channel 16A AC1 EE810
1 NO relay output
- lux level and On delay
defined via potentiometers
Presence detector 230V~ 50Hz

2 channels 16A AC1 EE811
1 NO relay output for light channel
EE816 - lux level and on delay
defined via potentiometers
Relay output presence channel 2A AC1
- on delay presence defined
via potentiometer
Presence detector 30 ballast EE812

with daylight regulation
1/10V channel for connecting ballast
3 functional mode
- no regulation
- light regulation with local set point
EE883 - light regulation with remote set point
Connection of upto 30 dimmable ballast
Presence detector monobloc 230V~ 50Hz EE815

with remote control adjustment 16A AC1
One relay output of 16A AC1
Lux level and on delay
adjustment on the product and
with remote control
Presence detector Regulation of EE816

with daylight regulation 24 ballast
DALI/DSI channel for
connecting ballast
3 functional mode
- automode
- regulation with local set point
- regulation inactive
4 scene recall with IR remote control
Lux setting, on delay setting
via IR remote or on the product
Hyper frequency motion detector 230V~ 50Hz EE883

1 channel, Area detection: 1m - 8m,
Surface mounted
Time delay: 5s - 15mins
Twilight adjustment: 2 - 2000 lux
264
Presence detectors
EE810/EE811/EE812
detection areas
Adjustment potentiometers
EE810 EE811
Description
on delay light regulation

residual lighting time delay for pres-
ence channel (output 2)
mode 1 : potentiometer < 10 min; monitoring period = 30 sec
before switch off
mode 2 : potentiometer > 10 min; monitoring period = 15 min
before switch off
Technical specifications mode 3 : potentiometer at P; immediate switch off after 2 mins
ref. EE810 EE811 EE812 Test mode :
type presence detector presence detector presence detector + This mode makes it possible to validate the
+ movement daylight regulation detection area :
- potentiometer in position test
1channel 2 channels 1 channel
- indicator V1 - will indicate any detection by
supply voltage 230V~ +10%/-15% / 50Hz lighting for one second if the level of illumina-
settings : tion is lower than the preset threshold. This
output brightness 1/3 potentiometer : auto (400 Lux) Regulation Inactive : lighting output S1 is not controlled in this
5 to 1200 Lux, OFF Mode 1 mode, the time settings will remain ignored.
output temporisation 1 potentiometer : 1 - 30 min, test, Regulation Active :
impulsions (EE810) Mode 2 Instances of lighting levels
output temporisation 2/3 potentiometer : 30 s - 1 h Regulation Active :
Mode 3 position of Lux Application
potentiometer value
residual brightness - - -
1 5
breaking capacity
2 100 corridor
output 1 (lighting) 16 A AC1, incandescent lamps, 30 nos. 1-10V ballast
halogen : 1500 W 10A AC1 3 200 corridor, WC
fluo with electronic ballast: 580 W 4 100 VDU work
fluo parrallel compensated: 290 W/32F 5 500 offices
output 2 (presence) - 2A AC1 - 6 800-1200 classrooms
laboratory
output 3 - - -
(brightness setting) ON measurement
of britghness
input command - 230V - @inhibited
50 m max. commutation
LED OFF, auto, ON : movement/test regulation set point is set at 400 Lux.
power consumption 1.2 W 1.1 W 1.2 W
ingress protection IP41
connection 1 - 4 mm2
temperature storage : -10C to +60C
working : 0C to +45C
265
Presence detectors
Presence detection Assembly
Based on a solution patented by hager, the optical part presence The behavior of commutation will be determined by the passage of
detection rests on a double lens making it possible to obtain a zone of people in the zone of capture of the detector. In exceptional cases, an
rectangular capture. The head of the detector can also swivel to adjust inopportune commutation can be caused by various influences. The
the detection zone. The latter is subdivided in two sections equipped sources of potential parasites should already be evaluated during the
with a density higher than the center and a density to reduce in the study of the project, resp. eliminated before the assembly.
direction of length. in the offices, these detectors should thus be
assembled directly above the places of work, and in the direction of Obstacles decreasing the range of the detector :
length for an installation in corridors (zones of circulation). the partition walls, plants or racks, etc can limit the range of detec-
tion.
Simulated movements :
the presence detectors capture fast modifications of temperature in
the environment of the detector as being movements, for example
at the time of or the stop starting of lowers with hot air, ventilators
etc when the flow of air is directed directly on the lenses or of the
objects near the zone of capture of the detector.
objects being heated slowly do not have a negative influence and
do not cause inopportune commutation.
A side distance > 0.5m should however be respected.
movement presence movement Proximity of the conduits of heating and the bodies of radiators.
detection detection detection luminaries switching on themselves and dying out near the zone of
detection can simulate a displacement (p e.g of the lamps incan-
13 x 7 m (installation max. high 2.5 m) descence or halogen located at a distance < 1m).
objects moving such as mobile machines, robots, posters can also
Detection zone cause an inopportune detection.
Covering a rectangular detection zone of 13 x 7m, the Hager presence
detectors represent an ideal solution for the offices, classrooms, toi-
lets, corridors, markets and garages. In the event of assembly of two
detectors in order to increase the range of detection, it is then rec-
ommended to respect a zone of covering of approximately a meter.
Only two detectors will be thus necessary to cover a 25m length. A
possibility of Master/Slave circuit exists for the communication of only
one group of luminaries. The master presence detector EE812 or
EE811 measures the lighting and the presence, then commutates and
controls the electrical load. Auxiliary presence detectors EE810 detect
only the presence and will announce this one to principal, which will
carry out commutation and regulate the loads. The diagrams of wiring
are illustrated in the respective instructions.
266
Presence detectors
EE810 EE811 EE811 Master + EE810 Slave
EE812
EE812
1/10
L N S1E1 + -
Fluo
BP
Ballast Lamp
Push Button
Apparent assembly Flush-mounted assembly
267
Presence detectors
EE815 EE816
Detection range Movement detection area : Diameter 7m
(product installed at 2.5m height)
Presence detection area : Diameter 5m
(product installed at 2.5m height)
Supply voltage 230 V AC + 10% - 15%
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Local lux threshold setting 5 - > 1000 lux 3 modes available
Local time setting 1 min. - > 1h
Commissioning via EE807 for power up, EE807 for power up,
installer remote control absence/presence mode, absence/presence mode, timer,
timer, active/passive cell active/passive cell
Control with IR user - EE808 for ON/OFF override and
remote control dimming up/down
Output 16A AC1 relay output (cut live) : 14V / 50mA (for a DALI bus with 24 ballasts)
2300W Incandescent or 230V No isolation between the mains and
Halogen : > 26000 cycles the DALI bus!
1500W VLV halogen lamps with
ferromagnetic or electronic
or transformer : > 35000 cycles
1000W Fluorescent via
electronic ballast : > 39000 cycles
1000W / 130F Parallel compensated
fluo tubes : > 50000 cycles
23 x 23W Fluo-compact with
electronic ballast : > 20000 cycles
Push button input Phase input for To dim up/down and
absence/presence detection absence/presence detection
(semi-automatic/automatic mode) (semi-automatic/automatic mode)
Same phase as power supply Same phase as power supply
Terminals For 1.5 mm2 rigid/flexible wires
Power dissipation 300 mW 60 mW
Isolation class II II
Protection IP41 / IK03 IP41 / IK03
Operating temperature -10C to +45C -10C to +45C
Storage temperature -20C to +60C -20C to +60C
Standards IEC 60669-1, IEC 60669-2-1, CE Ctick
Detection area Setting EE815/EE816
Wiring diagram EE815 and EE816
268
Presence detectors
Hyper Frequency Motion Detector - EE883
Technical characteristics Potentiometer settings

EE883
Supply voltage 230 V~ 50 Hz 1 Adjustable potentiometer
1 detection sensitivity
Detector frequency 5.8 Ghz + / - 0.075 Ghz
(detection area)
Detection area 360
Receiver class 2 2 Adjustable potentiometer
Standby consumption 1W 2 luminosity threshold
Duration of lighting output operation 5 s15 min
Luminosity threshold 22000 lux 3 Adjustable potentiometer
Detection sensitivity 1 m8 m 3 duration of operation
Recommended installation height 2,5 m
Fixing accessories 2 screws 4.5 mm and length 50 mm
Operating temperature -20 C > +50 C
Storage temperature -35 C > +70 C
Insulation class II
Protection rating IP54
Standards EN 60669-2-1; RF Standard ETSI, EN 300 440-1 V1.3.1
Upstream protection 10 A (T +35 C), 6 A (+35 C < T < +50 C
Maximum installation altitude 2000 m
Pollution degree 2
Connection max 1,5 mm
Installation
Installation steps Important:

1. Loosen the screws 4 retaining the lid 5 . The detector requires 10 seconds to initialize after the power is
2. Remove the lid 5 . switched on.
3. Use 2 screws to fix the box 6 to the ceiling or wall (diameter 4.5
In the case of an installation in a wet place, it is necessary to drill the
mm and length 50 mm).
drain hole 8 on the cover.
4. Wire the detector in accordance with the connection diagrams.
5. Refit the lid 5 .
The wires passage 9 can be broken on the cover if necessary.
6. Correctly tighten the two screws 4 retaining the lid 5 in order to
ensure a good seal.
7. Adjust the potentiometers.
8. Fit the protective cover 7 . Be sure to press on the cover to ensure
that it clips in place correctly.
269
Presence detectors
Wiring diagrams
Legend
A Lamps B Detector terminals C Single switch D Two switches E Change over switch
Lamp connection without neutral conductor
Auto operation by detection or Forced switchoff
Lamp connection with neutral conductor
Auto operation by detection or Forced switch-off
Connection using two switches for manual or automatic control

(possibility of simultaneous switch off of the lamp AND the detector)
Auto operation by detection or Forced switch-off

or Forced switch-on of the lamp
Connection using a change over switch to operate either the lamp or

the detector
Auto operation by detection or Forced switch-on

of the lamp
270
Movement detectors- IP55
Description They provide signi cant Detectors can be mounted in
These devices are made for savings in lighting power corners utilising the relevant
automatic control of lighting in consumption by illuminating corner mounting accessory
both the residential, commer- only when necessary
cial and industrial sectors Products are equipped with
Fresnel lenses that allow high
Features & benefits frontal detection performance
They automatically switch on and downwards detection:
lighting when movement is - 220 frontal detection zone
detected - Twin 220/360 to detect in a
They turn off the circuit after frontal & downwards zone
the preset duration Time, Lux, sensitivity are
They bring comfort and achieved locally, via poten-
enhance security of exterior tiometers
areas It s also possible to set the
These devices are suitable for detectors with an IR remote
outdoor application (IP55) and control which provides speed
can be mounted on wall, ceil- & convenience when setting
ing and corners nal adjustments
Detector comfort 140 EE820

wall mounting
230 V 50/60 Hz 200 EE830
Lux: 5 to 1000 lux
Timer: pulse, 5s to 15 min 360 EE840
Contact 10A AC1
EE820 Corner mounting bracket EE825
Ceiling mounting bracket EE827
Detector enhanced 140 EE850

wall mounting
230 V 50/60 Hz 220 EE860
Lux: 5 to 1000 lux
Timer: pulse, 5s to 15 min 220 + 360 EE870
EE825 (30 min with IR remote control.)
Sensitivity min. 20%, max.
100%
Contact 16A AC1
IR remote EE806
Corner mounting bracket EE855
EE870
EE806
271
Movement detectors - IP55
EE820 / EE830 / EE840 EE850 / EE860 / EE870
colour white
detection range 140 / 200 / 360 140 / 220 / 220 +360
vertical head orientation tilt 0 to 30 +90 / -30
horizontal head orientation pan 80
shutters delivered with the products
ceiling mounting w/ accessory EE827 (except EE840) yes
corner mounting (inner/outer corner) w/ accessory EE825 (EE855 for EE840) w/ accessory EE855 white
Settings
lux setting via potentiometer 5 to 1000 lux
timer setting via potentiometer pulse ( 1s ON, 9s OFF) or timer 5s to 15 min
quick setting auto/test position
power supply 230V AC (+10% / -15%), 50Hz/60Hz
output 10A AC1 , relay cutted phase
Load type
incandescent load 1500W 2300W
VLV halogen lamps with conventional transformer 1500VA 1500VA
fluorescent tubes with parallel compensation C= 32F 290W 400W
electronic ballast 580W
fluocompact 10 x 20W 20 x 20W
Environment
IP 55
IK 03
working temperature -20 C to +55 C
storage temperature -20 C to +60 C
Connection
terminals quickconnect with manual release
terminals capacity 1,5 mm2 rigid wires
Auto/OFF Auto/ON
Ph PhL Ph
L Ph
L
L
N Ph L
L Ph Ph PhN
L L
Ph
L S1 Ph
L S1
S1 = OFF
N N
= auto
Detectors in parallel Combination with a timelag
1 2
EMN001
Ph
L Ph
L EMN 001
Ph
L Ph
L Ph
L Ph
L 3
5
8
L L
N Ph Ph L Ph
N Ph L 30s
10
min.
Ph PhN
L L
N 3
Ph
L Ph
L 4
Ph
L
N N
N
Detection zone
TheT optimal height of installation
is 2,5 m.
8 m ( 200)
6 m ( 140)
Thedetection
must
field
remain

2,5 m free.
EE82x: = 140
EE83x: = 200
6 m ( 140)
8 m ( 200)
8m 16 m
128
272
LED Floodlight - EE600
The LED EE600 floodlight is fit- Motion 220-360 C for the Lock for settings on the device
ted with a detector sensitive to local extraction with bottom Operating temperature range -
infrared radiation linked to heat area protection 20 to + 45 C
emissions from any moving High power LED (60W)
body. Low standby consumption Optional remote control EE806
The floodlight switches on Wall mounting without acces- for the settings:
when a heat emitting body sories Time delay
moves within the detection Detection range: 16 m Brightness value
zone. It remains on for the Hide covers to limit detection Sensitivity
duration configured on the area in Scope of delivery On Off,
detector and until no further Horizontal lens shift +/- 80 Rentals
movement is detected in the LED spotlights adjustment hor- Holidays
surveillance zone. izontally 180 Auto
When first connected, the LED spotlights adjustment ver- Reset (Factory Reset)
floodlight illuminates for 45 tically 340 Test
seconds. Degree of protection IP55
The parameters are adjustable Plug + Play connector assem-
after this period. bly
LED Floodlight Detection range - 220-360 EE600
EE600

Description
The EE610 LED lamp is The lamp remains switched on Optional remote control EE806
equipped with a detector for a duration that has been set for the settings:
sensitive to infrared radiation for the detector and until it no - fixed time,
linked to the emission of heat longer detects movement - level of luminosity,
from any moving body. The within the surveillance area. - sensitivity (detection area),
detector turns on the lamp - on / off,
when a body that emits heat When first energised, the devi- - holidays,
moves within in its area of ce illuminates for 45 seconds. - auto,
detection. - reset (return to factory settings),
The parameters are adjustable - test.
after this period.
LED Floodlight Detection range - 140 EE610
EE610
273
Power 60W
Standby Consumption 0.5W
Light color 5700k
Luminous flux 3400lm
Power Supply 230V AC 50/60Hz
Insulation Class II
Wiring 1 to 1,5 mm
Protection index IP55
Functioning temperature -20 to +45C
Storage temperature -20 to +60C
Detection range 220/360
Detection zone 12m
Lux setting 5 to 1000lux
Time setting 5s. to 15min.
Weight 2kg
Dimension 320x150x150mm
Accessories Adjustable shutters, mounting screws
IR Remote To be order seperately

Description Dimensions
6ZLYHOOLQJOXPLQRXVSDQHO 150 mm

180

340

Wall suppo
support
ort
ZLWKSRZHU
U
supply blocck
block
322 mm
iometers
180 mm
Directional detection
on head
257 mm
+/- 80
Shutters

130
274
Installtion
Installation steps:
1- Screw the block to the wall
2- Connect the wires as shown in the diagram

3- Clip the projector onto the block (a click confirms the
connection)
4- Screw the floodlight onto the block (screws located
behind the detector head).
L
N

Clac !
Working
A Testing and validating
t the detection area
Fixed time Luminosity Sensitivity
tim
me
(length of time PRGLFDWLRQ Put the potentiometer 2 on Test mode
t
RIOLJKWLQJ RIWKHUDQJH and if necessary,
use the shutters
to
define
the detection
zone.

b c
The Test mode is available for 3 min.

Every
movement
detected
switches on

the light for 1s. After 3 min
without

Detection area detection
of movement,
the product
returns to normal operation.

Normal (on/off)
operation

The light
panel
switches
on when the

luminosity defined
level
by potentiome-
to be
ter 2 is judged

insufficient and

when
a movement is detected.

After detection,
the
light stays on for
2,5 m the length of time predefined
by the

potentiometer 1. The fixed timing is
reset after each detection.
6m
8m 12 m Please note: when the potentiometer 2
is on auto test , the settings are pre-
defined (See table on next page).
Optimal installation height is 2.5m.
The detection zone shall rremain
emmain free of obstacle.
free
275
Installtion Settings:
Action Settings Potentiometer
Use Auto settings (factory) or set by the Auto Settings
remote control to switch the light Put the Lux potentiometer on
automatically for a given time. auto test .

The settings are predefined
:

Lux = , (operating at night only)

time = 3 min,
sensitivity = max.

Remote control settings
(Manual Settings inhibited).

Automatically switch on the light Installer settings
a defined
for time.

Using the remote control 7HFKQLFDOVSHFLFDWLRQV What to do if...
(Option, ref. EE806/ 52900)

3RZHU DURXQG::OXPLQRXVHQHUJ\
7KHRRGOLJKWGRHVQRWVZLWFKR

from Kelvin
s,QGD\QLJKW

OLJKWGRHVQRWVZLWFKR
the

The
detector receives
instructions

Colour of the light : 5700 s,Q GD\QLJKW PRGH
PRGH
WKH
WKH
WZLOLJKW
WZLOLJKW

UHPRWHFRQWUROZKHQWKH/X[SRWHQWLRPHWHU2 is
/XPLQRXVX[ OXPHQ

night
night only
only mode.
mode.
Briefly
on
turn
the auto on the position.
test
light. Impulse
3RZHUVXSSO\

= 5 s. :
9$&+]
10
1010A
A gG/gl

gG/gl
fuse
gG/gl

fuse

or
fuse
or
or
-
- Readjust.
Readjust.
If the potentiometer is put on another value,
the Auto settings
L are usable
with16A
Compulsory time
protection
circuit-breaker 10 A A
curve gG/gl
C or fuse
curve or
B Incorrect
Incorrect adjustment
adjustment
of of the dete
the
dete
16A 16A circuit-breaker
circuit-breakercurve
curve CC oror curve curve BB
local setting resumes. (cannot be changed).
I 16A circuit-breaker curve C or curve B - Readjust.
Readjust.
I 16A circuit-breaker curve C or curve B -
7KH/('RIWKHGHWHFWRUOLJKWVXSWRFRQUPWKH
Insulation
II class : II

Recommended cable : U1000R02V3G1.5 7KHRRGOLJKWGRHVQRWVZLWFKR

VLJQDOZLWKWKHUHPRWHFRQWURO

Connection
using
VFUHZIUHHWHUPLQDOV
fPP
Continuous
Continuous movement movement in in the
the de de
,W DVKHV
TXLFNO\
IRU
V ZKHQ
DQ
LQVWUXFWLRQ
LV 2
-- Inspect
Inspect the the detection
detection zone, zone, yo yo

received
and a reset.
5 s for
Protection class :

IP55 readjust the
readjust the zonezone or or mask
mask part part o o
When an instruction is not authorised, the LED Operating
temperature : -20 +45 C
Test and validate
1 s. the detection
zone.
Test mode 7KHRRGOLJKWFRQWLQXDOO\VZLWFK

7KHRRGOLJKWFRQWLQXDOO\VZLWFK
lights up for Storage temperature
: -20 +60 C
Animals
Animals are moving
moving the detec
in the detec
Move the potentiometer Detection 2 toangle : 220/360 are in
The available
settings are : . On
auto test

position,
)RUZDUGGHWHFWLRQGLVWDQFH
-- Adjust
Adjust the the sensitivity.
sensitivity.
[HGWLPH
this the remote
P

7ZLOLJKWWKUHVKROGVHWWLQJ

3 min without

fOX[

7KHRRGOLJKWVZLWFKHVRQLQYRO
- level of luminosity, control can be used. After
Operating duration setting : 5 s 15 min
ZLQG
- sensitivity, detection of movement, s7
s 7KHKH
ZLQG LV VWLUULQJ
LV VWLUULQJ WKH
WKH WUHHV
WUHHV DQ DQ
- on / off, the product
Accessories

: adjustable shutters supplied,

detection

detection zone.
zone.
- holidays returns to normal operation.

PRXQWLQJVFUHZV
-- Adjust
Adjust the the zone.
zone.

- auto Cars Cars passing
passing on on thethe road road are are

UHVHWUHWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV
the sensitivity.
Adjust Allows setting the range

-- Adjust
Adjust the the zone.
zone.
s6XGGHQWHPSHUDWXUHFKDQJHVGX

-test. s6XGGHQWHPSHUDWXUHFKDQJHVGX

to avoid disturbance. ZLQGUDLQRUVQRZ

ZLQGUDLQRUVQRZ

-- Adjust
Adjust the the zone zone or or mount
mount the the
different place.
different place.
Using the remote control

Potentiometer
Potentiometer Values in lux
Values
position The detector receives instructions from the remote con- The available settings are :
position in lux
trol when the Lux potentiometer 2 is on the auto test - fixed time,
5 position. If the potentiometer is put on another value,
5 - level of luminosity,
the local setting resumes. The LED of the detector lights
- sensitivity,
50/
50/ 60
60 up to confirm the signal with the remote control.
- on / off,
- holidays
It flashes quickly for 2 s when an instruction is received
< 1000 - auto
and 5 s for a reset. When an instruction is not autho-
rised, the LED lights up for 1s. - reset (return to factory settings)
- test.
What to do if...
10
10
The floodlight does not switch on :
In day/night mode, the twilight setting is set to night only mode.
- Readjust.
Incorrect adjustment of the detection zone.
- Readjust.
The floodlight does not switch off :

Continuous movement in the detection zone.
- Inspect the detection zone, you may need to readjust the zone or mask part of it.
The floodlight continually switches on and off :

Animals are moving in the detection zone.
- Adjust the sensitivity.
The floodlight switches on involuntarily :

The wind is stirring the trees and bushes in the detection zone.
- Adjust the zone.
Cars passing on the road are being detected
- Adjust the zone.
Sudden temperature changes due to the weather (wind, rain or snow).
- Adjust the zone or mount the equipment in a different place.
132
276
LED Floodlight - EE610 Z De
Product description
Power around 15 W (75 W luminous energy)
and working principles
Colour of the light 4000 Kelvin The EE610 LED lamp is equipped with a detector
Luminous flux 1100 lumen sensitive to infrared radiation linked to the
Power supply 230 V AC 50 / 60 Hz emission of heat from any moving body.
Compulsory protection 10 A gG/gl fuse or The detector turns on the lamp when a body that
16A circuit-breaker curve C or curve B emits heat moves within in its area of detection.
Insulation class II The lamp remains switched on for a duration
Recommended cable U1000R02V3G1.5 that has been set for the detector and until it no
Connection without screws (Sanvis) 1,5 2,5 mm2 longer detects movement within the surveillance
terminals area. W
Protection class IP55 :KHQUVWHQHUJLVHGWKHGHYLFHLOOXPLQDWHVIRU p
Operating temperature -25 +50 C 45 seconds.
Storage temperature -30 +70 C The parameters are adjustable after this period.
Detection angle 140
Forward detection distance 6 m (by default) The Heat sink of the product can be hot
12 m maximum (with remote control) during and after use, dont toucht it.
Twilight threshold setting 5 1000 lux
Operating duration setting 5s 15 min
Accessories Mounting screws and wall plugs
Standards EN 60598-2-5 (07/1999)
EN 60669-2-1 (08/2004)
Description
Description Dimensions
Dimensions
Aluminium heat sink

a detector
PP PP
the
y.
a body that
detection.
uration
until it no
urveillance PP
Wall support with
QDWHVIRU power supply block
is period.
LED light source
be hot
6
Detection head
PP
277
Installtion
a
local
in
ring
he
a
m
local
re
JLV
ted
ndin9). Installation steps:

ring Insert the cable into the cable grommet 1 in order to facilitate access to the cables during assembly.
Screw the wall plate 2 to the wall using the 2 screws and wall plugs provided 3 .
he Connect the wires as shown in the diagram 4 . The earth terminal is used for earth wire parking only.
em Clip the body of the lamp 5 onto the wall plate 2 (a click confirms that the casing is closed).
remm). Tighten the theft prevention screw 6 located under the LED lamp.
Carry out the adjustments (see pages 8 and 9).
Put in place the cover 7 .
ted
JLV
rted Dismantling
nwall
d 9).
e
mm).
ted
z
r
wall
Dismantling steps:
Place a flat screwdriver in the notch of the cover 7 and push it towards the wall (~ 2 mm). z
Press the rear of the cover, rotate it and remove.
Loosen the theft prevention screw 6 located under the LED lamp.
Using a flat screwdriver, press in the upper notch of the product.
Remove the body of the lamp 5 from the wall plate 2 .
134
278
Settings
Settings Testing an
the detec
Temporisation A Brightness B Put the pote
(duration of operation of The test m
the LED light source) movement d
After 3 min w
A B product retu
R
LHM
OX[
/
Normal
@TSN
LHM SDRS
The lamp is l
potentiomete
movement is
Settings Testing and validating After detecti
the detection zone RIWLPHSUHGH
Temporisation A Brightness B Put the potentiometer B on test mode.7KH[HGWLP
(duration of operation of The test mode is available for 3 min.Please
the LED light source)
Every note
Testing and validating the detection zone movement detected switches on the light for 1s.
qDXWRWHVWrW
After 3 min without detection of movement, the
Put the potentiometer B on test mode. The testmode is available
A for 3 min. B Every movement detected switches on the light for 1s.
product returns to normal operation. below).
After 3 min without detection of movement, the product returns to normal operation.
R
LHM
OX[
/
Normal operation (on/off)
Normal operation (on/off) @TSN
LHM SDRS
The lamp is lit when the brightness level set by
The lamp is lit when the brightness level set by potentiometer B is judged insufficient and a movement potentiometer BAfter
is detected. LVMXGJHGLQVXIFLHQWDQGD
detection, the light
stays on for the length of time predefined by the potentiometer A. The fixed timing is reset after each movement
Detection zone detection. is detected.
After detection, the light stays on for the length
Please note : when the potentiometer B is on auto test, the settings are predefined (see table below).RIWLPHSUHGHQHGE\WKHSRWHQWLRPHWHUA.
7KH[HGWLPLQJLVUHVHWDIWHUHDFKGHWHFWLRQ
Optimal installation height is 2 m. Please note : when the potentiometer B is on
P
The detection zone shall remain free of obstacle. qDXWRWHVWrWKHVHWWLQJVDUHSUHGHQHGVHHWDEOH
below).
P

Detection
Detection zone
zone
Optimal installation height is 2 m.

Pdetection zone shall remain free of obstacle.
P
The
P

P P P P P
Default detection area (set at factory)

Remotely adjustable maximum detection area (EE806 / 52900)
P P
Default detection area (set at factory)
Remotely adjustable maximum detection area (EE806 / 52900)
8
8
z
279
Installtion Settings:
Action Action Settings Settings Potentiometer
Potentiometer Using the remote Using
Action Settings Potentiometer
Action Use Auto settings Settings
(factory) or Action set by the Auto Settings
Potentiometer Using the remote control (Option, ref. Using (Option
EE806/ 5
Use Settings
AutoSettings
Settings Potentiometer Using
remote control to switch the light UseAuto
Action Autosettings
settings Auto
Put theSettings
Lux potentiometer on (Option, ref. EE806/ 52900)
Potentiometer The detector The
(Option, receive de
Use Auto settings Auto Settings ActionIDFWRU\
IDFWRU\ Settings Putthe
Put
Auto theLux Lux potentiometer
potentiometer on
on Potentiometer The detector receives instructions from Using the remote
the Using (Option, con
IDFWRU\ automatically for Puta given
the Lux time. Use
Action
potentiometer
Use
Auto settings
Auto onthe auto Settings
bysettings test
Auto .Settings
Settings Potentiometer (Option,
UHPRWHFRQWUROZKHQWThe UHPRWH det
or set by the auto test. Use
oror set
IDFWRU\
Auto
setby the
settings The
Auto
auto
auto
Put
settings
Settings the test.
test.
are
Lux potentiometer on
predefined :
UHPRWHFRQWUROZKHQWKH/X[SRWHQWLRPHWHU2 on ref. EE806/
is The
the auto on
test
(Option,
UHPRWHF
52900)
thedet
posi
IDFWRU\
orremote
Use remote
set by
Auto control
control
the
settings Put
auto
Auto the Lux potentiometer
7KHVHWWLQJVDUHSUHGHQHG
7KHVHWWLQJVDUHSUHGHQHG
test.
Settings on on the auto test position. The detector receives UHPRWHF ins
remote control IDFWRU\
7KHVHWWLQJVDUHSUHGHQHGor set by
the
WRVZLWFKWKHOLJKW
WRVZLWFKWKHOLJKW Put the
Lux = auto
LuxLux
Lux = potentiometer
=test.
, (operating
, Lux
(operating on
at night only) on
, (operating If the
UHPRWHFRQWUROZKHQWKH/X[ on
The
potentiometer If the deta
pis
WRVZLWFKWKHOLJKW Lux = , (operating remote
IDFWRU\
or set by thecontrol auto 7KHVHWWLQJVDUHSUHGHQHG
Put
test. the potentiometer If the potentiometer is put on another value,
local the on
setting these
resumes.
UHPRWHF
local a
remote control
automatically
automatically
WRVZLWFKWKHOLJKW
or set by the time =7KHVHWWLQJVDUHSUHGHQHG
DWQLJKWRQO\
3DWQLJKWRQO\
min,
Lux = test.
auto , (operating local setting resumes. on the auto test If
position.the po
automatically DWQLJKWRQO\remote control 7KHVHWWLQJVDUHSUHGHQHG
Lux 7KH/('RIWKHGHWHFWIf
on the
thesetpoa
for a given time.
forfora agiven
automatically
remote
time = 3 min,WRVZLWFKWKHOLJKW
given
WRVZLWFKWKHOLJKW
control time.
time. time
sensitivitytime == max.
3 min,
= , (operating
3 min,
Lux = 7KHVHWWLQJVDUHSUHGHQHG
DWQLJKWRQO\
, (operating 7KH/('RIWKHGHWHFWRUOLJKWVXSWRFRQUPWKH If the potentiometer local
local
7KH/('
is put set o
automatically sensitivity
DWQLJKWRQO\
sensitivity = max.= max. VLJQDOZLWKWKHUHPRWH
local setting resumes. If the
VLJQDOZ po
sensitivity = automatically
max.for a given time. DWQLJKWRQO\
WRVZLWFKWKHOLJKW Lux
time == 3control
, min,
(operating VLJQDOZLWKWKHUHPRWHFRQWURO 7KH/('
for a given time. Remote
time
Remote = 3 min,
control settingssettings ,W DVKHV 7KH/('
local
TXLFNO\ set
IRU
Remote control forautomatically
asettings
given time. Remote sensitivity
time =DWQLJKWRQO\
3 control
min, control
Remote = max.
settings settings 7KH/('RIWKHGHWHFWRUOLJK VLJQDOZL
,W DVKH
sensitivity
Remote = max.
control settings ,W DVKHV TXLFNO\ IRU V ZKHQ DQ LQVWUXFWLRQ
receivedLVandVLJQDOZL 5received
s for a
Remote controlfor a given time.(Manual
settings Remote
time
sensitivity Settings 3 control
==max. min,
inhibited).
0DQXDO6HWWLQJVLQKLELWHG settings received and 5 s for a reset. VLJQDOZLWKWKHUHPRWHFRQWUR 7KH/('
,W DVKH
Remote
Remote
Remote control
0DQXDO6HWWLQJVLQKLELWHG
control control
sensitivity = max.
settings
settings
settings When ,W
VLJQDOZL
an instruction DVKH i
0DQXDO6HWWLQJVLQKLELWHG ,W DVKHV TXLFNO\ received
IRU When V ZK a
Using the remote control Automatically Remote Remote
Installer control
controlsettings settings
7HFKQLFDOVSHFLFDWLRQV When an instruction is not What authorised,
to do the LED
if...
lights up for 1received
s.DVKH
Using
Using Using the
the the remote
remote
remote control
control
control Automatically Remote
Installer 7HFKQLFDOVSHFLFDWLRQV
control
settings
settings settings
7HFKQLFDOVSHFLFDWLRQV What
What to do
received if...
and 5 s for,W a reset.
lights u
Automatically
(Option,
(Option,
(Option,
Using
Automatically
Using
(option:
the
ref.
the
ref.
ref.
remote
EE806/
EE806/
ref.
EE806/
Installer
switch
remoteEE806
on
52900)
52900)
52900)
control
settings
the light VZLWFKRQWKHOLJKW
control
/ 52900) VZLWFKRQWKHOLJKW
Installer settings
Remote control7HFKQLFDOVSHFLFDWLRQV
7HFKQLFDOVSHFLFDWLRQV
3RZHU
3RZHU settings
DURXQG::OXPLQRXVHQHUJ\
lights up for 1 s. Whatto
What todo
to
When The
do if...
doan
7KHRRGOLJKWGRHVQRWVZLWFKRQ
7KHRRGOLJKWGRHVQRWVZLWFKRQ
if...
if... When an
When
availablereceived
instruction settings
is not an
The
(Option,
VZLWFKRQWKHOLJKW
The for
(Option, adetector
detector
ref.
defined
ref. EE806/
receives
time.
EE806/
receives52900)
52900) Automatically
instructions
instructions from
from the
IRUDGHQHGWLPH the Installer settings
3RZHU
Colour of
3RZHU theDURXQG::OXPLQRXVHQHUJ\
light :: The available
5700 settings
Kelvin are7KHRRGOLJKWGRHVQRWVZLWFKRQ
s :,,7KHRRGOLJKWGRHVQRWVZLWFKR
Q GD\QLJKW PRGH WKH lightsThe
WZLOLJKW up
avaVH
The
IRUDGHQHGWLPH detector receives Automatically
IRUDGHQHGWLPH
Automatically
instructions from the Installer
Installer settings settings
Colour3RZHUof the
light
DURXQG::OXPLQRXVHQHUJ\ 5700 Kelvin s Q GD\QLJKW [HGWLPH
PRGH
lights up for 1 WKH
s. lights
WZLOLJKW upVH
The The detector
UHPRWHFRQWUROZKHQWKH/X[SRWHQWLRPHWHU2
detector
UHPRWHFRQWUROZKHQWKH/X[SRWHQWLRPHWHU2 receives
receives
The detector receives instructions instructions VZLWFKRQWKHOLJKW
instructions from from
the
from is the
is
the ColourColour of
/XPLQRXVX[ the
of the light light
light : : : [HGWLPH5700
5700
OXPHQKelvin
Kelvin s , Q
s
night , GD\QLJKW
Q GD\QLJKW
only PRGH
mode.
- PRGH
level ofWKH
WKH When
The
luminosity, [HGW
WZLOLJKW
WZLOLJKW
avai an
VH
UHPRWHFRQWUROZKHQWKH/X[SRWHQWLRPHWHU2 VZLWFKRQWKHOLJKW /XPLQRXVX[
Colour of the OXPHQ
5700 Kelvin night
s , Q only mode.
GD\QLJKW PRGH WKH WZLOLJKW
onUHPRWHFRQWUROZKHQWKH/X[SRWHQWLRPHWHU2
on the
the auto
remote auto test
control
testwhen position.
position.
UHPRWHFRQWUROZKHQWKH/X[SRWHQWLRPHWHU2 the luxVZLWFKRQWKHOLJKW
IRUDGHQHGWLPH
Automatically
potentiometer Bisisisis Installer /XPLQRXVX[
settings
/XPLQRXVX[
3RZHUVXSSO\
3RZHUVXSSO\
/XPLQRXVX[ - level ofOXPHQ
OXPHQ
luminosity,
9$&+]

9$&+]
OXPHQ
night
-- Readjust.
Readjust.
only
night The
night mode.
onlyavailable
only mode. settings
- sensitivity,
mode.
The
lights
[HGWLP avai
- level
are up
: o
onon onthe the
theauto
auto
auto test
test
test position.
position.
position. IRUDGHQHGWLPH
IRUDGHQHGWLPH
VZLWFKRQWKHOLJKW 3RZHUVXSSO\
3RZHUVXSSO\ 9$&+]
or - Readjust. [HGWLP
-level
sensit
If on
If the
the the auto
potentiometer
potentiometer test position.
is
is put
put on
on another
another value,
value, the
the Compulsory
Compulsory
3RZHUVXSSO\ protection
protection
:: - 9$&+]
sensitivity,
10
10 A A gG/gl
gG/gl fuse
fuse
9$&+] or -- Readjust.
Readjust.
Incorrect [HGWLPH
- on
adjustment / off,of -
The
the avai
detect of
If If the
the potentiometer
potentiometer isis putputon onanother
another value,
value, the
the Compulsory
Compulsory protection
protection : : 1010/Aoff,
gG/gl
A fuse oror Incorrect adjustment of the detect
-[HGWLP
-level / of
local
local If
Iflocalthesetting
setting resumes.
resumes.
potentiometer is
is put
put on onIRUDGHQHGWLPH
another
another value,
value, the
%ULH\WXUQRQ the Compulsory 16A
16A circuit-breaker
circuit-breaker
protection : - curve
on
curve
10 CgG/gl
AC or
or curve
gG/glcurve fuse
fuseBBor - Incorrect

- Readjust. Incorrect
Readjust.
Incorrect
- level -ofholidays
adjustmentluminosity,
adjustment
adjustment
ofof the
of -thethe
ondete
detect
sensitiv
dete
o
local local setting
setting
setting resumes.
resumes.
resumes. Impulse Insulation
Insulation
16A
class
class 16A :
:
circuit-breaker
circuit-breaker curve
curve
- holidays C or
C curve
or curve BII
II B - Readjust.
- Readjust. - sensitivity, - -sensitiv
holida
%ULH\WXUQRQ local setting resumes.
Impulse
7KH/('RIWKHGHWHFWRUOLJKWVXSWRFRQUPWKH %ULH\WXUQRQ
the light. ImpulseRecommended 16A circuit-breaker curve C or curve B - Readjust. - auto - on
level / off
of
7KH/('RIWKHGHWHFWRUOLJKWVXSWRFRQUPWKH Insulation
$XWRVHWWLQJVDUHXVDEOHZLWK
Insulation class :cable II
the VLJQDOZLWKWKHUHPRWHFRQWURO
light.
VLJQDOZLWKWKHUHPRWHFRQWURO $XWRVHWWLQJVDUHXVDEOHZLWK
7KH/('RIWKHGHWHFWRUOLJKWVXSWRFRQUPWKH the light. Insulation class
Recommended
$XWRVHWWLQJVDUHXVDEOHZLWK class ::
cable :: U1000R02V3G1.5 II
U1000R02V3G1.5
- auto II 7KHRRGOLJKWGRHVQRWVZLWFKRII
- on / off,
7KHRRGOLJKWGRHVQRWVZLWFKRII -- -on
UHVHWUHWXUQWRIDFWRU auto/ off
holiday
sensitiv
signal with the remote
VLJQDOZLWKWKHUHPRWHFRQWURO control.%ULH\WXUQRQ time
Impulse Recommended
= 5 s.Connection
Recommended using cable
cable : : U1000R02V3G1.5
U1000R02V3G1.5
UHVHWUHWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV 7KHRRGOLJKWGRHVQRWVZLWFKRII
Continuous movement
- holidays in - the detec
holiday
VLJQDOZLWKWKHUHPRWHFRQWURO
Briefly turn on the light. %ULH\WXUQRQ
%ULH\WXUQRQ Impulse
ImpulseImpulse Connection
Recommended using cable : U1000R02V3G1.5 Continuous movement
- test. in - UHVHW
the
auto
on detec
/you
off
DVKHV TXLFNO\time
,WVLJQDOZLWKWKHUHPRWHFRQWURO
,W DVKHV TXLFNO\ IRU
IRU = 5V
Vs.ZKHQ
,WDVKHVTXLFNO\IRUVZKHQDQLQVWUXFWLRQLV
ZKHQthe DQ LQVWUXFWLRQ
LQVWUXFWLRQ LV
DQlight. LV time = 5VFUHZIUHHWHUPLQDOV
s.Connection
Connection
FDQQRWEHFKDQJHG Connection using
VFUHZIUHHWHUPLQDOV
using
using - test. fPP
2
fPP22 2 -- Inspect
Continuous

Continuous
Inspect Continuous automovement
- the
the movement
detection
detection
movement
in
zone,
zone,
the
in thedetec
--UHVHWU
in-auto
the
test. de
you
de
,W
received ,W DVKHV
DVKHV
received TXLFNO\
and TXLFNO\
and 5
5s sIRU
s5 for IRU
a
a reset.
for V
a ZKHQ
FDQQRWEHFKDQJHG
V
reset. thethe
V ZKHQ
light.
DQDQLQVWUXFWLRQ
light.
LQVWUXFWLRQ
LQVWUXFWLRQAuto
LVLV
$XWRVHWWLQJVDU
settings are usable with
VFUHZIUHHWHUPLQDOV

FDQQRWEHFKDQJHG time
VFUHZIUHHWHUPLQDOV = 5 s.
fPP
fPP - Inspect
- Inspect thethe detection
detection zone, holiday
zone, you
received
received
,W
received
DVKHV and
andand
TXLFNO\
5s 5
for IRU
forfor
reset.
a reset.
ZKHQ%ULH\WXUQRQ
DQ LV time
Impulse = 5 s. Protection
Protection class
class :
VFUHZIUHHWHUPLQDOV : fPP IP55
IP55 2 readjust
readjust
- Inspect the zone or mask
UHVHWUHWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWL
the thezone or maskUHVHWU
detection part ofyo
part
zone, of yoii
When
When
When
received an
an
an and 5s
instruction
instruction
instruction s foris a
aisreset.
is
not authorised,
reset.
not
not
authorised,
the light.the
authorised, the
the
LED
LED
LED
time =time
(cannot 5be s. changed).
= 5 s. Protection
FDQQRWEHFKDQJHG Protection
Operating
Operating
Protection
class
class
class ::
temperature
temperature
: :: -20
-20 +45
IP55
+45 IP55C
C
IP55
readjustreadjust
readjust -
the the
test.
zone oror
the zone
mask- part
zone or mask mask -
test.
auto
part
test.
of i
part o o
When lights an up for 1 s.
instruction is isnot authorised, the theLED FDQQRWEHFKDQJHG Operating
FDQQRWEHFKDQJHG Operating temperature
temperature :: : :: -20-20 +45 C 7KHRRGOLJKWFRQWLQXDOO\VZLWFKHV UHVHWU
lights
lights When
When up an
up for instruction
for
an 1
1 s.
s.
instruction is not
not authorised,
authorised,
Test andthe
LED
LED
validate time
Test mode = 5 s. Storage
Storage
Operating temperature
temperature
temperature -20
-20-20
+60
+60 +45
+45CC
C C 7KHRRGOLJKWFRQWLQXDOO\VZLWFKHV
7KHRRGOLJKWFRQWLQXDOO\VZLWFKHV
lights up for 1 s. Storage
Storage temperature
temperature : : -20-20 +60 CC Animals are
are moving
moving in in the
the- detectio
TestThe
The lights
and The
lights up
up for
available
validate
available 1
forsettingss.
1 settings
s.Test mode
settings areare:
: Detection
FDQQRWEHFKDQJHG Storage angle
Detection angle
temperature :: : +60
-20220/360
220/360 +60 C
Animals
Animals
Animals are moving
are in the
detectio
test.
detectio
available
[HGWLPH are : the
Test detection
and validate zone. Move
Test the
mode potentiometer
Detection
Detection angle 2
angle
angle ::
)RUZDUGGHWHFWLRQGLVWDQFH : to 220/360
220/360
P - Adjust
- Adjust Animals the are moving in the detec
moving
sensitivity.
the sensitivity. in the detec
the The
[HGWLPH
[HGWLPHThe
detection
The
available
available
zone.
available
settings
Moveare
settings
settings
: potentiometer
are
the
are ::
the and 2
detection to zone. Testauto
Move test.
the
OnDetection
this position,
potentiometer 2 to
P
220/360
P - Adjust
- Adjust the the
P 7KHRRGOLJKWVZLWFKHVRQLQYROXQ sensitivity.
sensitivity.
[HGWLPH
-- level - level
[HGWLPH of of luminosity,
luminosity, Test validate mode 7ZLOLJKWWKUHVKROGVHWWLQJ
)RUZDUGGHWHFWLRQGLVWDQFH fOX[
fOX[ P
level
[HGWLPH of luminosity, auto test. On TestTestandposition,
this validate
and validate Test mode
the
Test remote
mode control can be
7ZLOLJKWWKUHVKROGVHWWLQJ used.
7ZLOLJKWWKUHVKROGVHWWLQJ fOX[ 7KHRRGOLJKWVZLWFKHVRQLQYROXQ
-- level --- level
sensitivity
ofof (detection
luminosity, area), autothe test.
OperatingOn this position,
duration 2setting :: 5
5sfOX[

15 15 min 7KHRRGOLJKWVZLWFKHVRQLQYROXQ
sensitivity,
- sensitivity, of luminosity, the remote thethe
control detection
detection
can used.zone.
be zone. Move Move
the potentiometer potentiometer
Operating 2 duration
to:duration to
setting s
fOX[ min s
s7 7 KH
KH ZLQG
ZLQG LVLV VWLUULQJ
VWLUULQJ
7KHRRGOLJKWVZLWFKHVRQLQYRO WKH
WKH WUHHV
Potentiometer WUHHV DQG DQG
- level
-- sensitivity,
--Teston /and
off,
sensitivity,
luminosity, the
Test detection
and validate zone.
Test
automode
the remote
auto
Test theOperating
$IWHUPLQZLWKRXWGHWHFWLRQRI
Move potentiometer
Operating
Accessories
control
Accessories
test.
mode Operating
On
duration
can
:duration
this position, 2setting
be to setting
adjustable
used.
adjustable
setting
: : 5s
shutters
shutters
: Potentiometer5
5s
15 min
15
ssupplied,
supplied,15 min
min s 7 KH
s7
detection ZLQG
KH ZLQG LVLV
VWLUULQJ
zone. VWLUULQJWKH WUHHV
WKH WUHHV DQG DQ
- on on // off,
off,
sensitivity, validate the detection zone.
$IWHUPLQZLWKRXWGHWHFWLRQRI test.
movement,
auto On this position,
Accessories
test.
the Onproduct
Accessories
this : returns
:
position, to adjustable
adjustable shutters
shutters supplied,
supplied,
PRXQWLQJVFUHZV
Values
detection
s 7
detection
KH in
ZLQGlux
zone.
LV
zone.
VWLUULQJ
position WKH WUHHV
Potent DQ
--- holidays
on - - on
holidays
holidays,
/ off,
/ off, movement, thethe detection
product returnszone. the$IWHUPLQZLWKRXWGHWHFWLRQRI
Move
the remote
toMove remote
the
control Accessories
control
potentiometer
can beBused. can be : 2used. to adjustable PRXQWLQJVFUHZV
shutters
position supplied, - Adjust
- Adjust detection
the
the zone.
detection zone.
zone.
zone.
-- onauto, / off, the
normal
the potentiometer
remote
operation.
control to
can be used. PRXQWLQJVFUHZV
PRXQWLQJVFUHZV - Adjust the zone.
--- auto
holidays
- holidays movement, the
$IWHUPLQZLWKRXWGHWHFWLRQRI product returns to PRXQWLQJVFUHZV - Adjust
Cars the
passing zone.
Potentiometeron
on the road areVab
the road positio
Potentiare
auto
- auto reset (return tonormal
-- holidays factory operation.
settings), auto auto .test.
$IWHUPLQZLWKRXWGHWHFWLRQRI
test Onoperation.
this On this position,
position,
$IWHUPLQZLWKRXWGHWHFWLRQRI the remote -Cars
-
-
Adjust passing
Cars passing
the zone.
on the road Potentiare
b
b
-- auto
auto the
movement, normal
movement,remote
the product the
control product
returns can to be returnsused. to 5 Cars
Adjust
Adjust Carsthe
thepassing
zone. on
zone.
passing
position on thethe road road
position are
are
- test.
-UHVHWUHWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV
test. control can
movement, be used. After
the product 3 min without
returns to - Adjust
s 6 - Adjust the the zone.
zone.
XGGHQWHPSHUDWXUHFKDQJHVGXH position
- test.UHVHWUHWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV normal normal
operation. operation.
$IWHUPLQZLWKRXWGHWHFWLRQRI s6 - XGGHQWHPSHUDWXUHFKDQJHVGXH
Adjust the zone. Potenti
- test. s6 sXGGHQWHPSHUDWXUHFKDQJHVGXH
-- test.
test. Adjust the
normal
detection
movement, operation.
of movement,
$OORZVVHWWLQJWKHUDQJH the product
the product returns to s6
6XGGHQWHPSHUDWXUHFKDQJHVGX
ZLQGUDLQRUVQRZ
ZLQGUDLQRUVQRZ
XGGHQWHPSHUDWXUHFKDQJHVGX position 5
ZLQGUDLQRUVQRZ
ZLQGUDLQRUVQRZ
returnsnormal -- Adjust
Adjust 50/ the zone
60 the zone or
ZLQGUDLQRUVQRZ or mount
mount the e
the e
Adjust the $OORZVVHWWLQJWKHUDQJH sensitivity. totoavoid
normal operation.
operation.
disturbance. - Adjust the zone or mount thethee
sensitivity. to avoid disturbance. Adjust the $OORZVVHWWLQJWKHUDQJH -- Adjust
Adjust place.
different
different the zone
place.
the zone or or mount
mount the
different place.
different place. place.
Adjustsensitivity.
Adjust the the to avoid disturbance.
$OORZVVHWWLQJWKHUDQJH
different 5
Adjust
sensitivity.
sensitivity. the to $OORZVVHWWLQJWKHUDQJH
avoid disturbance.
to avoid disturbance.
< 1000
sensitivity.
Adjust the to avoid disturbance.
Potentiometer Values in lux Using the remote control <1
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
Potentiometer Values
Values
Values sensitivity.
in lux
in lux to avoid disturbance.
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
position Values
Values in lux
in lux
Potentiometer
positionposition Values in 9 lux (option: ref. EE806 / 52900 The available settings are:
9 position position
position
position in lux

5
5
The detector receives instructions from the remote - fixed time,
559
5 5 9
control when the lux potentiometer B is on the auto - level of luminosity,
9 test position.

50/
50/ 60
60
9 - sensitivity (detection area),

50/ 50/
6060
50/ If the potentiometer is put on another value, the local - on / off,
50/ 960
60
setting resumes.
<> 1000
- holidays,
<
<< 1000
10001000 The LED of the detector lights up to confirm the signal
- auto,
< 1000
1000 with the remote control.
- reset (return to factory settings),
It flashes quickly for 2 s when an instruction is received
and 5 s for a reset. - test.
10
10
When an instruction is
z not authorised, the LED lights up
1010
10
for 1 s.
What to do if...
The lamp does not switch on
In day/night mode, the twilight setting is set to night only mode.
- Readjust.
Incorrect adjustment of the detection zone.
- Readjust.
The lamp does not switch off

Continuous movement in the detection zone.
- Inspect the detection zone, you may need to readjust the zone.
The lamp continually switches on and off

Animals are moving in the detection zone.
280
Dimmers
Description Features & benefits Scene inputs
The Hager products are sui- Dimming controlled by bell Control by several push
table for all light sources : push switch : buttons for 300W dimmers
incandescent, LV and VLV - start/stop by short press Universal products with auto-
halogen, fluorescent with dim- - increasing/decreasing by matic recognition of the load
mable electronic ballast maintaining pressure type (inductive / capacitive) for
Fluocompact dimmable light & Softstart (progressive start) to 500W & 1000W dimmers
dimmable 230V LED lamp with increase the lifespan of lamps Electronic protection against
built in supply , very low volta- Memorisation of last dimming overheating and overload
ge dimmable LED lamp (12 V level Indicators :
to 24 V ) with electronic ballast Protection against overheating 230V / overheating / overload
.(300 W & 500 W dimmer ) Control possible by illuminated Load teaching, dimming
pushbutton until 5mA mode, over ride & comfort
Pilot function for 1-10V slave features available in 300W &
dimmers or ballast 500W dimmers
Universal Dimmers 300 W 300 W / VA 1 EVN012

for : 230 V / 50 Hz
- incandescent 230 V
- halogen 230 V - products with load teaching
- VLV halogen lamps with : feature
- dimmable electronic transfor- - dimming override made for
mer different load
- dimmable fluocompact lamps - comfort features for dimming
with 230V built in ballast progressive switch off
- 230V dimmable LED lamps night light
- dimmable VLV LED lamps via 100%
EVN012 electronic ballast no function
Enhanced universal 500 W / VA 2 EVN004

dimmer 500 W 230 V / 50 Hz
for :
- incandescent 230 V - products with load teaching
- halogen 230 V feature
- VLV halogen lamps supplied - dimming override mode for
EVN004 by ferromagnetic or dimm- different load
able electronic transformer - comfort features for dimming
(cos j 0,95) scene
- dimmable fluocompact lamps time delayed scene
with 230V built in ballast progressive switch off
- 230V dimmable LED lamps Night light
- dimmable VLV LED lamps via - recall mode with pushbutton
electronic ballast - scene level setting by push
button
281
Dimmers
Universal dimmer 1000 W with 230 V ~ / 50 Hz 5 EV102

scene inputs
Functional selection mode via 20 ...1 000W
local switch :
- control via pushbutton (local) 1/10V-input/output
- remote control via 1/10V (max. 50mA, 30 EV102)
(slave) defined via the local switch
- control of the other dimmers
via 1/10V (master) Contact output :
Display to show the dim level 1 NO, 250V ~, 5A
EV102 and to set the parameters:
- dimming rise time (4s ..99s)
- min dim level (0...49%)
- max dim level (51..99%)
- rise time when switching ON
(1s..99s)
- fall time when switching OFF
(1s..99s)
- scene level
- dimming rise time for each
scene
- scene working mode :
recall or override mode
Output contact to display the
dim state (load is OFF, contact is
opened, if load is dimmed the
contact is closed)
LED indication :
- 230V power supply / load error
- overload / overheating
Load type :
- incandescent
- 230V halogen lamps
- ELV halogen lamps associated
to ferromagnetic transformer
(inductive)
- ELV halogen lamps associated
to electronic transformer (capa-
citive)
282
Description Modules Catalogue No.
1/10V pilot dimmer with scene 4 EV108

input
To control EV102 (max. 30)

To dim electronic ballasts
Wiring of illuminated
pushbuttons possible
up to 5mA
Display to show the
dim level and to set the
EV108 parameters:
- dimming rise time (4s ..99s)
- min dim level (0..49%)
- max. dim level (51..99%)
Contact output to display the

dim state (load is OFF, contact
is opened, if load is dimmed
the contact is closed). It is
used to switch ON/OFF the
electronic ballast
Scene inputs used for override
(3 levels) or simple recall (2)
For each scene
- dimming rise time
- scene level
- and scene mode
(recall or- override)
Time lag switch

Description In double delay mode (C)
A staircase time lag switch The time lag can be extended
allows you to switch on the to one hour pressing bell push
lights during an adjustable switch for more than 3 sec.
time. After the time lag, the In mode D prewarning at the
lights switch off automatically. end of lighting ON period and
extending of time lag period
Features & benefits upto 1 hour is possible
Time delay setting from 30
seconds to 10 minutes
Automatic & manual mode (for
manual override)
4 different mode of operations
In prewarning mode (B) the
light blinks before end of ligh-
ting ON period
Time lag switch for automa- - Basic staircase time lag 1 EMN005
tically switching off lights switch
after adjustable time lag. - Pre warning mode
- Double delay mode
- 30 sec to 10 min or 1 hour
adjustible time lag
- Double delay with pre warning
- Contact 16 A 250 V AC1
EMN005
283
Dimmers
range overview
functioning as a standalone product functioning in system : association of dimmers

300W 500W 1000W with 1/10V max 30 x 1kW
Incandescent/halogen 230V EVN012 EV102 pilot : switch to master position

S EVN004
EV102 switch to local position EV102 + n x EV102 (slave position)
Halogen VLV (12 or 24V) ferromagne- EVN012 EV102 pilot : switch to master position
tic transformer suitable
for dimming. EVN004
The transformer shouldn t be used EV102 switch to local position EV102 + n x EV102 (slave position)
with less than 75% of nominal load.
Halogen VLV (12 or 24V) via electronic EVN012 EV102 pilot : switch to master position
transformer
EVN004
EV102 switch to local position EV102 + n x EV102 (slave position)
Dimmable VLV (12 or 24 V) LED lamp EVN012

via electronic transformer
EVN004
Dimmable fluocompact lamps with

230V built in ballast EVN012
230V dimmable LED lamps EVN004
1/10V control (output only) Input 1/10 V, 50 mA

fluo with electroballast 1/10V
EV108 with scene inputs
300 W 500 W 1000 W Pilot 1/10 V
Technical features EVN012 EVN004 EV102 EV108
Controls available
- on the product - - yes yes
- external with illuminated pushbutton yes yes yes yes
- input 1/10 V - - yes (slave) -
- ambient lighting setting - 1 2 levels 2 levels
Types of outputs :
- direct (capacitive/inductive load) yes (only capacitive) yes yes -
- input 1/10 V - - yes (master) yes
Functions :
- protection overheating / overloads yes * yes yes yes
- level indicator - - yes yes
- memorisation yes yes yes yes
- softstart yes yes yes -
Parameter setting :
- mini, max. level - - yes yes
- dimming speed - - yes yes
- speed at start / stop - - yes yes
- transition speed for level call - - yes yes
system dimmer system dimmer

dimmer 300 W universal dimmer 500 W universal dimmer 1000 W 1-10 V pilots
EVN012 EVN004 EV102 EV108
284
Dimmers : Product choice
Choice of dimmers according to : lighting sources, dimming ranges and other characteristics
lighting source functioning of a standalone product functioning in a system

(association of dimmers)
0 W 20 W 60 W 100 W 300 W 500 W 1000 W 30 x 1 kW
halogen or
incandescent lamps EVN 012
230 V
EVN 004
EV 102 (Master position)

EV 102
+ n EV 102 (Slave position)
VLV halogen lamps supplied by
ferromagnetic transformer EVN 012
EVN 004

EV 102
VLV halogen lamps supplied by
dimmable electronic EVN 012
transformer 230V
12 V
(cos w > 0,95) 230 V EVN 004

EV 102
dimmable fluo compact lamps with
EVN 012 60W
230 V built in ballast
230 V dimmable LED lamp
EVN 004 100W
230V built-in
dimmable VLV LED lamps via electronic ballast

EVN 012 300W
EVN 004 500W
Choice of pilot dimmers for direct control via 1/10V tranformers or electronic ballast
lighting source 0W 30 kW
VLV halogen lamps supplied by 1/10V
variable transformer EV 108* pilot 1/10 V multi-dimming (a call of memorized levels)
fluorescent lamps or compact fluo
lamps with electronic ballast * conditions to respect :
variable in 1/10V a) S I (ballast 1/10 V), 50 mA b) S I (ballast + lamp), 10 A / AC1
example : for the lighting of a hall 30 tubes of 2x36W are requested

characteristics of used ballasts : I (ballast 1/10 V) = 1 mA
I (ballast + lamp) = 0,31 A
calculation : S I (ballast 1/10 V) = 30 mA, 50 mA
SI (ballast + lamp) = 9,3 A, 10 A
After checking, 1 x EV 106 or EV 108 can pilot this installation
Choice of dimmers for functioning in a system

to control high powers
dimmer EV 102 (master position)+EV102 (slave position)
* conditions to respect :
a) S I (ballast 1/10 V), 50 mA or maximum 30 dimmers
example : total power to dim : 8.6 kW
requested products: 1 x EV 102 and 8 x EV 100 = 9 kW
Dimensions
dimmer EV 102 dimmers EV 108
285
Dimmers : Main characteristics
products EVN 012 EVN 004 EV 102
dimming range at 45 C, 1-100% at 45 C, 1-100%
width (in modules) 1 2 5

supply voltage 230 V (+10 % -15%) 50 Hz
power dissipation 2.1 W 4.5 W 15 W
dimming principle : universal universal, automatic load recognition
- cut off at beginning of sequence (triac) load teaching
- cut off at end of sequence (transistor)
switching capacity
230V halogen or incandescent lamps 300 W 500 W at 45C 1000 W
VLV halogen ferromagnetic transformer 300 W 500 W at 45C 1000 W
VLV halogen dimming electronic transformer 300 W at 500 W at 45C 1000 W

(cos K 0.95) 45C
several circuits, total load - - EV 102 in master position +
> 1000 W functioning in system 30 EV 102 in slave
1/10 V potentiometer control - - yes slave position of potentiometer
100 kW, 200 mW logarithmic
Dimmable fluocompact lamp and LED with 60 W 100 W
230 built in ballast (Driver)
Dimmable VLV LED lamps via electronic ballast 300 W 500 W
on product (dimming function) - 2 bell push
by remote bell push yes yes
by luminous bell push yes spacing current
5 mA
ambient level 1 level * 2 levels *
levels priority settings 3 levels **
display of dimming level yes 0 to 99 %
Other characteristics
mini / maxi setting mini 1 to 49 %
max 51 to 99 %
output contact for state indication no 1 contact NO
5 A ACI 230 V
DC1 12 V mini 0,1A
memorizing of level and softstart yes
protection against overheating electronic
protection against short-circuits electronic
maximum length for input bell push or 1/10 V 50 m maxi
connection
connection : cage clamps
flexible 1 to 6 mm
rigid 1.5 to 10 mm
environment :
storage temperature -20 C to +60 C -20 C to +60 C -20 C to +70 C
working temperature -10 C to +35 C -10 C to +45 C -10 C to +40 C
(*) Level setting from 0 to 99%. Call of level by pushbutton. Priority setting of level by maintained control (switch).
(**) 3 ambient levels are available in priority setting mode : - level 1 if contact E1 is closed
- level 2 if contact E2 is closed
- level 3 if contacts E1 + E2 are closed
Requirements :
l To calculate the maximum number of lamps, it is necessary to take into account the power loss of ferromagnetic transformers (around 20%)
The transformer should not be used at less than 75% of its nominal load.
l Electronic transformers : take into account approximately 5 % power loss.
l Respect recommandations of manufacturer of the lightings.
l Compact fluorescent lamps with integrated ballast can not be dimmed.
286
Products EV 108
width (in modules) 4
supply voltage
power dissipation 3W
output contact
load system 1/10 V output 1 /10 V max 50 mA (electronic ballast) or
30 EV 102 ; maximum cable connection 1/10 V : 50 m
display of lighting level and setting up yes dimming level from 0 to 99 %
easy for programming and for checking all the settings
functional characteristics
on product ON / OFF 1 bell push
- by local pushbutton
- by illuminated pushbutton
wiring length
ambient level (scenes) 2 inputs = 2 or 3 levels
call scene by pushbutton 2 available levels
priority setting by switch 3 levels from 0 to 99 % E1 and E2 closed = level 3
scene settings
dimming speed
normal dimming by bell push dimming rise time from 4 to 99 seconds from level 0 to 100 %
dimming speed at start 0 to 99 seconds (duration from 0 to 100 %)
- dimming speed at stop 0 to 99 seconds (duration from 100 to 0 %)
- speed to reach ambient level this parameter definises the speed used o
reach the scene level (100%) : 0 to 99min. 59s
mini / maxi setup
soft start and memorization of last level
connection :
flexible
rigid
environment :
storage temperature
working temperature
* Values seized in always correspond to the time needed to go from 0 to 100% : dimmer reads this signal as a slope (or speed) of constant
dimming
Ex. : to go from 50% to 100% in 30 minutes rate 60 minutes to go from 0 to 100% that is to say 30 minutes to go from 50 to 100%
287
Dimmers : Use and characteristics
Dimming principle
Only one button is needed for dimming controls (increasing, decreasing) and switching on and off.
Quick push on button for switch on and off (principle of latching relay). Start always on last memorized level.
Dimming is obtained by maintaining push button. A new push on button will invert the dimming sense.
Functions 01
2
00
4 2 8
N N 10 10
EV EV EV EV
Power indication LED red LED switches on to indicate 230V supply
Protection against integrated electronic protection. By overheating, the available

overheating power and luminosity are reduced. To avoid this phenomenon :
separate dimmers with a blanking clip and/or reduce the connected
load.
overheating LED yellow LED switches lights on by overheating
protection against an electronic self-resetting system protects dimmers against short-
short-circuits circuits of load
memorization of lighting last dimming level is memorized
level last level is restored at next start
softstart function progressive start, increases lifespan of lamps
output contact state indicator function EV 102, or loading switch
EV 108
functioning in a system master products pilot other dimmers or electronic ballasts via 1/10V
- Master (output 1/10V) connection
product piloted by 1/10V connection
- slave (input 1/10 V)
ambient lighting level(scenes) EVN 004 1 input, EV 102 and EV 108 2 inputs
call scene with push button dimming at setted speed to obtain called level
priority setting of scene by dimming at set speed to obtain called level

switch Contact closed = priority setting. Dimmer calls previous level by
opening of contact (mode 2)
spacing current push button with LED until 5mA
dimming control on product control by 1 or 2 push buttons according to product
Setup
switching master/slave EV 102, local stand-alone, slave or master system
mini/maxi setup mini/maxi setup by display, except EV100 (potentiometer) mini 1 to
49 %, maxi 51 to 99 %
dimming speed time needed for dimmer starting from normal state to go from 0 to
100 % by push button ; setup from 4 to 99 seconds
dimming speed at start setup from 0 to 99 seconds to go from 0 to 100%
dimming speed at switch setup from 0 to 99 seconds to go from 0 to 100%

off
time needed to obtain a setup from 0 to 99 minutes and 59 seconds to go from 0 to 100%
dimming level (scene)**
call scene selection or selection scene call (mode 1) or priority scene setting (mode 2) is
priority setting scene available for each input
setup of dimming levels setup from 0 to 99% and by push button
(scenes)
* fuse integrated
** values set always correspond to the time needed to go from 0 to 100% : dimmer reads this signal as a slope (or speed) of constant
dimming
Ex. : to go from 50% to 100% in 30 minutes rate 60 minutes to go from 0 to 100% that is to say 30 minutes to go from 50 to 100%
288
Dimmers : Product presentation and connections
Universal dimmer 300W EVN 012
All our dimmers are

compatible with
pushbuttons
Use the same phase for control and supply
Universal dimmer 500W EVN 004
EVN012
2 3
1 4
2
300 W 45C
N 3
L 4

L/N
L
N
289
Dimmers : Product presentation and connection
Universal dimmer 1000 W EV 102 (with scene input)
1 LED : Ph
- switched ON = overheating N
- blinking = over-load
2 LED 230 V : switch
- switched ON = OK control :
- blinking = no load connected level forcing
3 Display of lighting level
4 Dimming pushbutton and ON/OFF
5 Setup of lighting level
6 Indication contact output state
5A 230 V AC1
master - local - slave mode switch :

- master can pilot other EV 100 or EV 102 via output 1/10 V
- local stand alone functioning of product
- slave product piloted by input signal of connection 1/10 V
load indication contact output
state
1/10V pilot dimmer EV 108 (with scene / input)
display of lighting level in % Ph

N
setup of lighting level
pushbutton ON/OFF or validation

output contact 16 A 230 V AC1
Input E1 and E2 can call 2 ambient levels :

- control by pushbutton : requested level is applied out of respect
for transition speed setted up
- control by switch : requested level is applied override according to
transition speed setted up
When 2 inputs are controlled at the same time, a third level becomes
available by override (only by setup : mode 2)
Dimming controls by pushbutton have no effect when override is
active.
290
Dimmers : Connection in system configuration
Association of dimmer EV 102 with EV 102
switch mode in position master

= output 1/10 V.
switch mode in position slave =
input 1/10V (in this position only
product levels priority settings with E1 and E2 are
priority setting available)
possibility
Remark : It is possible to extract tem-
porarily a product from system by swit-
ching from slave to local .
Use of input E1 and E2

(call of presetted levels)
Inputs E1 and E2 allow to call 2 or 3
presetted ambient lighting levels. Call
of levels can be done normally with
pushbutton (impulse 400 ms) or by
priority setting with switch or
automation (maintained contact).
Setup mode 1 or 2 allows to
discriminate behaviour of dimmer by
cancellation of priority setting.
mode 1 (by default), corresponds to

normal use.
- Control by pushbutton, called level is
applied out of respect of setted up
transition. Dimmer still reacts to other
controls applied.
- Switch control, called level is applied
by priority setting out of respect of
setted up transition.
By cancellation of priority setting,
lighting remains at the same level as
long as no other control is given.
mode 2 particularly adapted for

override. Same behaviour as above by
call of level.
By desactivation of override, dimmer
set back to the preceding state. In that
mode, when the 2 entries are simulta-
neously active, a 3rd level becomes
available in override (E1+E2 = E3)
Parameter settings for dimmers EV 102 and EV 108 Dimming parameters
parameter functions default possible

value value
ambient level input E1 0% 0..99 %
ambient level input E2 99 % 0..99 %
ambient level input E3 = E1 + E2 50 % 0..99 %
dimming speed from 0 to 99 % 4 4 ..99

mini lighting level 1% 1 ..49%
maxi lighting level 99 % 51 ..99%
dimming speed at start 0 0 ..99
dimming speed at stop 0 0 ..99
time to reach ambient level E1 0 - 0 0 ..99
et 59
use mode for input E1 : mode 1 mode 1
- 1 = call of ambient level,
- 2 = priority setting mode 2
et 59
use mode for input E2 : mode 1 mode 1
- 1 = call of ambient level,
- 2 = priority setting mode 2
et 59
291
Time lag switch : Connection and timing diagram
Choice of function : Wiring diagram
Timing diagram of different modes
A. Basic mode
Press shortly a bell push to switch on the lights. After an adjustable time
T the lights switch off automatically.
B. Prewarning mode
A signal (blink) appears before the end of the lighting period.
C. Double delay mode
T the lights switch off automatically. If you press the push button more
than 3 seconds, a time lag of one hour begins.
1h
D. Double delay + prewarning mode
T the lights switch off automatically. If you press the push button more
than 3 seconds, a time lag of one hour begins. A signal (blink) appears
before the end of the lighting period.
292
Energy meters
Description Characteristics - LED flashing according to
Energymeters are aimed to - class B consumption
measure the active energy - accuracy 1% - option: tariff 1 / tariff 2.
consumed by an installation. - energy readout: 7 digits - three phases energymeters are
They permit to have under - backlighted display adapted to all kind of networks
control the real cost of an - indication of instantaneous - display indication in case of
installation and to divide the power consumption bad wiring.
consumption between the - total / partial counter
different appliances. - pulsed output Complies to EN 50470 - 3
- unlimited saving of measures
Designation Characteristics Width Pack Cat. ref.

qty.
Single phase - direct 32A voltage 230V AC 50 / 60Hz
single tariff 1 1 EC050

without pulsed output
Single phase - direct 63A voltage 230V AC 50 / 60Hz

starting current = 40mA
base current = 10A
EC050
max current = 63A
with pulsed output 3 1 EC150

and total / partial
with pulsed output, 3 1 EC152

total / partial counter and 2 tariffs
Three phase - direct 63A voltage 230/400V AC 50 / 60Hz

starting current = 40mA
base current = 10A
max current = 63A
EC350
with pulsed output 4 1 EC350
and total / partial
293
Energy meters
EC050 EC150 EC152 EC350

Voltage 230V AC +/- 15% 230V AC +/- 15%, 400V AC +/- 15%
Frequency 50 / 60Hz
Consumption 7VA, 1W < 10VA and 1W < 10VA and 3W
Metrological data
Connection direct
Display 5 + 1 digits 6 + 1 digits 7 + 1 digits
Accuracy 1%, class 1 IEC61036 1%, class B EN 50 470-3
I max 32A direct 63A direct
I starting 20mA 40mA
Base current 10A 10A
Metrological LED
LED 6000 blinking / kWh 1000 blinking / kWh
Pulsed output
Pulsed output no 1 pulse = 100Wh / 100ms / 20 - 30V DC max (except on KNX meters)
Tariff
Tariff 1 1 2 1
Width 1 3 4
Protection degree IP20 IP20, IP51 (front part)
Storage temperature -25 to +70C -20 to +70C
Operating temperature -10 to +45C -10 to +55C
Connection capacity rigid: 1 to 6 mm2 rigid: 1,5 to 16 mm2
flexible: 1 to 4 mm2 flexible: 1 to 16 mm2
Connection diagram
EC050 EC350
EC051
only
- +
294
Cat. ref. Page No. Cat. ref. Page No. Cat. ref. Page No. Cat. ref. Page No. Cat. ref. Page No.
A BDH380E 193 EE816 264 HCA125Z 73 HEG250H

AD206Y 186 BDH480E 193 EE820 271 HCA126Z 73 HHA016Z 72
AD210Y 186 BFC480E 193 EE825 271 HCA160Z 73 HHA017Z 72
AD216Y 186 BFH480E 193 EE827 271 HCA161Z 73 HHA020Z 72
AD225Y 186 BTC380E 193 EE830 271 HCB250Z 76 HHA021Z 72
AD232Y 186 BTC480E 193 EE840 271 HCB251Z 76 HHA025U 72
AD240Y 186 BTH380E 193 EE850 271 HCD400H 82 HHA025Z 72
AD263Y 186 BTH480E 193 EE855 271 HCD401H 82 HHA026U 72
AD416Y 186 EE860 271 HCD630H 82 HHA026Z 72
AD425Y 186 EE870 271 HCD631H 82 HHA032Z 72
C
AD432Y 186 EE883 264 HCE800H 84 HHA033Z 72
CC216Y 182
AD440Y 186 EG003U 254 HCE801H 84 HHA040U 72
CC225Y 182
AD463Y 186 EG005 254 HCE970H 84 HHA040Z 72
CD225Y 182
AD956Y 184 EG007 254 HCE971H 84 HHA041U 72
CD240Y 182
AD960Y 184 EG103E 252 HCF980H 87 HHA041Z 72
CD263Y 182
AD966Y 184 EG293B 252 HCF981H 87 HHA050Z 72
CD284Y 182
AD970Y 184 EH011 250 HCF990H 87 HHA051Z 72
CD425Y 182
AD975Y 184 EH111 250 HCF991H 87 HHA063U 72
CD440Y 182
AD982Y 184 EH711 250 HDA016Z 72 HHA063Z 72
CD463Y 182
AD990Y 184 EH771 250 HDA017Z 72 HHA064U 72
CD484Y 182
ADH956 185 EKS301B 167 HDA020Z 72 HHA064Z 72
CE225Y 182
ADH960 185 EKS302B 167 HDA021Z 72 HHA080U 72
CE240Y 182
ADH966 185 EKS303B 167 HDA025U 72 HHA080Z 72
CE263Y 182
CE284Y 182
ADH975 185 EKS305B 167 HDA026U 72 HHA081Z 72
CE425Y 182
CE440Y 182
ADH990 185 EKS309B 167 HDA032Z 72 HHA100Z 72
CE463Y 182
AE206Y 186 EKS312B 167 HDA033Z 72 HHA101U 72
CE484Y 182
AE210Y 186 EKS315B 167 HDA040U 72 HHA101Z 72
CF225Y 182
AE216Y 186 EKS320B 167 HDA040Z 72 HHA125U 72
CF240Y 182
AE225Y 186 EMN005 283 HDA041U 72 HHA125Z 72
CF263Y 182
AE232Y 186 EPN050 244 HDA041Z 72 HHA126U 72
CF425Y 182
AE240Y 186 EPN051 244 HDA050Z 72 HHA126Z 72
CF440Y 182
AE263Y 186 EPN052 244 HDA051Z 72 HHA160U 72
CF463Y 182
AE416Y 186 EPN053 244 HDA063U 72 HHA160Z 72
CF484Y 182
AE425Y 186 EPN510 241 HDA063Z 72 HHA161U 72
CH225J 183
AE432Y 186 EPN515 241 HDA064U 72 HHA161Z 72
CH240J 183
AE440Y 186 EPN520 241 HDA064Z 72 HHD400H 81
CH263J 183
AE463Y 186 EPN525 241 HDA080U 72 HHG063H 78
CH425J 183
AE956Y 184 EPN540 241 HDA080Z 72 HHG100H 78
CH440J 183
AE960Y 184 ESC080 238 HDA081U 72 HHG125H 78
CH463J 183
AE966Y 184 ESC225 238 HDA081Z 72 HHG160H 78
CQ225J 183
AE970Y 184 ESC227 238 HDA100U 72 HHG200H 78
CQ240J 183
AE975Y 184 ESC240 238 HDA100Z 72 HHG250H 78
CQ263J 183
AE982Y 184 ESC263 238 HDA101U 72 HIB412I 164
CQ425J 183
AE990Y 184 ESC340 238 HDA101Z 72 HIB416I 164
CQ440J 183
AF216Y 186 ESC363 238 HDA125U 72 HIB420I 164
CQ463J 183
AF225Y 186 ESC425 238 HDA125Z 72 HIB425I 164
CZ001 196
AF232Y 186 ESC440 238 HDA126U 72 HIB440I 164
AF240Y 186 ESC442 238 HDA126Z 72 HIB463I 164
AF263Y 186 ESC443 238 HDA160U 72 HIB480I 164
E
AF416Y 186 ESC463 238 HDA160Z 72 HIB490I 164
EC050 293
AF425Y 186 ESC465 238 HDA161U 72 HIB491I 164
EC150 293
AF432Y 186 ESC466 238 HDA161Z 72 HIB492I 164
EC152 293
AF440Y 186 ETC440 238 HEC040H 79 HI403I 154
EC350 293
AF463Y 186 ETC463 238 HEC041H 79 HI405I 154
EEN003 256
AF956Y 184 EV102 282 HEC125H 79 HI451I 154
EEN100 256
AF960Y 184 EV108 283 HEC126H 79 HI452I 154
EE110 256
AF966Y 184 EVN004 281 HEC250H 79 HI453I 154
EE180 254
AF970Y 184 EVN012 281 HEC251H 79 HI454I 154
EE181 254
AF975Y 184 HED400H 82 HI455I 154
EE600 273
AF982Y 184 HED401H 82 HI456I 154
EE610 273 H
AF990Y 184 HED630H 82 HI458I 154
EE702 256 HBA125H 73
AFH956 185 HED631H 82 HI460I 154
EE804 262 HBA126H 73
AFH960 185 HEE800H 84 HI461I 154
EE805 262 HBA127H 73
AFH966 185 HEE801H 84 HI462I 154
EE806 271 HBA128H 73
AFH970 185 HEE970H 84 HI464I 154
EE807 264 HBA160H 73
AFH975 185 HEE971H 84 HLF180S 173
EE808 264 HBA161H 73
HEF980H 87 HLF190S 173
EE810 264 HBB161H 76
HEF981H 87 HLF199S 173
EE811 264 HBB251H 76
B HEF990H 87 HLF280S 173
EE812 264 HBD401H 82
BDC380E 193 HEF991H 87 HLF290S 173
EE815 264 HBD631H 82
BDC480E 193 HEG200H 78 HLF299S 173
295
HLF380S 173 HXB042H 77 JN4B00012S16 50 LF412G 219 NCN102N 172

HLF390S 173 HXC001H 80,83,85 JN4B00016S16 50 LF416G 219 NCN103N 172
HNA025U 73 HXC021H 80,83,85 JN8B00012S16 50 LF445G 219 NCN120N 172
HNA026U 73 HXC024H 80,83,85 JN8B00016S16 50 LF450G 219 NCN125N 172
HNA040U 73 HXC030H 80 JN8B00202S16 50 LS501 217 NCN132N 172
HNA064U 73 HXD030H 83 JN8B00208S16 50 LS602 217 NCN163N 172
HNA080U 73 HXD031H 83 JN8B00210S16 50 NCN200N 172
HNA081U 73 HXD042H 83 JN8B00214S16 50 NCN201N 172
HNA100U 73 HXE011H 85 JN2L2503MH 51 M NCN202N 172
HNA101U 73 HXE014H 85 JN4L4003MH 51 ML506J 174 NCN203N 172
HNA160U 73 HXE031H 86 ML520J 174 NCN210N 172
HNA161U 73 HXE042H 86 ML525J 174 NCN216N 172
HNB100U 76 HXF030H 88 K ML532J 174 NCN220N 172
HNB101U 76 HXF031H 88 KB163N 67 ML540J 174 NCN225N 172
HNB125U 76 HXF042H 88 KB163P 67 MZ201 196 NCN232N 172
HNB126U 76 HYA014H 75 KD163B 67 MZ202 196 NCN240N 172
HNC040H 79 HYB011H 77 KD463B 67 MZ205 196 NCN300N 172
HNC041H 79 HYB012H 77 KDN163A 67 MZ206 196 NCN301N 172
HNC125H 79 HYB012H 77,80 KDN263A 67 MZ209 196 NCN302N 172
HNC126H 79 HYB019H 75,77 KDN363A 67 MZ215 196 NCN303N 172
HNC250H 79 HYC011H 80 KDN463A 67 MZ216 196 NCN304N 172
HNC251H 79 HYD011H 83 KF83D 67 MZN175 196 NCN306N 172
HND251U 81 HYD012H 83 KM14N 67 NCN310N 172
HND400H 82 HYD014H 83 KNX10LH 226 NCN316N 172
HND400U 81 HYD015H 83 KR50U 67 N NCN320N 172
HND401H 82 HYE019H 86 KW10LH 94 NBN106N 172 NCN325N 172
HND401U 81 HYF019H 88 KZ021 67 NBN110N 172 NCN332N 172
HND630H 82 HZ156RI 154 KZN021 67 NBN116N 172 NCN340N 172
HND631H 82 HZ160I 154 KZN023 67 NBN120N 172 NCN350N 172
HNE630H 84 HZ163MI 154 KZN024 67 NBN125N 172 NCN363N 172
HNE800H 84 HZ164MI 154 NBN132N 172 NCN400N 172
HNE801H 84 HZC101I 154 NBN140N 172 NCN401N 172
HNE970H 84 HZC102I 154 L NBN150N 172 NCN402N 172
HNE971H 84 HZC105I 154 L501PV 227 NBN163N 172 NCN403N 172
HNF980H 87 HZC106I 154 L502PV 227 NBN206N 172 NCN404N 172
HNF981H 87 HZC202I 154 LF300G 219 NBN210N 172 NCN406N 172
HNG063H 78 HZI002I 154 LF302PV 227 NBN225N 172 NCN420N 172
HNG125H 78 HZI201I 164 LF304G 219 NBN240N 172 NCN432N 172
HNG200H 78 HZI203I 164 LF306G 219 NBN263N 172 NCN450N 172
HR500 198 HZI205I 164 LF308G 219 NBN310N 172 NDN100N 172
HR502 198 HZI811I 164 LF308PV 227 NBN316N 172 NDN101N 172
HR741 198 HZI910I 164 LF310PV 227 NBN325N 172 NDN103N 172
HR743 198 LF312PV 227 NBN340N 172 NDN106N 172
HR744 198 LF316G 219 NBN350N 172 NDN110N 172
HR745 198 J LF316PV 227 NBN363N 172 NDN116N 172
HXA001H 74,77 JK1XKLS 51 LF320G 219 NBN406N 172 NDN120N 172
HXA004H 74,77 JN2B00004S16 50 LF320PV 227 NBN410N 172 NDN125N 172
HXA011H 74,77 JN2B00006S16 50 LF325G 219 NBN416N 172 NDN132N 172
HXA031H 75 JN4B00006S16 50 LF406G 219 NBN463N 172 NDN202N 172
HXB030H 77 JN4B00008S16 50 LF408G 219 NCN100N 172 NDN203N 172
HXB031H 77 JN4B00010S16 50 LF410G 219 NCN101N 172 NDN204N 172
296
NDN206N 172 SP150 201 VF108TJ 58 VYG08CL 21 VYS18C 14

NDN210N 172 SP320 201 VF108TJ 58 VYG08DL 21 VYS18D 14
NDN216N 172 SPD015D 203 VF112PJ 58 VYG08DM 21 VYS18G 14
NDN220N 172 SPD040D 203 VF112TJ 58 VYG12CL 21 VYT04CD 15
NDN225N 172 SPD040N 201 VF112TJ 58 VYG12DL 21 VYT04CH 15
NDN232N 172 SPD140D 201 VF118PJ 58 VYG12DM 21 VYT04DD 15
NDN240N 172 SPD215D 201 VF118TJ 58 VYH04DH 16 VYT04DH 15
NDN250N 172 SPD240D 201 VF212PJ 58 VYH04E 26 VYT04E 26
NDN263N 172 SPD415D 201 VF212TJ 58 VYH04GH 16 VYT04GH 15
NDN300N 172 SPD440D 201 VF212TJ 58 VYH04PH 16 VYT04PH 15
NDN301N 172 SPN040N 203 VF218PJ 58 VYH06DH 16 VYT04PH 15
NDN302N 172 SPN040R 203 VF218TJ 58 VYH06E 26 VYT06CD 15
NDN303N 172 SPN065N 203 VF312PJ 58 VYH06GH 16 VYT06CH 15
NDN304N 172 SPN065R 203 VF312TJ 58 VYH06PH 16 VYT06DD 15
NDN306N 172 SPN115D 201 VF312TJ 58 VYH08DH 16 VYT06DH 15
NDN310N 172 SPN140R 201 VF412PJ 58 VYH08E 26 VYT06E 26
NDN316N 172 SPN165R 201 VF412TJ 58 VYH08GH 16 VYT06GH 15
NDN320N 172 SPN208 202 VF412TJ 58 VYH08PH 16 VYT06PH 15
NDN325N 172 SPN240R 201 VS104PJ 58 VYH12DH 16 VYT06PH 15
NDN332N 172 SPN265R 201 VS108PJ 58 VYH12E 26 VYT08CH 15
NDN340N 172 SPN408S 202 VS112PJ 58 VYH12GH 16 VYT08DH 15
NDN350N 172 SPN440R 201 VS118PJ 58 VYH12PH 16 VYT08GH 15
NDN363N 172 SPN465R 201 VS118TJ 58 VYM02C 24 VYT08PH 15
NDN400N 172 SPN504 202 VS212PJ 58 VYM04C 24 VYT08PH 15
NDN401N 172 SPN505 202 VS218PJ 58 VYM06C 24 VYT12CH 15
NDN402N 172 SPV025 227 VS218TJ 58 VYM08C 24 VYT12DH 15
NDN403N 172 SPV025E 227 VS312PJ 58 VYM160HM 24 VYT12EZ 26
NDN404N 172 SPV325 227 VS412PJ 58 VYM161HM 24 VYT12GH 15
NDN406N 172 SRA00505 234 VYA110C 25 VYM250HM 24 VYT12PH 15
NDN410N 172 SRA01005 234 VYA120C 25 VYM251HM 24 VYT12PH 15
NDN416N 172 SRA01505 234 VYA220C 25 VYP06DH 17 VYT16DH 15
NDN420N 172 SRA02005 234 VYA420C 25 VYP06E 26 VYT16E 26
NDN425N 172 SRA02505 234 VYA432C 25 VYP06GH 17 VYT16GH 15
NDN432N 172 SU213 237 VYA863C 25 VYP06PH 17 VYV00M 18,19,20
NDN440N 172 SU215 237 VYB416C 25 VYP08DH 17 VYV04CL 18
NDN450N 172 SVN121 232 VYB432C 25 VYP08E 26 VYV04DL 18
NDN463N 172 SVN122 232 VYB832C 25 VYP08GH 17 VYV04DM2 20
SVN123 232 VYB863C 25 VYP08PH 17 VYV04DM 19
SVN124 232 VYC04CH 22 VYP10DH 17 VYV04GL 18
P SVN126 232 VYC04DF 22 VYP10E 26 VYV04GM2 20
P031F 67 SVN129 232 VYC04DH 22 VYP10GH 17 VYV04GM 19
P032F 67 SVN222 232 VYC06CH 22 VYP12DH 17 VYV04PL 18
SVN312 232 VYC06DH 22 VYP12DM 17 VYV04PM2 20
SVN332 232 VYC08CH 22 VYP12EM 26 VYV04PM 19
S VYV06CL 18
SVN352 232 VYC08DH 22 VYP12E 26
SBR225 169 VYV06DL 18
SVN413 232 VYC12CH 22 VYP12GH 17
SBR232 169 VYV06DM2 20
SVN433 232 VYC12DH 22 VYP12GM 17
SBR240 169 VYV06DM 18
VYD00E2 51 VYP12PH 17
SBR263 169 VYV06GL 18
VYD00E4 51 VYP16DH 17
SBR290 169 V
VYD00E6 51 VYP16GH 17 VYV06GM2 20
SBR299 169 VE103L 64
VYD00M2 51 VYS04D 26 VYV06GM 19
SBR332 169 VE103PN 226
VYD00M4 51 VYS04E 26 VYV06PL 18
SBR340 169 VE106L 64
VYD00M6 51 VYS04G 14 VYV06PM2 20
SBR363 169 VE106PN 226
VYF14E 26 VYS04P 14 VYV06PM 19
SBR390 169 VE110L 64
VYF16E 26 VYS06C 14 VYV08CL 18
SBR499 169 VE110PN 226
VYF214D 23 VYS06D 14 VYV08DL 18
SBR432 169 VE112L 64
VYF214G 23 VYS06E 26 VYV08DM2 20
SB432PV 227 VE112PN 226
VYF214P 23 VYS06G 14 VYV08DM 18
SBR440 169 VE118L 64
VYF314D 23 VYS06P 14 VYV08GL 18
SBR463 169 VE118PN 226
VYF314G 23 VYS08C 14 VYV08GM2 20
SBR490 169 VE212L 64
VYF314P 23 VYS08D 14 VYV08GM 19
SFT225N 169 VE212PN 226
VYF414D 23 VYS08E 26 VYV08PL 18
SFT240N 169 VE218L 64
VYF414G 23 VYS08G 26 VYV08PM2 20
SFT440N 169 VE218PN 226
VYF414P 23 VYS08P 14 VYV08PM 19
SK602 234 VE312L 64
VYF416D 23 VYS12C 14 VYV12CL 18
SK603 234 VE312PN 226
VYF416G 23 VYS12D 14 VYV12DL 18
SK606 234 VE318L 64
VYF416P 23 VYS12E 26 VYV12DM2 20
SM030 234 VE318PN 226
VYG04CL 21 VYS12G 26 VYV12DM 19
SM050 234 VE412L 64
VYG04DL 21 VYS12P 14 VYV12GL 18
SM100 234 VE412PN 226
VYG04DM 21 VYS16C 14 VYV12GM2 20
SM150 234 VF104PJ 58
VYG06CL 21 VYS16D 14 VYV12GM 19
SM250 234 VF104TJ 58
VYG06DL 21 VYS16E 26 VYV12PL 18
SM500 234 VF104TJ 58
VYG06DM 21 VYS16G 14 VYV12PM2 20
SP120 201 VF108PJ 58
297
Cat. ref. Page No.
VYV12PM 19
VYV16DL 18
VYV16DM2 20
VYV16DM 19
VYV16GL 18
VYV16GM2 20
VYV16GM 19
VZ016M 226
VZ020D 226
VZ020M 226
VZ025D 226
VZ025M 226
VZ032D 226
VZ032M 226
VZ040M 226
VZ130I 25
VZ131I 25
VZ132I 25
VZ133I 25
VZ134I 25
VZ140I 25
VZ141I 25
VZ142I 25
VZ143I 25
VZ144I 25
298
Project
References
Hager: The specialist for electrical installations!
The specialist for electrical installations in residential and

commercial sectors, as a standard you can receive
everything from one source: systems and solutions with high quality, re-
liability and ease of installation.
Hotels, banks, offices, industries, homes or shopping malls: our

references are now our trademark.
Commercial Commercial Industrial
Buildings Buildings Buildings
Commercial Banks & Insurance - ONGC Offshore, Mumbai
- Vibrant Gujarat, Ahmedabad - ICICI - Reliance, Jamnagar
- Michael Schumacher World - SBI - Renault Nissan, Chennai
Trade Tower, Gurgaon - HDFC Bank - Toshiba Machineries, Chennai
- Godrej One, Mumbai - Yes Bank - Royal Enfield, Chennai
- National Institute of Securities - LIC West Zone - Hensel, Sriperumbudur
Markets, Mumbai - AXA, Pune - JUSCO, Jamshedpur
- Vodafone, Chennai - Tata AIG - Dr. Reddy Laboratories, Baddi
- Mind Space Realities, Mumbai - Kotak - Ultratech, Ahmedabad
- MGR Film City, Chennai - Metlife - L&T, Hazira, Gujarat
- Hindustan Construction, Delhi - Wind World (Enercon), Mumbai
- Coimbatore Jewelers, Salem Retail & Malls - MRPL Refinery, Mangalore
- CDK Hyderabad/ Pune - BPCL, Andhra Pradesh - Reliance Infrastructure, Mumbai
- HPCL, Andhra Pradesh - Ambuja Cement, Raipur
Office Spaces - Prozone Mall, Aurangabad - EAP Industrial, Ahmedabad
- Times Of India, Delhi - Shoppers Stop, Mumbai - Chirayil Polyfilms, Surat
- Naukri.com, Noida - Gucci - Alok Industries, Vapi
- British Telecom, Delhi - Zara, Chennai - Erode Textile Mall, Erode
- BPCL Corporate Office, Mumbai - Future Group - Volkswagen, Pune
- Crisil, Mumbai - Cinemax - Bajaj Auto, Pune
- Cash & Carry, Mumbai - Godrej Industries, Mumbai
Hotels - Kidzania, Mumbai - John Deere, Pune
- Hyatt, Goa - Paras Spices, Punjab - EPCOS, Ahmedabad
- Hyatt, Lucknow - Pantaloon, Guwahati - Alstom, Ahmedabad
- Lalit Hotel, New Delhi - Burger King, Mumbai - Munjal Auto, Gurgaon
- Lemon Tree, Hyderabad - Taco Bell, Mumbai - Otis Lifts, Bengaluru
- Radisson, Bhiwadi - KFC, Mumbai - GNFC, Gujarat
- Taj, Gondia - Milan Mall, Mumbai - Himalaya Industry, Uttarakhand
- Marasa Hospitality, Mumbai - Jindal, Raigarh
- Lemon Tree, Hyderabad IT/ ITES - JNP, Bengaluru
- Seetharam, Coimbatore - Oracle, Gurgaon - ITC Food Processing, Guwahati
- Tulip Hotel. Jaipur - Accenture, Chennai / Bengaluru - Godrej Factory, Haridwar
- Plaza Hotel, Asansol - Capegemini, Mumbai
- Lenovo, Bengaluru
Hospitals - Hewlett Packard, Bengaluru
- Glocal Healthcare Services, Kolkata - Myntra.com, Bengaluru
- Sunshine Hospital, Secundrabad - Jabong.com, Gurgaon
- Superspeciality Hospital, Delhi - TCS, Pune
- Metro Hospital, Gurgaon, - Synergy Telecom-Gurgaon
- Sagore Dutta Hospital, Kolkata - Mind Tree, Bengaluru
- Jaypee Medical Center, Noida - Sify Aeroli, Mumbai
- Lisie Hospital, Kochi - Dell, Noida
- Apollo Hospital, Vizag - IBM, Noida
- Genpact IT Park, Delhi
- Inautix, Pune
- Ricoh Data Center, Delhi
- Espire Info Labs,
- AltiSource, Bengaluru
- JS Telecom, Kolkata
- NetMagic, Mumbai
Residential Educational Government
Buildings Buildings Buildings
- Tata Gurgaon Gateway, Gurgaon - IIT Hyderabad - NTPC, Delhi
- Hiranandani Heritage, Mumbai - IIT Mumbai - Rashtrapati Bhawan, Delhi
- Hiranadani Eva, Mumbai - IIT Guwahati - Supreme Court, Delhi
- Hiranandani, Bengaluru - IIT Kharagpur - National Rural Health Mission,
- Panchshil - Yoo Pune - IIT Bhubaneshwar Guwahati
- Emami City, Kolkata - IIT Madras - Guwahati Secretariat
- Vatika, Gurgaon - IIT Mandi - Neyojan Bhavan, Patna
- Nathani Heights, Mumbai - IIIT Jabalpur - Railway Quarter Electrification
- Mahindra Nova, Chennai - SRM University, Chennai - MES(Officers MESS), Lucknow
- Adani Housing, Gurgaon - Madras University - Income Tax Building, Patna
- Brigade Group-Omega, - NIIT, Delhi - Nizam Palace CPWD-Kolkata
Bengaluru - Medical College, Jaipur - WBPDCIL Office, Kolkata
- Amba Township, Ahmedabad - Agricultural University, Sabour, Bihar - American Consulate, Kolkata
- Radha Rani Regent, Chennai - Govt. Engineering College, Trichy - MES, Siliguri
- Surekha Builders, Bhubaneswar - Alliance University, Bengaluru - PWD, Guwahati
- ALCOVE, Kolkata - SJGJ school, Kanchipuram, - BSF, Hazaribagh
- Ansals Buildwel, Gurgaon - Berhampur Medical College, Odisha - CPWD, Madhya Pradesh
- Aspiration Harmony, Kolkata - IIFT, Delhi - AICTE Head Quarters, Delhi
- Chandigarh Housing Board - NISER, Bhubaneshwar - Lanco Anpara Power Ltd,
- Harmonia of Gokulam, Cochin - Amity University, Delhi Lucknow
- Donata County, Bengaluru - DAV University, Jalandhar - BHEL, Trichy
- Kasturi Balmoral, Pune - Lovely International Trust, Jalandhar - ICF, Chennai
- Mahadudhi Apartments - Thapar University, Patiala
- Maya Garden City, Chandigarh - Punjabi University, Chandigarh
- SSM, Chennai - NIT-MBA Block, Trichy
- Lotus, Mumbai
- Vasupujya Group, Surat
Infrastructure Others
- Mumbai International Airport Ltd. - Akshardham Temple, Delhi
- Cochin International Airport - Mahatma Mandir, Gandhinagar
- Guwahati Airport - Swaminarayan Mandir, Ahmedabad
- Indira Gandhi International Airport, Delhi
- Indira Gandhi International Airport Metro,
Delhi
- Delhi Metro Rail Corporation, Delhi
- Jaipur Metro
- Rail Coach Factory, Kapurthala
- Delhi Jal Board
- Chennai High Court
- Defence Research and Development
Organisation, Delhi
- Jaypee Sports City
- Rajiv Gandhi Stadium, Kochi
Notes
302
Notes
303
Where
is my
nearest
Hager
contact
person?
javiindy - Fotolia.com
Always
Near
North North West West Central
1 NCR
2 Punjab
3 Greater Mumbai
4 Maharashtra
Haryana Chandigarh Gujarat (without Greater Mumbai)
Uttar Pradesh Himachal Pradesh Goa Chattisgarh
Uttarakhand J&K Madhya Pradesh Telangana
Rajasthan Andhra Pradesh
South East Nepal Bhutan

5 Tamilnadu
6 West Bengal
7 8
Pondicherry Orissa
Karanataka Bihar
Kerala Jharkhand
North East
Jalandhar
Ludhiana
Chandigarh
Jaipur
Siliguri
Lucknow Guwahati
Patna
Ahmedabad
Indore Kolkata
Vadodara
Ranchi
Rajkot
Surat
Nagpur Raipur Bhubaneshwar
Aurangabad
Vizag
Goa
Hyderabad
Legends
Bangalore
Sales Office
Sales Team Calicut Our network to serve you better...

Chennai
Coimbatore 300+ Authorised Channel Partners
Factory
Trichy
Cochin
35+ System Integrators
Warehouse
Export Market Madurai
* Product development is an continuous process and hence the described content in the catalogue are subject to change without prior notice.
Contact your nearest Hager Partner for the latest information.
Hager Electro Private Limited Tel: +91 20 41477500
Sales & Marketing office : Fax: +91 20 41477510
Office 2A, First Floor Toll free no.: 1800 103 5440
North Court Building Email: hagerwow@hager.co.in
Opposite Joggers Park Website: www.hager.co.in
Kalyani Nagar
Pune-411006
India
Delhi Sales Office : Tel: +91 11 49677500

B 217 Tower B Fax: +91 11 49677555
DLF Towers, Jasola
New Delhi-110025
India
Mumbai Sales Office : Tel: +91 22 71813200

Office # 1301A, Tower 3,
Indiabulls Finance Centre
Elphistone Road,
Mumbai-400 013
India
Hager Electro SAS:

132 Boulevard d` Europe
BP 78
F-67212 Obernai
France
Scan this QR code

www.facebook.com/HagerIndia www.twitter.com/HagerIndia to know more

Hager TC2015 16

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hager TC2015 16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Energy Building

We are pleased to present to you our new Technical Catalogue

Hager group focus on a single core Business for 60 years, which

In this context, we have organized ourselves accordingly in all the

Our Technical Catalogue, heralds several smart new ranges and

Our next journey will continue to take us through innovation,

Hager is 60 years young! Good 60 years of innovative electrical

Happy to share insights on Hagers strategic initiative, the Project 2015.

We have stayed true to our commitment on delighting with innovative

We look forward to your valued patronage and assured of our best

Praveen Kumar Nair P

New ideas for the customers benefit

Protection and switching devices

Signaling and power interface

Energy and lighting control

Catalogue references index

MCBs I RCCBs I RCBOs I Accessories I

IP 65 UV protected Vector Enclosure |

Indicator lights I Pushbuttons I Analogue

Time switches I Twilight switches I

LED Floodlight I Dimmers I Energy meters I

TPN distribution boards 15

TPN horizontal PPI distribution

TPN tier type PPI distribution boards 17

TPN vertical distribution boards 18

TPN phase segregated distribution

TPN phase selector distribution

Flexi distribution boards 23

Metal plug & socket outlet 25

Plug & socket outlets 25

Cable end boxes for novello DBs 26

VTPN Panel boards 50

Advantages for you : Technical data :

Additional safety for human protection As per IS 8623 - III

1 locking system with minimal

Patented IP2X neutral Site upgradable door

Spirit level to ensure Double packaging

3 accurate & rofessional

Lab certified IP43 Star washers

Reversible door Removable chassis

10 14 for ease of installation

Captive spring Convenient 180 degree

Anti wall insertion Reusable cable

Advantages for you : Technical data :

Reusable & flexible cable management As per IS 8623 - III

Description Total No. of Modules Catalogue No.

IP30 - Single Door

IP54 Double Door-Plain

Pre-wired and TV telephone DBs available on request.

Description Total No. of Modules Catalogue No.

IP30 Single Door

IP43 Double Door-Acrylic / Glazed

IP54 Double Door-Plain

Pre-wired and TV telephone DBs available on request.

Description Total No. of Modules Catalogue No.

IP43 Double Door

IP43 Double Door-Acrylic / Glazed

IP54 Double Door-Plain

Description Total No. of Modules Catalogue No.

IP43 Double Door-Plain

IP43 Double Door-Acrylic / Glazed

IP54 Double Door-Plain

Description Total No. of Modules Catalogue No.